WTI Part No. 13762
Rev. H
MPC Series
Managed Power Controllers
Models Covered:
MPC-8H-1
MPC-8H-2
MPC-16H-1
MPC-16H-2
MPC-18H-1
MPC-18H-2
MPC-20VS20-1
MPC-20VS20-2
MPC-20VD20-2
MPC-20VS30-2
MPC-20VD30-2
MPC-20VS16-3
MPC-20VD16-3
MPC-20VS32-3
MPC-20VD32-3
MPC-20V-1
MPC-20V-2
MPC-DISPLAY
MPC-20VD20-1
MPC-20VS30-1
MPC-20VD30-1
Firmware Version 1.6 and Higher
User's Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warnings and Cautions
Disconnect Power
If any of the following events are noted, immediately disconnect the unit from the outlet
and contact qualified service personnel:
1. If the power cord becomes frayed or damaged.
2. If liquid has been spilled into the device or if the device has been exposed to rain
or water.
Two Power Supply Cables
Note that some MPC series units feature two separate power circuits, and a separate
power supply cable for each power circuit. If your MPC unit includes two power supply
cables, make certain to disconnect both power supply cables from their power source
before attempting to service or remove the unit.
Detached 15-Amp “Starter” Cable(s)
If the MPC unit includes a detached, 125 VAC, 15 Amp “Starter” Cable(s,) this allows
you to connect the MPC to power for bench testing and initial start up is adequate for
applications that only require 15 Amps. For 20-Amp power switching applications,
please refer to the WTI Power Cable guide supplied with the unit, or use appropriate 20-
Amp cables.
Units with Attached Power Supply Cable(s)
For MPC units that include attached power supply cable(s), the socket outlet(s) shall be
installed near the equipment and shall be accessible.
ii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Agency Approvals
FCC Part 15 Regulation
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated
in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the
user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation
WARNING: Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment
EMC, Safety, and R&TTE Directive Compliance
The CE mark is affixed to this product to confirm compliance with the following
European Community Directives:
•
•
Council Directive 89/336/EEC of 3 May 1989 on the approximation of the laws
of Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility;
and
Council Directive 73/23/EEC of 19 February 1973 on the harmonization of
the laws of Member States relating to electrical equipment designed for use
within certain voltage limits;
and
•
Council Directive 1999/5/EC of 9 March on radio equipment and
telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their
conformity.
Industry Canada - EMI Information
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
2. Unit Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1. MPC-H Series - Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.2. MPC-H Series - Back Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.3. MPC-V Series - Hardware Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.4. Additional Button Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
3. Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1. Installing the MPC Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1.1. Apply Power to the MPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1.2. Connect your PC to the MPC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.2. Communicating with the MPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.3. Installing and Operating the Optional MPC-DISPLAY Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
4. Hardware Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1. Connecting the Power Supply Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1.1. Installing the Power Supply Cable Keepers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1.2. Connect the MPC to Your Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2. Connection to Switched Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.3. Serial Console Port Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.3.1. Connecting a Local PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.3.2. Connecting an External Modem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.4. Connecting the Network Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.5. Connecting Remote MPC Units to the AUX Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.6. Connecting the Optional MPC-DISPLAY Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.7. Rack Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
5. Basic Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1. Communicating with the MPC Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1.1. The Text Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1.2. The Web Browser Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.1.3. Access Via PDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.2. Configuration Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.3. Defining System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.3.1. The Real Time Clock and Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.3.2. The Invalid Access Lockout Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.3.3. Automated Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.3.4. Log Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5.3.4.2. The Current Metering Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.3.5. Callback Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.3.6. Power Source Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5.4. User Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5.4.1. Command Access Levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5.4.2. Plug Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
5.4.3. Port Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.5. Managing User Accounts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5.5.1. Viewing User Accounts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5.5.2. Adding User Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5.5.3. Modifying User Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
5.5.4. Deleting User Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
5. Basic Configuration (continued)
5.6. The Plug Group Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
5.6.1. Viewing Plug Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
5.6.2. Adding Plug Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
5.6.3. Modifying Plug Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
5.6.4. Deleting Plug Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
5.7. Defining Plug Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
5.7.1. The Boot Priority Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
5.8. Serial Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
5.8.1. Console Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
5.8.2. Remote Port and AUX Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
5.9. Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
5.9.1. Network Port Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
5.9.2. Network Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
5.9.3. IP Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
5.9.3.3. IP Security Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
5.9.4. Static Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
5.9.5. Domain Name Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
5.9.6. SNMP Access Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
5.9.7. SNMP Trap Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
5.9.8. LDAP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
5.9.8.1. Adding LDAP Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
5.9.8.2 Viewing LDAP Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
5.9.8.3. Modifying LDAP Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
5.9.8.4. Deleting LDAP Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
5.9.8.5. LDAP Kerberos Set Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
5.9.9. TACACS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
5.9.10. RADIUS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
5.9.11. Email Message Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
5.10. Save User Selected Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
5.10.1. Restore Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
6. Reboot Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1. Ping-No-Answer Reboot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.1.1. Adding Ping-No-Answer Reboots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.1.2. Viewing Ping-No-Answer Reboot Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.1.3. Modifying Ping-No-Answer Reboot Profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.1.4. Deleting Ping-No-Answer Reboot Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.2. Scheduled Reboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.2.1. Adding Scheduled Reboots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.2.2. Viewing Scheduled Reboot Actions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6.2.3. Modifying Scheduled Reboots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6.2.4. Deleting Scheduled Reboots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
7. Alarm Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1. The Over Current Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Text Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.2. The Over Temperature Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Text Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7.3. The Circuit Breaker Open Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
7.4. The Lost Communication with AUX Units Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
7.5. The Lost Voltage (Line In) Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
7.6. The Ping-No-Answer Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
7.7. The Invalid Access Lockout Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
7.8. The Power Cycle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
8. The Status Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1. Product Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.2. The Network Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.3. The Plug Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.4. The Plug Group Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.5. The Current Metering Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.6. The Current History Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.7. The Power Range Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
8.8. The Power History Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
9. Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.1. Operation via the Web Browser Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.1.1. The Plug Control Screen - Web Browser Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.2. Operation via the Text Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9.2.1. The Plug Status Screen - Text Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9.2.4. Connecting to Serial Ports - Text Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
9.3. The Automated Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
9.4. Manual Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
9.5. Logging Out of Command Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
10. SSH Encryption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
11.1. Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11.2. Testing Syslog Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
12. SNMP Traps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.1. Configuration:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.2. Testing the SNMP Trap Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
13.1. MPC SNMP Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
13.2. SNMPv3 Authentication and Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
13.3. Configuration via SNMP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
13.3.1. Viewing Users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
13.3.2. Adding Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
13.3.3. Modifying Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
13.3.4. Deleting Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
13.4. Plug Control via SNMP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
13.4.1. Controlling Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
13.4.2. Controlling Plug Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
13.5. Viewing MPC Status via SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
13.5.1. Plug Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
13.5.2. Unit Environment Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
13.5.3. System Environment Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
13.6. Sending Traps via SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
14.1. Creating a Self Signed Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
14.2. Creating a Signed Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
14.3. Downloading the Server Private Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
15.1. Sending Parameters to a File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
15.2. Restoring Saved Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
15.3. Restoring Previously Saved Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
16. Upgrading MPC Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
17.1. Command Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
17.2. Command Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
17.3. Command Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
17.3.1. Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
17.3.2. Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5
17.3.3. Configuration Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-9
Appendices
A. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Apx-1
B. Interface Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Apx-2
B.1. Serial Console Port (RS232) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apx-2
B.2. RJ-45 AUX Port Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apx-3
C. Connecting Devices to AUX & Remote Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Apx-4
C.1. Connecting an Auxiliary MPC Unit to the MPC AUX Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apx-4
C.2. Connecting an MPC-DISPLAY Unit to an MPC Master Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apx-5
D. Customer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Apx-7
E. Rack Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Apx-8
E.1. "L" Bracket Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apx-8
E.2. Mounting Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apx-10
E.3. Hook Bracket Mounting (MPC-20V Series Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apx-11
E.4. Zero-U Pocket Bracket Mounting (MPC-20V Series Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apx-12
E.5. Universal Mounting Bracket (MPC-20V Series Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apx-13
F. Output Cable Keeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Apx-15
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
List of Figures
The Plug Status Screen (Text Interface; MPC-20V Shown) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
The Home Screen (Web Browser Interface). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
The System Parameters Menu (Text Interface). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
The Add User Menu (Text Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
The Add Plug Group Menu (Text Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
The Add Plug Groups Menu (Web Browser Interface). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
The Plug Parameters Menu (Text Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
5.10. The Plug Parameters Menu (Web Browser Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
5.11. Boot Priority Example 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
5.12. Boot Priority Example 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
5.13. Serial Port Configuration Menu (Text Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
5.14. Port Configuration Menu (Web Browser Interface). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
5.15. Remote/AUX Port Configuration Menu (Text Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
5.16. Remote/AUX Port Configuration Menu (Web Browser Interface). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
5.17. Network Parameters Menu (Text Interface). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
5.18. Network Configuration Menu (Web Browser Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
The Help Menu (Administrator Mode; Text Interface). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
11.1. The Test Menu (Text Interface, Administrator Mode Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
14.1. Web Access Parameters (Text Interface Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
RS232 Console Port Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apx-2
MPC Series AUX Port Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apx-3
Connecting RJ-45 DCE Devices to the AUX & Remote Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apx-6
Mounting Holes; MPC-20V Back Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apx-9
Attaching Mounting Buttons to MPC-20V (Vertical) Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apx-10
Zero-U Pocket Brackets (Cross Section; Nested in Pocket) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apx-12
Attaching the Universal Mounting Brackets to the Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apx-14
Installing the Output Cable Keeper (MPC-20V Series Units Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apx-15
viii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Introduction
WTI’s MPC series Managed Power Controllers allow secure, remote metering and
management of AC powered rack mount equipment via SSL, SSH, SNMP, web
browser, telnet, external modem or local terminal. The MPC can monitor power to your
equipment, and automatically notify you when changes in current levels, temperature,
circuit breaker status or other factors exceed user-defined threshold values.
The MPC features two separate power circuits with up to 20 Amps input feed handling
capacity per branch circuit, and is available in a horizontal, rack mount version with
eight or sixteen switched outlets, or as a “zero unit” vertical mount model with 20
switched outlets.
Power Metering and Management:
The MPC can constantly measure current consumption, temperature levels, ping
response and other factors. If the MPC detects that user defined thresholds for these
values have been exceeded, the unit can promptly notify you via email, SNMP, Syslog,
LED or audible alarm. When temperature and current readings exceed user defined
critical values, the MPC can also intelligently shed the current load by temporarily
shutting down nonessential devices; when readings return to acceptable levels, the
MPC can restore power to those devices to return to normal operating conditions.
In addition, the MPC can also notify you when the Invalid Access Lockout has
been triggered, when one of the MPC circuit breakers is open, or when a loss of
communication with the optional auxiliary units is detected. The MPC also records
current consumption data to a convenient log file, which can be retrieved in ASCII, XML,
or CSV format or displayed in graph format.
Security and Co-Location Features:
Secure Shell (SSHv2) encryption and address-specific IP security masks help to prevent
unauthorized access to command and configuration functions.
The MPC also provides four different levels of security for user accounts: Administrator,
SuperUser, User and ViewOnly. The Administrator level provides complete access to
all plug functions, operating features and configuration menus. The SuperUser level
allows switching and rebooting of all plugs but does not allow access to configuration
functions. The User level allows access to only a select group of Administrator-defined
plugs. The ViewOnly level allows you to check plug status and unit status, but does not
allow switching or rebooting of outlets or access to configuration menus.
The MPC includes full Radius support, LDAP capability, TACACS capability, MIB
capability, DHCP and an invalid access lockout feature. An Audit Log records all user
access, login and logout times and command actions.
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Convenient, Durable Design:
The MPC is available with an optional remote display panel, which can be used to show
the status of MPC units installed in hard-to-reach spots, deep inside equipment racks.
When additional outlets are needed, each MPC unit can also be connected to up to
three Auxiliary/Remote MPC units, allowing control of up to 80 outlets via a single IP
Address .
Model Numbers
The MPC series includes a variety of horizontal and vertical models to accommodate the
power distribution needs of almost any rack mount application.
Input
Feeds
Input
Voltage
Max. Load
per Outlet
Max. Load
per Input
Max. Load
per Unit
Model No.
MPC-8H-1
2 ea, 20 Amp
2 ea, 16 Amp
2 ea, 20 Amp
2 ea, 16 Amp
1 ea, 20 Amp
1 ea, 16 Amp
2 ea, 20 Amp
2 ea, 16 Amp
1 ea, 20 Amp
1 ea, 16 Amp
2 ea, 20 Amp
2 ea, 20 Amp
1 ea, 30 Amp
1 ea, 30 Amp
2 ea, 30 Amp
2 ea, 30 Amp
1 ea, 16 Amp
2 ea, 16 Amp
1 ea, 32 Amp
2 ea, 32 Amp
100 to 120 VAC
100 to 240 VAC
100 to 120 VAC
100 to 240 VAC
100 to 120 VAC
100 to 240 VAC
100 to 120 VAC
100 to 240 VAC
100 to 120 VAC
100 to 240 VAC
100 to 120 VAC
100 to 240 VAC
100 to 120 VAC
100 to 240 VAC
100 to 120 VAC
100 to 240 VAC
100 to 240 VAC
100 to 240 VAC
100 to 240 VAC
100 to 240 VAC
16 Amps
10 Amps
16 Amps
10 Amps
16 Amps
10 Amps
16 Amps
15 Amps
16 Amps
15 Amps
16 Amps
15 Amps
20 Amps
15 Amps
20 Amps
15 Amps
10 Amps
10 Amps
10 Amps
10 Amps
16 Amps *
16 Amps *
16 Amps *
16 Amps *
16 Amps *
16 Amps *
16 Amps *
16 Amps *
16 Amps *
16 Amps *
16 Amps *
16 Amps *
24 Amps *
24 Amps *
24 Amps *
24 Amps *
16 Amps
32 Amps *
32 Amps *
32 Amps *
32 Amps *
16 Amps *
16 Amps *
32 Amps *
32 Amps *
16 Amps *
16 Amps *
32 Amps *
32 Amps *
24 Amps *
24 Amps *
48 Amps *
48 Amps *
16 Amps
MPC-8H-2
MPC-16H-1
MPC-16H-2
MPC-18H-1
MPC-18H-2
MPC-20V-1
MPC-20V-2
MPC-20VS20-1
MPC-20VS20-2
MPC-20VD20-1
MPC-20VD20-2
MPC-20VS30-1
MPC-20VS30-2
MPC-20VD30-1
MPC-20VD30-2
MPC-20VS16-3
MPC-20VD16-3
MPC-20VS32-3
MPC-20VD32-3
16 Amps
32 Amps
32 Amps
32 Amps
32 Amps
64 Amps
* In accordance with UL requirements for branch circuits, this value has been
de-rated to 80%.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Typographic Conventions
^(e.g. ^X)
Indicates a control character. For example, the text "^X" (Control X)
indicates the [Ctrl] key and the [X] key must be pressed
simultaneously.
COURIER FONT
Indicates characters typed on the keyboard.
For example, /ACor /ON A2.
[Bold Font]
Text set in bold face and enclosed in square brackets indicates a
specific key. For example, [Enter] or [Esc].
< >
[ ]
Indicates required keyboard entries. For Example: /P <n>.
Indicates optional keyboard entries. For Example: /P [n].
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Unit Description
2.1. MPC-H Series - Front Panel
1
2
3
4
5
www.wti.com
MPC-16H
REMOTE AUX 1
AMPS
VOLTS
KWATTS
TEMP
A1 A2 A3 A4
A5 A6 A7 A8
B1 B2 B3 B4
B5 B6 B7 B8
8.8.8
8.8.8
Managed Power
Controller
AUDIBLE
ALARM
DISPLAY
SELECTION
DEFAULT
PLUGS
INPUT
A
INPUT
B
PLUGS
ON
AUX 2
AUX 3
CONSOLE PORT
6
7
8
9
Figure 2.1: MPC-H Series - Front Panel (Model MPC-16H Shown)
As shown in Figure 2.1, the MPC-H Series Front Panel includes the following
components:
1. Power Circuit A - Indicator Lights: LED indicators, which light when power is
applied to the corresponding outlet on Power Circuit A.
Note: MPC-18H series units feature a single power circuit (branch.)
Accordingly, MPC-18H units also include only one set of Indicator lights and
only one Digital Display.
2. Power Circuit A - Digital Display: An LED digital readout, which can be used
to show Amps, Kilowatts, Volts or Temperature for Power Circuit A. Note that the
Display Selection Button is used to determine which of these values will appear on
the digital display..
3. Display Selection Button and Indicators: Determines which measurement will
appear on the Digital Displays for Circuits A and B. Each time the Display Selection
Button is pressed, the Digital Displays will toggle between Amps, Kilowatts, Volts,
Temperature, Total Kilowatts and Total Amps. Please refer to Section 2.4 for
additional button functions.
4. Power Circuit B - Digital Display: Same as Item 2 above, except displays values
for Power Circuit B. (Not present on MPC-18H series units.)
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unit Description
5. Power Circuit B - Indicator Lights: Same as Item 1 above, except the LEDs light
to indicate On/Off status of Power Circuit B outlets. (Not present on MPC-18H
series units.).
6. Link Ports: Four RJ45 connectors, which can be used to link the MPC unit to up
to three other MPC or BPM units, plus the optional MPC-DISPLAY, status display
panel. When your MPC unit is linked to other MPC units, this allows control of
up to four MPC units (one local unit, plus three remote units) via one IP address.
If necessary, the Link Ports can also be reconfigured as RS232 serial ports (as
described in Section 5.8.2) to allow communication with attached devices. The
MPC includes three AUX Ports and one Remote Port; the remote port is intended
for connection to the MPC-DISPLAY unit, and the AUX Ports are intended for
connection to additional MPC units.
7. Console Port: A DB9, RS232 serial port (DTE), which can be used for connection
to a local terminal or external modem, as described in Section 4. For a description
of the Console Port interface, please refer to Appendix B.1.
8. Default Button: This button can be used to either reset the unit to default
parameters or to perform several other functions, described in Section 2.4.
9. Audible Alarm Button and LED: When any of the Alarms discussed in Section 7
are triggered, this LED will light, and the MPC will emit an audible alarm signal. To
turn off the audible alarm single, press the Audible Alarm Button once. Please refer
to Section 2.4 for additional button functions.
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unit Description
1
2
3
6
4
5
3
BUS
A
BUS
A
A-1
B-1
A-2
B-2
A-3
B-3
A-4
B-4
A-5
B-5
A-6
B-6
A-7
B-7
A-8
B-8
ACT LINK
ALARM
A
B
BUS
B
BUS
B
10/100 BaseT
6
7
8
Figure 2.2: MPC-H Series - Back Panel (Model MPC-16H-1 Shown)
2.2. MPC-H Series - Back Panel
As shown in Figure 2.2, the MPC-H Series Back Panel includes the following
components:
1. Power Circuit A - Power Inlet: An IEC320-C20 AC inlet which supplies power to
MPC control functions and the Circuit “A” outlets. Also includes cable keeper
(not shown.)
Note: MPC-18H series units feature a single Power Inlet.
2. Power Circuit B - Power Inlet: An IEC320-C20 AC inlet which supplies power to
MPC control functions and the Circuit “B” outlets. Also includes cable keeper
(not shown.) (Not present on MPC-18H series units.)
3. Power Circuit A - Circuit Breaker(s): Note that on MPC-16H and MPC-18H
models, there are two circuit breakers for each power circuit. The circuit breakers
are rated as follows:
• MPC-8H-1, MPC-16H-1 and MPC-18H-1: 20 Amp Circuit Breaker(s).
• MPC-8H-2, MPC-16H-2 and MPC-18H-2: 16 Amp Circuit Breaker(s).
4. Power Circuit A - Switched Outlets: AC Outlets that can be switched On, Off or
rebooted in response to user commands:
• MPC-8H-1: Four (4) each, NEMA 5-20R Outlets.
• MPC-8H-2: Four (4) each, IEC320-C13 Outlets.
• MPC-16H-1: Eight (8) each, NEMA 5-20R Outlets.
• MPC-16H-2: Eight (8) each, IEC320-C13 Outlets.
• MPC-18H-1: Eight (8) each, NEMA 5-20R Outlets.
• MPC-18H-2: Eight (8) each, IEC320-C13 Outlets.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unit Description
5. Power Circuit B - Switched Outlets: Same as Item 4 above. (Not present on
MPC-18H series units.)
6. Power Circuit B - Circuit Breaker(s): Same as Item 3 above. (Not present on
MPC-18H series units.)
7. Alarm Indicator Lights: Two LEDs which light when an alarm condition is detected
at the corresponding power circuit. For information on Alarm Configuration, please
refer to Section 7. Note that MPC-18H series units include only one Alarm Indicator
Light.
8. Network Port: An RJ45 Ethernet port for connection to your 100Base-T, TCP/IP
network. Note that the MPC features a default IP address (192.168.168.168). This
allows you to connect to the unit without first assigning an IP address. Note that the
Network Port also includes two, small LED indicators for Link and Data Activity. For
more information on Network Port configuration, please refer to Section 5.9.
2.3. MPC-V Series - Hardware Description
As shown in Figure 2.3, MPC-V Series units include the following components:
1. Default Button: This button can be used to either reset the unit to default
parameters or to perform several other functions, as described in Section 2.4.
2. Audible Alarm Button and LED: Two LEDs which light when an alarm condition
is detected at the corresponding power circuit. For information on Alarm
Configuration, please refer to Section 7. Please refer to Section 2.4 for additional
button functions Note that MPC-V series units that include only one power inlet will
also include only one Alarm LED.
3. Display Selection Button and Indicators: Determines which measurement will
appear on the Digital Displays for Circuits A and B. Each time the Display Selection
Button is pressed, the Digital Displays will toggle between Amps, Kilowatts, Volts,
Temperature, Total Kilowatts and Total Amps. When either "Total Kilowatts" or "Total
Amps" are selected, the MPC will display the total for Circuits A and B combined.
An LED indicator will light to show which measurement is currently selected.
Please refer to Section 2.4 for additional button functions. Note that the "Total
Kilowatts and "Total Amps" displays are not available on all MPC-V series units, and
that MPC-V series units that include only one power inlet, will also include only one
Digital Display.
4. Link Ports: Four RJ45 connectors, which can be used to link the MPC unit to up
to three other MPC or BPM units, plus the optional MPC-DISPLAY, status display
panel. When your MPC unit is linked to other MPC units, this allows control of up
to four MPC units (one local unit, plus three remote units) via one IP address. If
necessary, the Link Ports can also be reconfigured for use as RS232 serial ports
(as described in Section 5.8.2) to allow communication with attached devices. The
MPC includes three AUX Ports and one Remote Port; the Remote Port is intended
for connection to the MPC-DISPLAY unit, and the AUX Ports are intended for
connection to additional MPC units.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unit Description
1
4
AUX
1
AUX
3
DEFAULT
REMOTE
DISPLAY
AUX
2
2
3
5
6
AUDIBLE
ALARM
LINK
ACT
ON
Ethernet
10/100
TOTAL A+B
KWATTS
DISPLAY
SELECTION
AMPS
CONSOLE
AMPS VOLTS KWATTS TEMP
8.8.8 8.8.8
A
B
7
8
Managed Power Controller
MPC-20V
BRANCH
A1
BRANCH
B1
PLUG A1
PLUG A2
PLUG A3
PLUG A4
PLUG A5
PLUG A6
PLUG A7
PLUG A8
PLUG A9
PLUG A10
PLUG B1
PLUG B2
PLUG B3
PLUG B4
PLUG B5
PLUG B6
PLUG B7
PLUG B8
PLUG B9
PLUG B10
9
10
BRANCH
A2
BRANCH
B2
A1
A2
B1
B2
11
12
13
Figure 2.3: MPC-20V Series - Hardware Description (Model MPC-20VD20-1 Shown)
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unit Description
5. Network Port: An RJ45 Ethernet port for connection to your 100Base-T, TCP/IP
network. Note that the MPC features a default IP address (192.168.168.168). This
allows you to connect to the unit without first assigning an IP address. Note that the
Network Port also includes two, small LED indicators for Link and Data Activity. For
more information on Network Port configuration, please refer to Section 5.9.
6. Console Port: A DB9, RS232 serial port (DTE), which can be used for connection
to a local terminal or external modem, as described in Section 4. For a description
of the Console Port interface, please refer to Appendix B.1.
7. Power Circuit A - Digital Display: An LED digital readout, which can be used
to show Amps, Kilowatts, Volts or Temperature for Power Circuit A. Note that the
Display Selection Button (Item 3) is used to determine which of these values will
appear on the digital display.
Note: Some MPC models include only one power circuit. Accordingly, MPC
models that include only one power circuit, the unit will also have only one
digital display.
8. Power Circuit B - Digital Display: Same as Item 7 above, except displays values
for Power Circuit B. MPC Models that include only one power circuit will also have
only one digital display.
9. Power Circuit A - Switched Outlets and Indicator Lights: AC Outlets that can be
switched On, Off or rebooted in response to user commands. Note that each outlet
includes an LED Indicator, which lights when power is applied to the outlet.
Notes:
• Some MPC models include only one power circuit.
• Please refer to the table in Section 1 or Section 3 for power ratings for your
specific MPC model.
10. Power Circuit B - Switched Outlets and Indicator Lights: Same as Item 9 above,
except outlets and LED indicators are for Power Circuit B. Note that some MPC
models include only one power circuit.
11. Circuit Breaker(s): Some MPC models include two power circuits, with two
breakers for each circuit, and other MPC models include only one power circuit with
two circuit breakers. For a description of the power rating for your specific MPC
model, please refer to the table in Section 1 or Section 3.
12. Unit Bottom Plate: In all models except MPC-20V-1 and MPC-20V-2, the power
inlets are located on the bottom plate of the unit. In MPC-20V-1 and MPC-20V-2
models, the power inlets are located at the bottom of the front panel.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unit Description
13. Power Inlet(s): The power inlets are configured differently on MPC models, in
accordance with the power rating, maximum load and the number of power circuits.
Depending on your specific model, the MPC may include either one or two power
inlets or either one or two power supply cables. Other MPC models may include
either one or two permanently attached power supply cables. For a description of
the power input configuration for your specific MPC unit, please refer to the table in
Section 1 or Section 3. Note that MPC models with detachable power cable(s) will
also include a power inlet cable keeper.
2.4. Additional Button Functions
In addition to the button functions discussed in Sections 2.1, 2.2 and 2.3, the Default,
Audible Alarm and Display Selection buttons can also be used to perform several
additional functions described below:
Notes:
• All Front Panel Button functions can also be disabled via the System
Parameters menu, as described in Section 5.3.
• When the MPC is reset to factory defaults, all user-defined configuration
parameters will be cleared, and the default “super” user account will also be
restored.
1. Reboot Operating System:
a) Press and hold the Default button for five seconds, and then release it.
b) The MPC will reboot it's operating system; all plugs will be left in their current
On/Off state.
c) If the optional MPC-DISPLAY unit is installed, and this operation is performed at
the MPC-DISPLAY unit, all connected MPC units will also be rebooted.
2. Set Parameters to Factory Defaults:
a) Simultaneously press both the Default button and the Display Selection button,
hold them for five seconds, and then release them.
b) All MPC parameters will be reset to their original factory default settings, and
the unit will then reboot. All plugs will be left in their current On/Off state.
c) This function will not be applied to other connected MPC units.
3. Toggle/Default All Plugs:
a) Simultaneously press both the Default button and Audible Alarm button, hold
them for five seconds, and then release them.
b) The MPC will switch all plugs to the Off state. If all plugs are already in the Off
state, then the unit will reset all plugs to their user defined default states.
c) This function will not be applied to other connected MPC units.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unit Description
4. Enable/Disable Audible Alarm:
a) In the default state, the Audible Alarm is Enabled.
b) To disable the Audible Alarm, press and hold the Audible Alarm button for three
seconds and then release it. To enable the Audible Alarm, press and hold the
Audible Alarm button for three seconds again.
c) If the optional MPC-DISPLAY unit is installed, and this operation is performed at
the MPC-DISPLAY unit, the audible alarm feature on all connected MPC units
will also be disabled. If this operation is performed at one of the connected
MPC units, then the operation will only be applied to that unit.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Getting Started
This Quick Start Guide describes a simplified installation procedure for the MPC series
hardware, which will allow you to communicate with the unit in order to demonstrate
basic features and check for proper operation.
Note that this Quick Start Guide does not provide a detailed description of unit
configuration, or discuss advanced operating features in detail. In order to take full
advantage of the features provided by this unit, it is recommended that you should refer
to the remainder of this User’s Guide.
3.1. Installing the MPC Hardware
Note: This section describes the installation procedure for individual MPC
units.
• For Quick Start installation instructions for the optional MPC-DISPLAY unit,
please refer to Section 3.3.
• For instructions on connecting your local MPC unit to additional, remote MPC
units via the AUX ports, please refer to Sections 4.5 and 5.8.2.
3.1.1. Apply Power to the MPC
Refer to power rating nameplate on the MPC unit, and then connect the unit to an
appropriate power source. Note that some MPC models feature two separate AC inputs
and two separate power branches, while others feature attached power supply cables
and/or a single power inlet. Connect power cables to the unit’s Circuit “A” and Circuit
“B” Power Inlets (if present), install the cable keepers (as described in Section 4.1.1),
then connect the cables to an appropriate power supply. Refer to the table on the next
page for information concerning power requirements and maximum load.
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Input
Feeds
Input
Voltage
Max. Load
per Outlet
Max. Load
per Input
Max. Load
per Unit
Model No.
MPC-8H-1
2 ea, 20 Amp
2 ea, 16 Amp
2 ea, 20 Amp
2 ea, 16 Amp
1 ea, 20 Amp
1 ea, 16 Amp
2 ea, 20 Amp
2 ea, 16 Amp
1 ea, 20 Amp
1 ea, 16 Amp
2 ea, 20 Amp
2 ea, 20 Amp
1 ea, 30 Amp
1 ea, 30 Amp
2 ea, 30 Amp
2 ea, 30 Amp
1 ea, 16 Amp
2 ea, 16 Amp
1 ea, 32 Amp
2 ea, 32 Amp
100 to 120 VAC
100 to 240 VAC
100 to 120 VAC
100 to 240 VAC
100 to 120 VAC
100 to 240 VAC
100 to 120 VAC
100 to 240 VAC
100 to 120 VAC
100 to 240 VAC
100 to 120 VAC
100 to 240 VAC
100 to 120 VAC
100 to 240 VAC
100 to 120 VAC
100 to 240 VAC
100 to 240 VAC
100 to 240 VAC
100 to 240 VAC
100 to 240 VAC
16 Amps
10 Amps
16 Amps
10 Amps
16 Amps
10 Amps
16 Amps
15 Amps
16 Amps
15 Amps
16 Amps
15 Amps
20 Amps
15 Amps
20 Amps
15 Amps
10 Amps
10 Amps
10 Amps
10 Amps
16 Amps *
16 Amps *
16 Amps *
16 Amps *
16 Amps *
16 Amps *
16 Amps *
16 Amps *
16 Amps *
16 Amps *
16 Amps *
16 Amps *
24 Amps *
24 Amps *
24 Amps *
24 Amps *
16 Amps
32 Amps *
32 Amps *
32 Amps *
32 Amps *
16 Amps *
16 Amps *
32 Amps *
32 Amps *
16 Amps *
16 Amps *
32 Amps *
32 Amps *
24 Amps *
24 Amps *
48 Amps *
48 Amps *
16 Amps
MPC-8H-2
MPC-16H-1
MPC-16H-2
MPC-18H-1
MPC-18H-2
MPC-20V-1
MPC-20V-2
MPC-20VS20-1
MPC-20VS20-2
MPC-20VD20-1
MPC-20VD20-2
MPC-20VS30-1
MPC-20VS30-2
MPC-20VD30-1
MPC-20VD30-2
MPC-20VS16-3
MPC-20VD16-3
MPC-20VS32-3
MPC-20VD32-3
16 Amps
32 Amps
32 Amps
32 Amps
32 Amps
64 Amps
* In accordance with UL requirements for branch circuits, this value has been
de-rated to 80%.
Notes:
• MPC-H Series model numbers that end with the “-1” suffix include 20 Amp
Circuit Breaker(s).
• MPC-H Series model numbers that end with the “-2” suffix include 16 Amp
Circuit Breaker(s).
• MPC-V Series model numbers that end with “-3” include 16 Amp Circuit
Breaker(s).
• MPC-V Series model numbers that end with “-1” or “-2” include 20 Amp
Circuit Breaker(s). The only exception is the MPC-20V-2, which includes 16
Amp Circuit Breakers.
• To determine the exact model number for your MPC unit, either refer to the
nameplate on the back of the unit, or access command mode as described
in Section 3.2 and invoke the Product Status command; in the Text Interface,
type /J *and press [Enter]; in the Web Browser Interface, click on the
"Product Status" Link on the left hand side of the screen.
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
3.1.2. Connect your PC to the MPC
The MPC can either be controlled by a local PC, that communicates with the unit via
serial port, controlled via external modem, or controlled via TCP/IP network. In order
to switch plugs or select parameters, commands are issued to the MPC via either the
Network Port or Console Port. Note that it is not necessary to connect to both the
Network and Console Ports, and that the Console Port can be connected to either a
local PC or External Modem.
• Network Port: Connect your 10Base-T or 100Base-T network interface to the MPC
Network port.
• Console Port: Use a null modem cable to connect your PC COM port to the MPC
COM (RS232) Port.
• External Modem: Use a standard AT to Modem cable to connect your external
modem to the MPC Console (RS232) Port.
3.2. Communicating with the MPC
When properly installed and configured, the MPC will allow command mode access via
Telnet, Web Browser, SNMP, SSH client, modem, or local PC.
Notes:
• In order to ensure security, Browser access is disabled in the default state.
To enable Web Browser access, please refer to Section 5.9.
• Default MPC serial port parameters are set as follows: 9600 bps,
RTS/CTS Handshaking, 8 Data Bits, One Stop Bit, No Parity. Although these
parameters can be easily redefined, for this Quick Start procedure, it is
recommended to configure your communications program to accept the
default parameters.
• The MPC features a default IP Address (192.168.168.168) and a default
Subnet Mask (255.255.255.0.) This allows network access to command
mode, providing that you are contacting the MPC from a node on the same
subnet. When attempting to access the MPC from a node that is not on the
same subnet, please refer to Section 5.9 for further configuration instructions.
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
1. Access Command Mode: The MPC includes two user interfaces; the Text Interface
and the Web Browser Interface. The Text Interface is available via Local PC, SNMP,
SSH Client, Telnet, or Modem, and the Web Browser interface is only available via
TCP/IP network. In addition, when contacted via PDA, the MPC will also present
a third interface, which is similar to the Web Browser Interface, but offers limited
command functions.
a) Via Local PC: Start your communications program and then press [Enter].
b) Via SSH Client: Start your SSH client, enter the default IP address
(192.168.168.168) for the MPC and invoke the connect command.
c) Via Web Browser: Make certain that Web Browser access is enabled as
described in the Section 5.9 in this User's Guide. Start your JavaScript enabled
Web Browser, enter the default MPC IP address (192.168.168.168) in the Web
Browser address bar, and then press [Enter].
d) Via Telnet: Make certain that Telnet access is enabled as described in
Section 5.9. Start your Telnet client, and enter the MPC’s default IP address
(192.168.168.168).
e) Via Modem: Make certain that the MPC's serial Console Port is configured
for Modem Mode as described in Section 5.8, then use your communications
program to dial the number for your external Modem connected to the
Console Port.
2. Username / Password Prompt: A message will be displayed, which prompts you
to enter your username (Login) and password. The default username is “super”
(all lower case, no quotes), and the default password is also “super”. If a valid
username and password are entered, the MPC will display either the Main Menu
(Web Browser Interface) or the Port Status Screen (SSH, Telnet, or Modem.)
3. Test Switching Functions: You may wish to perform the following tests in order
to make certain that the MPC is responding to commands. When switching and
reboot commands are executed, the MPC's Status LEDs will also turn On or Off to
indicate the status of each outlet.
a) Reboot Outlet:
i.
Web Browser Interface: Click on the "Plug Control" link on the left hand
side of the screen to display the Plug Control Menu. From the Plug
Control Menu, click the down arrow in the row for Plug A1 to display the
dropdown menu, then select "Reboot" from the drop down menu and click
on the "Execute Plug Actions" button.
ii. Text Interface: Type /BOOT A1and press [Enter].
b) Switch Outlet Off:
i.
Web Browser Interface: From the Plug Control Menu, click the down
arrow in the "Action" column for Plug A1 to display the drop down menu,
then select "Off" from the drop down menu and click on the "Execute Plug
Actions" button.
ii. Text Interface: Type /OFF A1and press [Enter].
3-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
c) Switch Outlet On:
i. Web Browser Interface: From the Plug Control Menu, click the down
arrow in the "Action" column for Plug A1 to display the drop down menu,
then select "On" from the drop down menu and click on the "Execute Plug
Actions" button.
ii. Text Interface: Type /ON A1and press [Enter].
3. Logging Out: When you log off using the proper MPC command, this ensures
that the unit has completely exited from command mode, and is not waiting for the
inactivity timeout to elapse before allowing additional connections.
a) Web Browser Interface: Click on the "LOGOUT" link on the left hand side of
the screen.
b) Text Interface: Type /Xand press [Enter].
3.3. Installing and Operating the Optional MPC-DISPLAY Hardware
Use the supplied RJ-45 cable to connect the optional MPC-DISPLAY unit to the MPC
unit. Connect one end of the RJ-45 cable to the “Remote” connector on the MPC front
panel; connect the other end of the cable to the RJ-45 receptacle on the back side of
the MPC-DISPLAY unit.
Note: The AUX Ports, located adjacent to the Remote port on the MPC front
panel, are used for connection to additional, remote MPC units. For more
information on connecting an MPC-DISPLAY unit or additional MPC units to the
AUX or Remote ports, please refer to Sections 4.5 and 5.8.2 and Appendix C.2.
The MPC-DISPLAY unit will receive five volts of power (for operation) via the RJ-45 cable
connected to the MPC unit.
To display amperage, kilowatts, volts and temperature for the MPC units that are
attached to the MPC-DISPLAY, press the “Display” button to toggle to the LED for
the desired MPC unit, and then press the “Display Selection” button several times to
select the desired reading; each time the “Display Selection” button is pressed, the
LED indicator adjacent to the button will toggle from Amps to kiloWatts to Volts to
Temperature.
This completes the Quick Start Guide for the MPC. Prior to placing the unit into
operation, it is recommended to refer to the remainder of this User’s Guide for important
information regarding advanced configuration capabilities and more detailed operation
instructions. If you have further questions regarding the MPC unit, please contact WTI
Customer Support as described in Appendix D.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Hardware Installation
4.1. Connecting the Power Supply Cables
4.1.1. Installing the Power Supply Cable Keepers
The MPC includes cable keepers, which are designed to prevent the power supply
cables from being accidentally disconnected from the unit.
Note: In addition to the Power Supply Cable Keepers described in this
section, a Power Outlet Cable Keeper is also available for MPC-20V series
units. Please refer to Appendix F for more information.
• MPC-8H-1 and MPC-8H-2: The cable keepers for these units must be installed by
the user.
1. First make certain that both of the MPC-8H’s two power cables are
disconnected from the power source.
2. Install the two standoff screws (included with the cable keeper) in the two
vacant screw holes, located between the two power inlets. When the standoff
screws are in place, thread the two screws supplied with the cable keeper into
the top end of both of the standoff screws.
3. Connect the power cables to the power inlets. Check to make sure that both
cables are firmly seated in the power inlet connectors.
4. Install the cable keeper plate, by slipping the plate over the two screws which
protrude from the top of the standoffs. Slip the cable keeper plate into place,
so that the notches in the bottom of the plate slip over the power cables, and
the holes in the middle of the plate align with the screws in the tops of the
standoffs.
5. Tighten the two screws into the standoffs to secure the plate and the power
supply cables to the unit. Check to make certain that the cables are held firmly
in place by the cable keepers.
• MPC-16H-1 and MPC-16H-2: Sixteen-plug, horizontal units include pre-installed
cable keepers. When attaching the power supply cables to the unit, first swing the
cable keepers out of the way, then plug the power cables securely into the power
inputs. When the cables are in place, snap the cable keepers over each plug to
secure the cables to the unit.
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hardware Installation
• MPC-18H-1 and MPC-18H-2: The cable keeper for these units must be installed
by the user.
1. First make certain that the MPC-18H’s power supply cable is disconnected
from the power source.
2. Install the two standoff screws (included with the cable keeper) in the two
vacant screw holes, located next to the power inlet. When the standoff screws
are in place, thread the two screws supplied with the cable keeper into the top
end of both of the standoff screws.
3. Connect the power cable to the power inlet. Check to make sure that the cable
is firmly seated in the power inlet connector.
4. Install the cable keeper plate, by slipping the plate over the two screws which
protrude from the top of the standoffs. Slip the cable keeper plate into place,
so that one of the notches in the bottom of the plate slips over the power cable,
and the holes in the middle of the plate align with the screws in the tops of the
standoffs.
5. Tighten the two screws into the standoffs to secure the plate and the power
supply cable to the unit. Check to make certain that the cable is held firmly in
place by the cable keeper.
• MPC-20V Series: The cable keepers for 20-outlet, vertical models must be
installed by the user. Note that MPC-20V series units that feature non-detachable
power supply cables do not include cable keepers.
1. First make certain that the MPC’s power supply cable(s) are disconnected
from the power source. Note that some MPC-20V Series units have two power
supply cables and others have only one.
2. Install the screws (included with the cable keeper) in the two vacant screw
holes, located directly below the power inlet(s). Do not overtighten the two
screws; leave enough room for the Cable Keeper assembly to be slid into place
in Step 4 below.
3. Connect the power cable(s) to the power inlet(s). Check to make sure that the
cable(s) are firmly seated in the power inlet connector(s).
4. Install the cable keeper plate, by slipping the plate over the two screws that
were installed under the power inlets in Step 2 above. Slip the cable keeper
into place, so that the notches in the front of the plate slip under the power
cables, securing the cables in place.
5. Tighten the two screws to secure the plate and the power supply cables to
the unit. Check to make certain that the cables are held firmly in place by the
cable keepers.
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hardware Installation
4.1.2. Connect the MPC to Your Power Supply
Refer to the cautions listed below and at the beginning of this User's Guide, and then
connect the MPC unit to an appropriate power supply.
Note: Some MPC units are shipped with one or two detachable 125 VAC,
15 Amp "Starter" Cables. These cable(s) will allow you to connect a 120 VAC
MPC unit to power for bench testing and initial start up and are adequate
for applications that only require 15 Amps. For higher amp power switching
applications, please refer to the WTI Power Cable Guide (which can be found
on the CDROM included with the unit) or use appropriate cables.
CAUTIONS:
• Before attempting to install this unit, please review the warnings and
cautions listed at the front of the user’s guide.
• This device should only be operated with the type of power source
indicated on the instrument nameplate. If you are not sure of the type of
power service available, please contact your local power company.
• Reliable earthing (grounding) of this unit must be maintained. Particular
attention should be given to supply connections when connecting to
power strips, rather than directly to the branch circuit.
4.2. Connection to Switched Outlets
Connect the power cord from your switched device to one of the AC Outlets on the MPC
unit. Note that when power is applied to the MPC, the AC Outlets will be switched “ON”
by default.
Note that some MPC models feature two separate power branches, while others
may feature only one power branch. Please refer to the table shown in Section 1 or
Section 3.1 for more information regarding maximum power and load ratings for your
specific MPC model.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hardware Installation
4.3. Serial Console Port Connection
The MPC's Console Port is a male, RS-232C DB9 connector, wired in a DCE
configuration. In the default state, the Console port is configured for 9600 bps, no
parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit. The Console Port can be connected to either an external
modem or a local PC, but not both items at the same time. Appendix B.1 describes the
Console Port interface.
4.3.1. Connecting a Local PC
Use the supplied null modem cable to connect your PC COM port to the MPC's RS232
Console Port. Make certain that the Serial Port Mode is set to “Normal” as described in
Section 5.8.1.
4.3.2. Connecting an External Modem
When connecting directly to an external modem, use a standard AT to Modem cable.
Make certain that the modem is initialized at the same default parameters as the MPC
Console Port. Make certain that the MPC Serial Port Mode is set to “Modem” as
described in Section 5.8.1.
4.4. Connecting the Network Cable
The Network Port is an RJ45 Ethernet jack, for connection to a TCP/IP network.
Connect your 100Base-T cable to the Network Port. Note that the MPC includes a
default IP address (192.168.168.168) and a default subnet mask (255.255.255.0.) When
installing the MPC in a working network environment, it is recommended to define
network parameters as described in Section 5.9.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hardware Installation
4.5. Connecting Remote MPC Units to the AUX Ports
If your application requires control of more outlets than are provided on your MPC unit,
you can also connect up to three additional MPC or BPM units to the AUX ports on the
MPC front panel. This allows you to control up to 80 outlets via a single IP address.
To connect optional, Auxiliary MPC units to your local MPC unit, proceed as follows:
1. Install Snap Adapter: Insert a DX9F-DTE-RJ snap adapter (not included) into the
serial console port on the Auxiliary MPC unit. The DX9F-DTE-RJ snap adapter can
be ordered from the WTI sales department. For a description of the Snap Adapter
interface, please refer to Appendix C.1.
2. Install RJ-45 Cable: Connect a straight RJ-45 cable from the AUX port on your
local MPC unit to the DX9F-DTE-RJ snap adapter, which has been installed in the
serial Console port on the Auxiliary MPC unit.
3. Configuration and Operation: Please refer to Section 5.8.2 for additional
configuration instructions for Auxiliary units, and Section 9 for additional operating
instructions.
Notes:
• Once the local MPC unit and Auxiliary units have been installed and
configured, you must take care when temporarily disconnecting Auxiliary
unit(s) from the local unit. Prior to disconnecting Auxiliary units, note the
specific AUX port that each Auxiliary unit is initially connected to, and make
certain to reconnect each Auxiliary unit to the same AUX port where it was
previously connected.
• If Auxiliary units are connected to a different AUX port from where they were
located when previously configured, then the local MPC unit and Auxiliary
units must be reconfigured in order to adapt to this change.
• When an Auxiliary unit is connected to the AUX port on your local MPC unit,
the AUX ports on the Auxiliary unit will be automatically disabled.
• The AUX ports can also be used for connection to console ports on devices
such as servers and other rack mount equipment. For more information,
please refer to Appendix C.3 and Section 5.8.2.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hardware Installation
4.6. Connecting the Optional MPC-DISPLAY Unit
Use an RJ-45 cable to connect the optional MPC-DISPLAY unit to the MPC unit.
Connect one end of the RJ-45 cable to the “Remote” connector on the MPC front panel;
connect the other end of the cable to the RJ-45 receptacle on the back side of the
MPC-DISPLAY unit as described in Appendix C.2.
The MPC-DISPLAY unit will receive five volts of power (for operation) via the RJ-45 cable
connected to the MPC unit.
To display amperage, kilowatts, volts and temperature for the MPC units that are
attached to the MPC-DISPLAY, press the “Display” button to toggle to the LED for
the desired MPC unit, and then press the “Display Selection” button several times to
select the desired reading; each time the “Display Selection” button is pressed, the
LED indicator adjacent to the button will toggle from Amps to Kilowatts to Volts to
Temperature.
4.7. Rack Mounting
MPC-H Series Units: To install an MPC-H Series (horizontal format) unit in your
equipment rack, simply attach the L-Brackets included with the unit and then mount the
unit in a vacant space in your equipment rack as described in Appendix E.1.
MCP-V Series Units: There are a number of possible rack mounting configurations for
MPC-V Series (vertical format) units; vertical format MPC units can be mounted in the
front or rear of the rack, mounted on the outside of the rack, or mounted in a variety of
different makes and models of equipment racks. For a description of the most common
rack mounting options available for MPC-V units, please refer to Appendix E.
This completes the MPC installation instructions. Please proceed to the next Section for
instructions regarding unit configuration.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Basic Configuration
This section describes the basic configuration procedure for all MPC units. For more
information on Reboot Options and Alarm Configuration, please refer to Section 6 and
Section 7.
5.1. Communicating with the MPC Unit
In order to configure the MPC, you must first connect to the unit, and access command
mode. Note that, the MPC offers two separate configuration interfaces; the Web
Browser Interface and the Text Interface.
In addition, the MPC also offers three different methods for accessing command mode;
via network, via modem, or via local console. The Web Browser interface is only
available via network, and the Text Interface is available via network (SSH or Telnet),
modem or local PC.
5.1.1. The Text Interface
The Text Interface consists of a series of simple ASCII text menus, which allow you to set
options and define parameters by entering the number for the desired option using your
keyboard, and then typing in the value for that option.
Since the Web Browser Interface and Telnet accessibility are both disabled in the
default state, you will need to use the Text Interface to contact the MPC via Local PC
or SSH connection when setting up the unit for the first time. After you have accessed
command mode using the Text Interface, you can then enable Web Access and Telnet
Access, if desired, in order to allow future communication with the unit via Web Browser
or Telnet. You will not be able to contact the unit via Web Browser or Telnet until you
have specifically enabled those options.
Once Telnet Access is enabled, you will then be able to use the Text Interface to
communicate with the MPC via local PC, Telnet or SSH connection. You can also use
the Text Interface to access command mode via an external modem installed at the
MPC's serial Console Port.
In order to use the Text Interface, your installation must include:
• Access via Network: The MPC must be connected to your TCP/IP Network, and
your PC must include a communications program (such as HyperTerminal.)
• Access via Modem: An external modem must be installed at the MPC's RS-232
Console Port, a phone line must be connected to the external modem, and the
Console Port must be configured for Modem Mode. In addition, your PC must
include a communications program.
• Access via Local PC: Your PC must be physically connected to the MPC’s RS232
Console Port as described in Section 4, the MPC's Console Port must be configured
for Normal Mode, and your PC must include a communications program.
5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
To access command mode via the Text Interface, proceed as follows:
Note: When communicating with the unit for the first time, you will not be
able to contact the unit via Telnet, until you have accessed command mode,
via Local PC or SSH Client, and used the Network Parameters Menu to enable
Telnet as described in Section 5.9.
1. Contact the MPC Unit:
a) Via Local PC: Start your communications program and press [Enter]. Wait
for the connect message, then proceed to Step 2.
b) Via Network: The MPC includes a default IP address (192.168.168.168) and a
default subnet mask (255.255.255.0.) This allows you to contact the unit from
any network node on the same subnet, without first assigning an IP Address to
the unit. For more information, please refer to Section 5.9.
i.
Via SSH Client: Start your SSH client, and enter the MPC’s IP Address.
Invoke the connect command, wait for the connect message, then
proceed to Step 2.
ii. Via Telnet: Start your Telnet Client, and then Telnet to the MPC’s IP
Address. Wait for the connect message, then proceed to Step 2.
c) Via Modem: Use your communications program to dial the number for the
external modem which you have connected to the MPC’s Console Port.
2. Login / Password Prompt: A message will be displayed, which prompts you to
enter a username (login name) and password. The default username is "super" (all
lower case, no quotes), and the default password is also "super".
3. If a valid username and password are entered, the MPC will display the Plug Status
Screen, shown in Figure 5.1.
LOCAL - Managed Power Controller
PLUG | NAME
Site ID: (undefined)
| STATUS | BOOT DELAY | DEFAULT | PRIORITY
-----+--------------------------+--------+------------+---------+----------
A1 | Local_InfeedA_Outlet1
A2 | Local_InfeedA_Outlet2
A3 | Local_InfeedA_Outlet3
A4 | Local_InfeedA_Outlet4
A5 | Local_InfeedA_Outlet5
A6 | Local_InfeedA_Outlet6
A7 | Local_InfeedA_Outlet7
A8 | Local_InfeedA_Outlet8
A9 | Local_InfeedA_Outlet9
A10 | Local_InfeedA_Outlet10
B1 | Local_InfeedB_Outlet1
B2 | Local_InfeedB_Outlet2
B3 | Local_InfeedB_Outlet3
B4 | Local_InfeedB_Outlet4
B5 | Local_InfeedB_Outlet5
B6 | Local_InfeedB_Outlet6
* = Plug in BUSY state
| ON
| ON
| ON
| ON
| ON
| ON
| ON
| ON
| ON
| ON
| ON
| ON
| ON
| ON
| ON
| ON
| 0.5 Secs |
| 0.5 Secs |
| 0.5 Secs |
| 0.5 Secs |
| 0.5 Secs |
| 0.5 Secs |
| 0.5 Secs |
| 0.5 Secs |
| 0.5 Secs |
| 0.5 Secs |
| 0.5 Secs |
| 0.5 Secs |
| 0.5 Secs |
| 0.5 Secs |
| 0.5 Secs |
| 0.5 Secs |
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Enter: <CR> for more plugs, <ESC> to quit ...
Figure 5.1: The Plug Status Screen (Text Interface; MPC-20V Shown)
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.1.2. The Web Browser Interface
The Web Browser Interface consists of a series of web forms, which can be used to
select configuration parameters and perform reboot operations, by clicking on radio
buttons and/or entering text into designated fields.
Note: In order to use the Web Browser Interface, Web Access must first be
enabled via the Text Interface Network Parameters Menu (/N), the MPC must
be connected to a TCP/IP network, and your PC must be equipped with a
JavaScript enabled web browser.
1. Start your JavaScript enabled Web Browser, key the MPC’s IP address (default =
192.168.168.168) into the web browser’s address bar, and press [Enter].
2. Username / Password Prompt: A message box will prompt you to enter your
username and password. The default username is "super" (all lower case, no
quotes), and the default password is also "super".
3. If a valid username and password are entered, the MPC Home Screen will appear
as shown in Figure 5.2.
Figure 5.2: The Home Screen (Web Browser Interface)
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.1.3. Access Via PDA
In addition to the Web Browser Interface and Text Interface, the MPC command mode
can also be accessed by PDA devices. Note however, that due to nature of most PDAs,
only a limited selection of MPC operating and status display functions are available to
users who communicate with the unit via PDA.
When the MPC is operated via a PDA device, only the following functions are available:
• Product Status Screen (Section 8.1)
• Plug Status Screen (Section 8.3)
• Plug Group Status Screen (Section 8.4)
• Plug Control Screen (Section 9.1.1)
• Plug Group Control Screen (Section 9.1.2)
• Current & Power Metering (Section 8.5)
• Current History Graph (Section 8.6)
For more information on these functions, please refer to the appropriate section listed
next to each function in the list above.
These screens will allow PDA users to review Plug Status and Plug Group Status, invoke
switching and reboot commands, display Current Metering Readings, show Current
History and display the Site I.D. and firmware version. Note however, that PDA users are
not allowed to change or review MPC configuration parameters.
To configure the MPC for access via PDA, first consult your IT department for
appropriate settings. Access the MPC command mode via the Text Interface or Web
Browser interface as described in this section, then configure the MPC's Network Port
accordingly, as described in Section 5.9.
In most cases, this configuration will be adequate to allow communication with most
®
PDAs. Note however, that if you wish to use a BlackBerry to contact the MPC,
you must first make certain to configure the BlackBerry to support HTML tables, as
described below:
1. Power on the BlackBerry, and then click on the BlackBerry Internet Browser Icon.
2. Press the Menu button, and then choose "Options."
3. From the Options menu, choose "Browser Configuration," then verify to make
certain that "Support HTML Tables" is checked (enabled.)
4. Press the Menu button, and select "Save Options."
When you have finished communicating with the MPC via PDA, it is important to always
close the session using the PDA's menu functions, rather than by simply closing the
browser window, in order to ensure that the MPC has completely exited from command
mode, and is not waiting for the inactivity timeout period to elapse. For example, to
close a session on a BlackBerry, press the Menu button and then choose "Close."
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.2. Configuration Menus
Although the Web Browser Interface and Text Interface provide two separate means for
selecting parameters, both interfaces allow access to the same set of basic parameters,
and parameters selected via one interface will also be applied to the other. To access
the configuration menus, proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Refer to the Help Screen (/H) and then enter the appropriate
command to access the desired menu. When the configuration menu appears, key
in the number for the parameter you wish to define, and follow the instructions in
the resulting submenu.
• Web Browser Interface: Use the links and fly-out menus on the left hand of the
screen (see Figure 5.2) to access the desired configuration menu. To change
parameters, click in the desired field and key in the new value or select a value from
the pull-down menu. To apply newly selected parameters, click on the "Change
Parameters" button at the bottom of the menu or the "Set" button next to the field.
The following sections describe options and parameters that can be accessed via each
of the configuration menus. Please note that essentially the same set of parameters and
options are available to both the Web Browser Interface and Text Interface.
Notes:
• Configuration menus are only available when you have logged into command
mode using a password that permits Administrator Level commands.
SuperUser accounts are able to view configuration menus, but are not
allowed to change parameters.
• Configuration menus are not available when you are communicating with the
MPC via PDA
• When defining parameters via the Text Interface, make certain to press the
[Esc] key to completely exit from the configuration menu and save newly
defined parameters. When parameters are defined via the Text Interface,
newly defined parameters will not be saved until the "Saving Configuration"
message has been displayed and the cursor returns to the command prompt.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
SYSTEM PARAMETERS:
1. User Directory
2. Site-ID:
(undefined)
3. Real Time Clock:
4. Invalid Access Lockout:
5. Command Confirmation:
6. Automated Mode:
7. Command Prompt:
8. Temperature Format:
9. Temperature Calibration:
10. Voltage Calibration:
11. Log Configuration
21. Audit Log:
08/13/2008 18:07:55
On
On
Off
MPC
Fahrenheit
(undefined)
(undefined)
On - Without Syslog
On - Without Syslog
22. Alarm Log:
23. Current Metering Log: On
12. Callback Security:
13. Front Panel Buttons:
14. Power Configuration
On - Callback (Without Password Prompt)
On
Enter: #<CR> to change,
<ESC> to exit and save configuration ...
Figure 5.3: The System Parameters Menu (Text Interface)
Figure 5.4: The System Parameters Menu (Web Browser Interface)
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.3. Defining System Parameters
The System Parameters menus are used to define the Site ID Message, set the system
clock and calendar, and configure the Invalid Access Lockout feature and Callback
feature.
In the Text Interface, the System Parameters menu is also used to create and manage
user accounts and passwords. Note however, that when you are communicating with
the unit via the Web Browser Interface, accounts and passwords are managed and
created via a separate menu that is accessed by clicking on the "Users" link on the left
hand side of the menu.
• Text Interface: Type /Fand press [Enter]. The System Parameters Menu will
appear as shown in Figure 5.3.
• Web Browser Interface: Move the cursor over the "General Parameters" link
on the left hand side of the screen. When the General Parameters fly-out menu
appears, click on the "System Parameters" link. The System Parameters menu will
be displayed as shown in Figure 5.4.
The System Parameters Menus are used to define the following:
• User Directory: This function is used to view, add, modify and delete user
accounts and passwords. As discussed in Section 5.4 and Section 5.5, the User
Directory allows you to set the security level for each account as well as determine
which plugs each account will be allowed to control.
Note: The "User Directory" option does not appear in the Web Browser
Interface’s System Parameters menu, and is instead, accessed via the "Users"
link on the left hand side of the menu.
• Site ID: A text field, generally used to note the installation site or name for the MPC
unit. (Up to 32 chars.; Default = undefined.)
Notes:
• The Site ID cannot include double quotes.
• The Site ID will be cleared if the MPC is reset to default settings.
• Real Time Clock: This prompt provides access to the Real Time Clock menu,
which is used to set the clock and calendar, and to enable and configure the NTP
(Network Time Protocol) feature as described in Section 5.3.1.
Note: The "Real Time Clock" option does not appear in the Web Browser
Interface’s System Parameters menu, and is instead, accessed via the "Real
Time Clock" link in the General Parameters fly-out menu.
• Invalid Access Lockout: If desired, this feature can be used to automatically
disable the MPC Console Port or Network Port after a user specified number of
unsuccessful login attempts are made. For more information, please refer to
Section 5.3.2. (Default = On.)
Note: The "Invalid Access Lockout" item does not appear in the Web Browser
Interface’s System Parameters menu, and is instead, accessed via the link in the
General Parameters fly-out menu.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
• Command Confirmation: Enables/Disables the Command Confirmation feature.
When enabled, a "Sure" prompt will be displayed before power switching and
reboot commands are executed. When disabled, commands will be executed
without further prompting. (Default = On.)
• Automated Mode: When enabled, the MPC will execute switching and reboot
commands without displaying a confirmation prompt, status screen or confirmation
messages. For more information, please refer to Section 5.3.3 or Section 9.3.
(Default = Off.)
Note: When this option is enabled, security functions are suppressed, and
users are able to access configuration menus and control plugs without
entering a password. If security is a concern and the Automated Mode is
required, it is recommended to use the IP Security feature (Section 5.9.3) to
restrict access.
• Command Prompt: Allows the Text Interface command prompt to be set to either
"MPC", "IPS", "NPS", or "NBB." (Default = MPC.)
• Temperature Format: Determines whether the temperature is displayed as
Fahrenheit or Celsius. (Default = Fahrenheit.)
• Temperature Calibration: Used to calibrate the unit's internal temperature sensing
abilities. To calibrate the temperature, place a thermometer inside your equipment
rack, in a location that usually experiences the highest temperature. After a few
minutes, take a reading from the thermometer, and then key the reading into the
configuration menu. In the Web Browser Interface, the temperature is entered
at the System Parameters menu, in the Temperature Calibration field; in the Text
Interface, the temperature is entered in a submenu of the System Parameters menu,
accessed via the Temperature Calibration item. (Default = undefined.)
• Voltage Calibration: This option is used to calibrate the voltage readout on the
MPC front panel. To calibrate the voltage, first determine the approximate voltage
and then select the Voltage Calibration option and key in the correct voltage. In
the Web Browser Interface, the voltage is entered at the System Parameters menu
in the Voltage Calibration field. In the Text Interface, the voltage is entered in a
submenu of the System Parameters menu, which is accessed via the Voltage
Calibration item. (Default = undefined.)
• Audit Log: Enables/disables the Audit Log, and determines whether or not the
Audit Log will send SYSLOG messages to notify you of each logged event. When
enabled, the Audit Log will create a record of all power switching and reboot activity
at the MPC unit, including reboots and switching caused by Load Shedding, Load
Shedding Recovery, Ping No Answer Reboots and Scheduled Reboots. For more
information on the MPC's event logging functions, please refer to Section 5.3.4.
(Default = On without Syslog.)
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
• Alarm Log: Enables/disables the Alarm Log, and determines whether or not
the Alarm Log will send SYSLOG messages to notify you of each logged event.
When enabled, the Alarm Log will create a record of all alarm activity at the MPC
unit. For more information on the MPC's event logging functions, please refer to
Section 5.3.4. (Default = On without Syslog.)
• Current/Power Log: Enables/disables Current Metering Log and Power Metering
Log. When enabled, the Current Metering Log will create a record of current
consumption by each MPC branch/circuit and the Power Metering Log will create a
record of power consumption (in Kilowatt Hours) versus time. For more information
on the MPC's event logging functions, please refer to Section 5.3.4. (Default = On).
• Callback Security: Enables / configures the Callback Security Function as
described in Section 5.3.5. In order for this feature to function, a Callback number
must also be defined for each desired user account as described in Section 5.5.
(Default = On, Callback, Without Password Prompt.)
Notes:
• In the Text Interface, Callback Security Parameters are defined via a submenu
of the Systems Parameters Menu, which is accessed via the Callback
Security item.
• In the Web Browser Interface, Callback Security Parameters are defined via a
separate menu, which is accessed by clicking the "Callback Security" link on
the left hand side of the screen.
• Front Panel Buttons: This item can be used to disable all front panel button
functions, including the Display Selection Button and the reinitialization/default
functions that are normally available via the Clear and Set buttons on the MPC front
panel, as described in Section 2.4. (Default = On.)
• Power Configuration: Provides access to a menu which can be used to configure
the Power Factor, Power Efficiency and Power Source as described in Section 5.3.6.
5.3.1. The Real Time Clock and Calendar
The Real Time Clock menu is used to set the MPC's internal clock and calendar. To
access the Real Time Clock Menu, proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Type /Fand press [Enter]. The System Parameters menu will
appear as shown in Figure 5.3. At the System Parameters menu, type 3and press
[Enter] to display the Real Time Clock menu.
• Web Browser Interface: Place the cursor over the "General Parameters" link on
the left hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, Click on the "Real
Time Clock" link to access the Real Time Clock menu.
The configuration menu for the Real Time Clock offers the following options:
• Date: Sets the Month, Date, Year and day of the week for the MPC’s real-time
clock/calendar.
• Time: Sets the Hour, Minute and Second for the MPC’s real time clock/calendar.
Key in the time using the 24-hour (military) format.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
• Time Zone: Sets the time zone, relative to Greenwich Mean Time. Note that the
Time Zone setting will function differently, depending upon whether or not the NTP
feature is enabled and properly configured. (Default = GMT (No DST).)
◆
NTP Enabled: The Time Zone setting is used to adjust the Greenwich Mean
Time value (received from the NTP server) in order to determine the precise local
time for the selected time zone.
◆
NTP Disabled: If NTP is disabled, or if the MPC is not able to access the NTP
server, then status screens and activity logs will list the selected Time Zone and
current Real Time Clock value, but will not apply the correction factor to the
displayed Real Time Clock value.
• NTP Enable: When enabled, the MPC will contact an NTP server (defined via the
NTP Address prompts) once a day, and update its clock based on the NTP server
time and selected Time Zone. (Default = Off.)
Notes:
• The MPC will also contact the NTP server and update the time whenever you
change NTP parameters.
• To cause MPC to immediately contact the NTP server at any time, make
certain that the NTP feature is enabled and configured, then type /Fand
press [Enter]. When the System Parameters menu appears, press [Esc].
The MPC will save parameters and then attempt to contact the server, as
specified by currently defined NTP parameters.
• Primary NTP Address: Defines the IP address or domain name (up to 64
characters long) for the primary NTP server. (Default = undefined.)
Note: In order to use domain names for web addresses, DNS parameters must
first be defined as described in Section 5.9.5.
• Secondary NTP Address: Defines the IP address or domain name (up to 64
characters long) for the secondary, fallback NTP Server. (Default = undefined.)
Note: In order to use domain names for web addresses, DNS parameters must
be defined as described in Section 5.9.5.
• NTP Timeout: The amount of time in seconds, that will elapse between each
attempt to contact the NTP server. When the initial attempt is unsuccessful, the
MPC will retry the connection four times. If neither the primary nor secondary NTP
server responds, the MPC will wait 24 hours before attempting to contact the NTP
server again. (Default = 3 Seconds.)
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.3.2. The Invalid Access Lockout Feature
When properly configured and enabled, the Invalid Access Lockout feature will watch all
login attempts made at the Network Port and serial Console Port. If the port exceeds the
selected number of invalid attempts, then the port where the Invalid Attempts occurred
will be automatically disabled for a user-defined length of time (Lockout Duration.) The
Invalid Access Lockout feature uses two separate counters to track invalid access
attempts:
• Serial Port Counter: Counts invalid access attempts at the RS232 Console Port.
If the number of invalid attempts at the port exceeds the user-defined Lockout
Attempts value, then the port will be locked.
• Telnet, SSH and Web Browser Counter: Counts all invalid attempts to access
command mode via Telnet, SSH or Web Browser interface. If the number of
cumulative invalid attempts exceeds the user-defined Lockout Attempts value, then
the Network Port will be locked.
Note: In the Web Browser Interface, the Invalid Access Lockout item does not
appear in the System Parameters Menu, and is instead accessed via the "Invalid
Access Lockout" link on the left hand side of the screen.
Note that when an Invalid Access Lockout occurs, you can either wait for the Lockout
Duration period to elapse (after which, the MPC will automatically reactivate the port), or
you can issue the /UL command (type /ULand press [Enter]) via the Text Interface to
instantly unlock all of the MPC's logical network ports.
Notes:
• When the Invalid Access Lockout Alarm has been enabled as described
in Section 7.7, the MPC can also provide notification via email, Syslog
Message, and/or SNMP trap whenever an Invalid Access Lockout occurs.
• Invalid Access Lockout parameters, defined via the System Parameters
menu, will apply to both the Serial Console Port and the Network Port.
• When the Console Port is locked, an external modem connected to that port
will not answer.
• When either the Console Port or Network Port are locked, the other port will
remain unlocked, unless the Invalid Access Lockout feature has also been
triggered at that port.
• If any one of the MPC’s logical network ports is locked, all other network
connections to the unit will also be locked.
• All invalid access attempts at the MPC Network Port are cumulative (the
count for invalid access attempts is determined by the total number of
all invalid attempts at all 16 logical network ports.) If a valid login name/
password is entered at any of the logical network ports, then the count for all
MPC logical network ports will be restarted.
• If the Network Port has been locked by the Invalid Access Lockout feature, it
will still respond to the ping command (providing that the ping command has
not been disabled at the Network Port.)
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
To access the configuration menu for the Invalid Access Lockout feature, proceed as
follows:
• Text Interface: Type /Fand press [Enter]. The System Parameters menu will
appear as shown in Figure 5.3. At the System Parameters menu, type 4and press
[Enter] to display the Invalid Access Lockout configuration menu.
• Web Browser Interface: Place the cursor over the "General Parameters" link on
the left hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, Click on the
"Invalid Access Lockout" link to display the configuration menu for the Invalid
Access Lockout feature.
The Invalid Access Lockout configuration menus allow you to select the following:
• Lockout Enable: Enables/Disables the Invalid Access Lockout feature.
(Default = On.)
• Lockout Attempts: The number of invalid attempts required in order to activate the
Invalid Access Lockout feature. (Default = 9.)
• Lockout Duration: The length of time that logical network ports will remain locked
when an Invalid Access Lockout occurs. If the duration is set at "Infinite", then ports
will remained locked until the /UL command is issued. (Default = 30 Minutes.)
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.3.3. Automated Mode
The Automated Mode allows the MPC to execute switching and reboot commands,
without displaying menus or generating response messages. Automated Mode is
designed to allow the MPC to be controlled by a device which can generate commands
to control power switching functions without human intervention.
When Automated Mode is enabled, power switching and reboot commands are
executed without a “Sure?” confirmation prompt and without command response
messages; the only reply to these commands is the “MPC>” prompt, which is
re-displayed when each command is completed.
Note that although Automated Mode can be enabled using either the Web Browser
Interface or Text Interface, Automated Mode is designed primarily for users who wish to
send ASCII commands to the MPC without operator intervention, and therefore does not
specifically apply to the Web Browser Interface. When Automated Mode is enabled, the
Web Browser Interface can still be used to invoke switching and reboot commands.
Notes:
• When the Automated Mode is enabled, password prompts will not be
displayed at login, and you will be able to access Administrator Level
command functions (including the configuration menus) and control plugs
without entering a password.
• If you need to enable the Automated Mode, but want to restrict network
access to configuration menus, it is strongly recommended to enable and
configure the IP Security Function as described in Section 5.9.3.
To enable/disable the Automated Mode, go to the System Parameters menu (see
Section 5.3,) and then set the “Automated Mode” option to “On”. When Automated
Mode is enabled, MPC functions will change as follows:
1. All Password Security Suppressed: When a user attempts to access command
mode, the password prompt will not be displayed at either the Console Port
or Network Port. Unless specifically restricted by the IP Security Function, all
users will be allowed to access both switching and configuration functions, and
all commands will be immediately accepted without the requirement to enter a
password.
2. Status Screen Suppressed: The plug status screen will not be automatically
displayed after commands are successfully executed. Note however, that the /S
command can still be invoked to display the status screen as needed.
3. “Sure?” Prompt Suppressed: All commands are executed without prompting for
user confirmation.
4. Error Messages Suppressed: Most error messages will be suppressed. Note
however, that an error message will still be generated if commands are invoked
using invalid formats or arguments.
All other status display and configuration commands will still function as normal.
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.3.4. Log Configuration
This feature allows you to create records of command activity, alarm actions and current
and power consumption for the local MPC unit, as well as any optional, connected
AUX MPC units (if present.) The Log features are enabled and configured via the
System Parameters Menus. The ability to view the Current and Power Metering logs is
individually enabled for each account via the User Directory as described in Section 5.5.
• Audit Log: The Audit log creates a record of all power switching and reboot activity
at the MPC unit(s), including reboots and switching caused by Load Shedding,
Load Shedding Recovery, Ping No Answer Reboots and Scheduled Reboots. Each
Log record includes a description of the activity that caused the power switching or
reboot, the username for the account that initiated the power switching or reboot
and the time and date that the power switching or reboot occurred.
• Alarm Log: The Alarm log creates a record of all Alarm Activity at the MPC unit(s).
Each time an alarm is triggered, the MPC will generate a record that lists the time
and date of the alarm, the name of the Alarm that was triggered, and a description
of the Alarm.
• Current Metering Log: The Current Metering Log provides a record of current
consumption for the MPC unit(s). Each Log record will include the time and date,
current and voltage readings for each available branch circuit and the temperature
reading. The Current Metering Log can be downloaded in ASCII, CSV or XML
format, and when viewed via the Web Browser Interface, can also be displayed as a
graph.
Note: If optional Auxiliary MPC units are connected to the AUX ports on your
local MPC unit, the Log Function will also record events that occur at the
Auxiliary units.
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.3.4.1. The Audit Log and Alarm Log
The System Parameters menu allows you to select three different configuration
parameters for the Audit Log and Alarm Log. Note that the Audit Log and Alarm Log
function independently, and parameters selected for one log will not be applied to the
other.
• Off: The Log is disabled, and command activity and/or alarm events will not be
logged.
• On - With Syslog: The Log is enabled, and power switching, reboot activity and/or
alarm events will be logged. The MPC will generate a Syslog Message every time a
Log record is created.
• On - Without Syslog: The Log is enabled, and power switching, reboot activity
and/or alarm events will be logged, but the MPC will not generate a Syslog
Message every time a Log record is created. (Default Setting.)
Notes:
• In order for the Audit Log or Alarm Log to generate Syslog Messages,
Syslog Parameters must first be defined as described in Section 5.9 and
Section 11.1.
• The Audit Log will truncate usernames that are longer than 22 characters,
and display two dots (..) in place of the remaining characters.
5.3.4.2. The Current Metering Log
The System Parameters menu allows you to enable or disable Current Metering Log
When disabled, the MPC will not log current, power, voltage or temperature readings.
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.3.4.3. Reading and Erasing Logs
To read the status logs access the command mode, then proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Type /Land press [Enter] to display the Display Log menu. Select
the desired Log from the menu, key in the appropriate number and press [Enter],
and then follow the instructions in the resulting submenu.
• Web Browser Interface:
• Audit Log: Move the cursor over the "Logs" link on the left hand side of the
screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the "Audit Log" link.
• Alarm Log: Move the cursor over the "Logs" link on the left hand side of the
screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the "Alarm Log" link.
• Current Metering Status: Move the cursor over the "Current Metering" link on
the left hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the
"Current Metering Status" link.
• Current History: Move the cursor over the "Current Metering" link on the
left hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the
"Current History" link and then pick the desired display option from the resulting
submenu.
• Power Range: To display power consumption over a user defined time period,
move the cursor over the "Power Metering" link on the left hand side of the
screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the "Power Range" link and
then specify the desired time period using the resulting submenu.
• Power History: Move the cursor over the "Power Metering" link on the left hand
side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the "Power History"
link and then pick the desired display option from the resulting submenu.
Notes:
• The Current Metering Log and Power Metering Log menus allow you to
display the Current Log in either graph format, ASCII format, CSS format or
XML format.
• You can also display current readings via the Current Metering function. In
the Text Interface, type /M and then press [Enter].
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
To erase log data, access command mode via the Text Interface, using an account that
permits Administrator level commands, then type /Land press [Enter] to access the
Display Logs menu and then proceed as follows:
• Audit Log: At the Display Logs menu, type 1and then press [Enter]. When the
Audit Log appears, type Eand press [Enter] to erases the Audit Log.
• Alarm Log: At the Display Logs menu, type 2and then press [Enter]. When the
Alarm Log appears, type Eand press [Enter] to erase the Alarm Log.
• Current Metering Log: At the Display Logs menu, type 3and press [Enter].
When the Current Metering Log menu appears, type 4and press [Enter] to erase
the Current Metering Log.
Notes:
• The MPC dedicates a fixed amount of internal memory for Audit Log records,
and if log records are allowed to accumulate until this memory is filled,
memory will eventually "wrap around," and older records will be overwritten
by newer records.
• To save the Audit Log or Alarm Log as an ASCII file via the Web Browser
Interface, click on the "Logs" link on the left hand side of the screen. When
the Logs menu appears, right click the link for the Audit Log or Alarm Log,
select "Save Target As", select text format, and save the document with a ".txt"
filename extension.
• Note that once records have been erased, they cannot be recovered.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.3.5. Callback Security
The Callback function provides an additional layer of security when callers attempt to
access command mode via modem. When this function is properly configured, modem
users will not be granted immediate access to command mode upon entering a valid
password; instead, the unit will disconnect, and dial a user-defined number before
allowing access via that number. If desired, users may also be required to re-enter the
password after the MPC dials back.
In order for Callback Security to function properly, you must first enable and configure
the feature via the System Parameters menu as described in this section, and then
define a callback number for each desired user account as described in Section 5.5. To
configure and enable the Callback function, proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Type /Fand press [Enter] to access the System Parameters menu,
then type 6and press [Enter] to display the Callback Security Menu.
• Web Browser Interface: Move the cursor over the General Parameters link on the
left hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the "Callback
Security" link to display the Callback Security Menu.
In both the Text Interface and Web Browser Interface, the Callback Security Menu offers
the following options:
• Callback Enable: This prompt offers five different configuration options for the
Callback Security feature: (Default = On - Callback (Without Password Prompt.)
◆
Off: All Callback Security is disabled.
◆
On - Callback (Without Password Prompt): Callbacks will be performed for
user accounts that include a Callback Number, and the login prompt will not be
displayed when the user’s modem answers. If the account does not include a
Callback Number, that user will be granted immediate access and a Callback will
not be performed.
◆
On - Callback (With Password Prompt): Callbacks will be performed for user
accounts that include a Callback Number, and the login prompt will be displayed
when the user’s modem answers (accounts that include a Callback Number will
be required to re-enter their username/password when their modem answers.) If
the account does not include a Callback Number, then that user will be granted
immediate access and a Callback will not be performed.
◆
On - Callback ONLY (Without Password Prompt): Callbacks will be performed
for user accounts that include a Callback Number, and the username/password
prompt will not be displayed when the user’s modem answers. Accounts that
do not include a Callback Number will not be able to access command mode via
modem.
◆
On - Callback ONLY (With Password Prompt): Callbacks will be performed
for user accounts that include a Callback Number, and the username/password
prompt will be displayed when the user’s modem answers (users will be required
to re-enter their username/password when their modem answers.) Accounts that
do not include a Callback Number will not be able to access command mode
via modem.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
• Callback Attempts: The number of times that the MPC will attempt to contact the
Callback number. (Default = 3 attempts.)
• Callback Delay: The amount of time that the MPC will wait between Callback
attempts. (Default = 30 seconds.)
Notes:
• After configuring and enabling Callback Security, you must then define a
callback phone number for each desired user account (as described in
Section 5.5) in order for this feature to function properly.
• When using the "On - Callback (With Password Prompt)" option, it is
important to remember that accounts that do not include a callback number
will be allowed to access command mode without callback verification.
5.3.6. Power Source Configuration
The Power Configuration menu allows you to adjust power measurements in order to
obtain a more accurate determination of how much "real power" is being used by the
devices that are connected to the MPC. Real Power is determined by the following
equation:
(Voltage * Amps) * Power Factor
Real Power =
Power Efficiency
To define Power Configuration parameters, access the command mode using an
account that permits access to Administrator level commands and then proceed as
follows:
• Text Interface: Type /Fand press [Enter] to access the System Parameters menu.
From the System Parameters menu, type 14and press [Enter] to display the Power
Configuration menu.
• Web Browser Interface: Move the cursor over the General Parameters link on the
left hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the "System
Parameters" link to display the System Parameters menu.
Notes:
• In the Text Interface, all power source configuration parameters are defined
via the Power Configuration menu.
• In the Web Browser Interface, the Power Factor, Power Efficiency and Local/
AUX Unit are selected via the System Parameters menu, and the Line Power
Source and Voltage Setting are defined via a submenu that may be accessed
by clicking on the "Configure Power Source" button.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
The Power Source Configuration menu and/or System Parameters menu include the
following power configuration parameters:
• Power Factor: Can be any value from 0.1 to 1.00. (Default = 1.00.)
• Power Efficiency: Can be any whole number from 1% to 100%. (Default = 100%.)
• Unit to Configure (Local/AUX Unit): This item is used to determine whether power
configuration parameters will be applied to your local unit, or to an optional remote
unit, connected to one of the local unit's AUX Ports. (Default = Local.)
• Line Power Source: This item is used to indicate the power source for each local/
AUX unit. The Power Source can either be external or the power can be supplied
by another connected MPC unit. When power is supplied by another, attached
MPC unit, proper setting of the "Power Source" parameter prevents the power
readings from the MPC unit from being incorrectly doubled when real power is
calculated. (Default = External.)
• Voltage Setting: This parameter is used to select the voltage setting for any
optional BPM Branch Power Managers that may be connected to your local unit's
AUX Ports. Note that this parameter will only be shown when an optional BPM
Branch Power Manager has been connected to one of the AUX Ports. The Voltage
Setting can be defined as MPC, 120, 208 or 240 VAC.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.4. User Accounts
Each time you attempt to access command mode, you will be prompted to enter
a username (login) and password. The username and password entered at login
determine which plug(s) you will be allowed to control and what type of commands you
will be allowed to invoke. Each username / password combination is defined within a
"user account."
The MPC allows up to 128 user accounts; each account includes a username,
password, security level, plug access rights, service access rights and an optional
callback number.
5.4.1. Command Access Levels
In order to restrict access to important command functions, the MPC allows you to set
the command access level for each user account. The MPC offers four different access
levels: Administrator, SuperUser, User and View Only. The command privileges for
each user account are set using the "Access Level" parameter in the Add User or Modify
User menus.
Each access level grants permission to use a different selection of commands; lower
access levels are restricted from invoking configuration commands, while Administrators
are granted access to all commands. The four different access levels can be
summarized as follows:
• Administrator: Administrators are allowed to invoke all configuration and operation
commands, can view all status screens, and can always direct switching and reboot
commands to all of the MPC's switched outlets .
• SuperUser: SuperUsers are allowed to invoke all power switching and reboot
commands and view all status screens. SuperUsers can view configuration menus,
but are not allowed to change configuration parameters. SuperUsers are granted
access to all MPC outlets.
• User: Users are allowed to invoke power switching and reboot commands and
view all status screens, but can only apply commands to the outlets that they
are specifically granted access to. In addition, Users are not allowed to view
configuration menus or change configuration parameters.
• ViewOnly: Accounts with ViewOnly access, are allowed to view Status Menus,
but are not allowed to invoke reboot and switching commands, and cannot view
configurations menus or change configuration parameters. ViewOnly accounts
can display the Plug Status screen, but can only view the status of plugs that are
specifically allowed by the account.
Section 17.2 summarizes command access for all four access levels.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
In the default state, the MPC includes one predefined account that provides access to
Administrator commands and allows control of all of the MPC's switched power outlets.
The default username for this account is "super" (lowercase, no quotation marks), and
the password for the account is also "super".
Notes:
• In order to ensure security, it is recommended that when initially setting up
the unit, a new user account with Administrator access should be created,
and the "super" account should then be deleted.
• If the MPC is reset to default parameters, all user accounts will be cleared,
and the default "super" account will be restored.
5.4.2. Plug Access
Each account can be granted access to a different selection of switched power outlets
(plugs) and plug groups. When accounts are created, the Plug Access parameter and
the Plug Group Access parameter in the Add User menu or Modify User menu can be
used to grant or deny access to each plug or plug group by that account.
In addition, each command access level also restricts the plugs and plug groups that
the account will be allowed to access:
• Administrator: Accounts with Administrator access are always allowed to control
all plugs and plug groups. Plug access cannot be disabled for Administrator level
accounts.
• SuperUser: SuperUser accounts allow access to all plugs and plug groups. Port
access cannot be disabled for SuperUser accounts.
• User: Accounts with User level access are only allowed to issue switching and
reboot commands to the plugs and plug groups that have been specifically
permitted via the "Plug Access" parameter in the Add User and Modify User menus.
• ViewOnly: Accounts with ViewOnly access are not allowed to issue switching and
reboot commands to outlets or plug groups. ViewOnly accounts can display the
On/Off state of plugs and plug groups, but are limited to the plugs and plug groups
specified by the account.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.4.3. Port Access
The Port Access parameter can be used to grant connection access to the MPC's DB-9
Console port, RJ-45 Remote port and RJ-45 AUX ports. Normally, the Console port
is used for connection to a local control device such as a laptop, the Remote port is
used for connection to the optional MPC-DISPLAY unit, and the AUX ports are used
for connection to additional remote MPC or BPM units. However, if your application
requires communication with other devices in the equipment rack the Console port,
Remote port and AUX ports can also be used for connection to these devices.
Administrator and SuperUser level accounts are always allowed access to the Console
Port, and User level accounts can always be granted access to the Console port. Note
however, that in order to allow an account to access the AUX ports and Remote port,
these ports must first be reconfigured as serial ports as described in Section 5.8.2.
When the AUX ports and Remote port are left in their default configuration, accounts will
not be allowed to create connections to these ports.
In addition, the command access level will also determine which ports the account will
be allowed to access, as summarized below:
• Administrator and SuperUser: Accounts with Administrator or SuperUser level
command access are always allowed to connect to the Console Port. If the AUX
and Remote ports are configured as serial ports, then Administrator and SuperUser
level accounts will also be allowed to connect to these ports. Port access cannot
be disabled for Administrator and SuperUser level accounts.
• User: User level accounts are only allowed to connect to the Console Port when
port access has been specifically enabled for the account. If the AUX and Remote
ports are configured as serial ports, then User level accounts can also be granted
access to these ports.
• ViewOnly: Accounts with ViewOnly access are not allowed to create connections
to the serial ports.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.5. Managing User Accounts
The User Directory function is employed to create new accounts, display parameters
for existing accounts, modify accounts and delete accounts. Up to 128 different user
accounts can be created. The "User Directory" function is only available when you have
logged into command mode using an account that permits Administrator commands.
• Text Interface: Type /Fand press [Enter] to access the System Parameters Menu.
From the System Parameters Menu, type 1and press [Enter] to access the User
Directory.
• Web Interface: Click the "Users" link on the left hand side of the screen to access
the User Directory menus.
In both the Text Interface and the Web Browser Interface, the User Directory menu offers
the following functions:
• View User Directory: Displays currently defined parameters for any MPC user
account as described in Section 5.5.1.
• Add Username: Creates new user accounts, and allows you to assign a username,
password, command level, plug access plug group access, service access and
callback number, as described in Section 5.5.2.
• Modify User Directory: This option is used to edit or change account information,
as described in Section 5.5.3.
• Delete User: Clears user accounts, as described in Section 5.5.4.
Note: After you have finished selecting or editing user account parameters,
make certain to save the new account information before proceeding. In the
Web Browser Interface, click on the "Add User" button to save parameters; in
the Text Interface, press the [Esc] key several times until the MPC displays the
"Saving Configuration" message and the cursor returns to the command prompt.
5.5.1. Viewing User Accounts
The "View User Directory" option allows you to view details about each account,
including the plugs and plug groups that the account is allowed to control and whether
or not the account is allowed to invoke Administrator commands. The View User option
will not display actual passwords, and instead, the password field will read "defined".
Note that the View User Accounts function is only available to users who have accessed
command mode using a password that permits Administrator Level commands. To view
account details, proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: From the User Directory menu, type 1and press [Enter]. The MPC
will display a screen which lists all defined user accounts. Key in the name of the
desired account and then press [Enter].
• Web Browser Interface: From the User Directory menu, click the "View/Modify
User" link. The MPC will display a menu that allows you to select the desired user
and directory function. Select the "View User" button, and then click on the down
arrow, scroll to the desired username, select the username, and then click
"Choose User."
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
ADD USERNAME TO DIRECTORY:
1. Username:
(undefined)
2. Password:
(undefined)
3. Access Level:
4. Port Access:
5. Plug Access:
6. Plug Group Access
7. Service Access
User
(undefined)
(undefined)
(undefined)
Serial Port, Telnet/SSH, Web
8. Current/Power Metering On
9. Callback Phone #:
(undefined)
Enter: #<CR> to select,
<ESC> to return to previous menu ...
Figure 5.5: The Add User Menu (Text Interface)
Figure 5.6: The Add User Menu (Web Browser Interface)
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.5.2. Adding User Accounts
The "Add Username" option allows you to create new accounts and assign usernames,
passwords and plug and plug group access rights to each account. Note that the
Add User function is only available when you have accessed command mode using a
password that permits Administrator Level commands.
To create new user accounts, activate the command mode using an account that
permits access to Administrator level commands and then proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Type /Fand press [Enter] to access the System Parameters menu.
From the System Parameters Menu, type 1and press [Enter] to display the User
Directory Menu. From the User Directory menu, type 2and press [Enter]. The Add
User menu (Figure 5.5) will be displayed.
• Web Browser Interface: Click the "Users" link to display the User Configuration
menu. At the User Configuration menu, click the "Add User" link. The MPC will
display the Add User menu (Figure 5.6.)
The Add User Menu can define the following parameters for each new account:
• Username: Up to 32 characters long, and cannot include non-printable characters.
Duplicate usernames are not allowed. (Default = undefined.)
• Password: Five to sixteen characters long, and cannot include non-printable
characters. Note that passwords are case sensitive. (Default = undefined.)
• Access Level: Determines which commands this account will be allowed to
access. This option can set the access level for this account to "Administrator",
"SuperUser", "User" or "ViewOnly." For more information on Command Access
Levels, please refer to Section 5.4.1 and Section 17.2. (Default = User.)
• Port Access: If the AUX and/or Remote ports have been reconfigured for use
as Serial Ports as described in Section 5.8.2, then this parameter can be used to
enable or disable an account's access to these ports. Normally, when the AUX
ports and Remote port are configured for their default purpose (connection to
additional, remote MPC units or the MPC-DISPLAY unit) the Port Access parameter
will have no effect. (Defaults; Administrator and SuperUser = All Serial Ports
Enabled, User = All Serial Ports Disabled..)
Notes:
• This parameter will only function when the AUX ports or Remote port have
been configured as serial ports as described in Section 5.8.2.
• When the AUX ports are used for connection to additional remote MPC units,
all accounts will still be able to display status and control switching functions
at the remote MPC units, providing that access to plugs on the remote units
is allowed by the account's Access Level and Plug Access parameters.
• Accounts with ViewOnly level command access cannot be granted access to
the serial ports.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
• Plug Access: Determines which outlet(s) this account will be allowed to control.
(Defaults; Administrator and SuperUser = All Plugs On, User = All Plugs Off,
ViewOnly = All Plugs Off.)
Notes:
• If your installation includes optional AUX units, please refer to Section 5.5.2.1
for additional instructions regarding granting user account access to plugs
on AUX units.
• In the Text Interface, Plug Access is configured by selecting item 4 and then
selecting the desired plugs from the resulting submenu.
• In the Web Browser Interface, Plug Access is configured by clicking on the
"plus" symbol to display the drop down menu, and then selecting the desired
plugs from the drop down menu.
• Administrator and SuperUser level accounts will always have access to all
plugs.
• User level accounts will only have access to the plugs that are defined via the
"Plug Access" parameter.
• ViewOnly accounts are allowed to display the On/Off status of plugs
via the Plug Status Screen, but are limited to the plugs specified by the
account. ViewOnly accounts are not allowed to invoke switching and reboot
commands.
• Plug Group Access: Determines which plug groups this account will be allowed
to control. Plug Groups allow you to define a selection of outlets, and then quickly
assign those outlets to new accounts by allowing the account to access the Plug
Group. For more information on Plug Groups, please refer to Section 5.6.
(Defaults; Administrator and SuperUser = All Plug Groups On, User = All Plug
Groups Off, ViewOnly = All Plug Groups Off.)
Notes:
• In order to use this feature, Plug Groups must first be defined as described in
Section 5.6.
• In the Text Interface, Plug Group Access is configured by selecting item 4
and then selecting the desired Plug Group(s) from the resulting submenu.
• In the Web Browser Interface, Plug Group Access is configured by clicking
on the "plus" symbol to display the drop down menu, and then selecting the
desired Plug Group(s) from the drop down menu.
• Administrator and SuperUser level accounts will always have access to all
plug groups.
• User Level accounts will only have access to the plug groups that are
defined via the Plug Group Access parameter.
• ViewOnly accounts are allowed to display the On/Off status of plug groups
via the Plug Status Screen, but are limited to the plug groups specified by the
account. ViewOnly accounts are not allowed to invoke switching and reboot
commands.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
• Service Access: Determines whether this account will be able to access command
mode via Serial Port, Telnet/SSH or Web. For example, if Telnet/SSH Access is
disabled for this account, then this account will not be able to access command
mode via Telnet or SSH. (Default = Serial Port = On, Telnet/SSH = On,
Web = On.)
• Current/Power Metering: Enables/Disables current and power metering for this
account. When disabled, this account will not be able to see current or power
readings or display current or power history. Note that in order for accounts to be
able to display these logs, Current and Power Metering must be enabled via the
Systems Parameters menu as described in Section 5.3. (Default = On.)
• Callback Number: Assigns a number that will be called when this account
attempts to access command mode via modem, and the Callback Security
Function has been enabled as described in Section 5.3.5. (Default = undefined.)
Notes:
• If the Callback Number is not defined, then Callbacks will not be performed
for this user.
• If the Callback Number is not defined for a given user, and the Callback
Security feature is configured to use either of the "On - Callback" options,
then this user will be granted immediate access to command mode via
modem.
• If the Callback Number is not defined for a given user, and the Callback
Security feature is configured to use the "On - Callback ONLY" option, then
this user will not be able to access command mode via Modem.
• When using the "On - Callback (With Password Prompt)" option, it is
important to remember that accounts that do not include a callback number
will be allowed to access command mode without callback verification.
Note: After you have finished selecting or editing account parameters, make
certain to save the new account information before proceeding. In the Web
Browser Interface, click on the "Add User" button to save parameters; in the Text
Interface, press the [Esc] key several times until the MPC displays the "Saving
Configuration" message and the cursor returns to the command prompt.
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.5.2.1. Granting User Account Access to Plugs on AUX Units
Web Browser Interface
To grant a user account access to plugs on AUX units, simply select the desired plugs
from the "Configure Plug Access" drop down menu as you normally would and then
click on the "Add User" button.
Text Interface
When Plug Access for each user account is defined via the Text Interface, the following
procedure is used to grant access to plugs on optional AUX/Remote units:
1. From the Add User menu, type 5and press [Enter] to display the Plug Access
menu. At the Plug Access menu, select plugs for your local MPC unit as you
normally would, and when finished, press [Enter] to return to the Add User menu.
2. To grant access to plugs on AUX units, type 4and press [Enter] again to return to
the Plug Access menu, and then type >(greater than symbol) and press [Enter] to
scroll to the desired AUX MPC unit. When the desired AUX unit is displayed, select
plugs for the AUX unit as you normally would, and then press [Enter] to return to
the Add User Menu.
Note: The first line of the Plug Access menu will indicate the name of the AUX
or Local MPC unit that is currently selected.
3. Repeat Step 2 above to grant access to plugs on additional AUX units.
4. When you have finished granting Plug Access rights to this user, define any other
desired parameters for this account, and then make certain to press [Esc] several
times until the "Saving Configuration" message is displayed and the unit returns to
the MPC command prompt.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.5.3. Modifying User Accounts
The "Edit User Directory" function allows you to edit existing user accounts in order to
change parameters, plug access rights or Administrator Command capability. Note
that the Edit/Modify User function is only available when you have accessed command
mode using a password that permits Administrator Level commands. To modify a user
account, proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: From the User Directory menu, type 3and press [Enter]. The MPC
will display a screen which lists all user accounts. Key in the name of the account
you wish to modify, and press [Enter].
• Web Browser Interface: From the User Configuration menu, click the "View/Modify
User" link. The MPC will display a menu that allows you to select the user. Select
the "Modify User" button, then click the down arrow, scroll to the name of the
desired account, select the username, and then click "Choose User" to display the
"Modify User" menu.
Once you have accessed the Modify Users menu, use the menu options to redefine
parameters in the same manner that is used for the Add User menu, as discussed in
Section 5.5.2.
Note: After you have finished changing parameters, make certain to save the
changes before proceeding. In the Web Browser Interface, click on the "Modify
User" button to save parameters; in the Text Interface, press the [Esc] key
several times until the MPC displays the "Saving Configuration" message.
5.5.4. Deleting User Accounts
This function is used to delete individual user accounts. Note that the Delete User
function is only available when you have accessed command mode using a password
that permits Administrator Level commands. To delete an existing user account,
proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: From the Users Directory menu, type 4and press [Enter]. The
MPC will display a screen which lists all currently defined accounts. Key in the
name of the account you wish to delete and press [Enter]. The MPC will delete the
specified account without further prompting.
• Web Browser Interface: From the User Configuration menu, click the "View/Modify
Users" link. The MPC will display a menu that lists all currently defined accounts.
Select the "Delete User" box, then click the down arrow, scroll to the account you
wish to delete, select the account, and then click "Choose User." The MPC will
display a screen that lists details for the specified account; click "Delete User" to
confirm deletion.
Notes:
• Deleted accounts cannot be automatically restored.
• The MPC allows you to delete the default "super" account, which is included
to permit initial access to command mode. Before deleting the "super"
account, make certain to create another account that permits Administrator
Access. If you do not retain at least one account with Administrator Access,
you will not be able to invoke Administrator level commands.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.6. The Plug Group Directory
The Plug Group Directory allows you to designate "groups" of plugs that are dedicated
to a similar function, and will most likely be switched or rebooted all at the same time or
controlled by the same type of user account.
For example, an individual equipment rack might include an assortment of devices
that belong to different departments or clients. In order to simplify the process of
granting plug access rights to the accounts that will control power to these devices,
you could assign all of the plugs for the devices belonging to Department A to a Plug
Group named "Dept_A", and all of the plugs for the devices belonging to Department B
to a Plug Group named "Dept_B". When user accounts are defined later, this would
allow you to quickly grant access rights for all of the plugs for the devices belonging to
Department A to the appropriate user accounts for Department A, by merely granting
access to the Dept_A Plug Group, rather than by selecting the specific, individual plugs
for each Department A user account.
Likewise, Plug Groups allow you to direct On/Off/Boot commands to a series of plugs,
without addressing each plug individually. Given the example above, you could quickly
reboot all plugs for Department A, by either including the "Dept_A" Plug Group name in
a /BOOT command line via the Text Interface, or by using the Plug Group Control menu
via the Web Browser Interface.
The Plug Group Directory function is only available when you have logged into
command mode using an account that permits Administrator commands. To access the
Plug Group Directory, proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Type /Gand press [Enter] to display the Plug Group Directory
menu.
• Web Interface: Click the "Plug Group Directory" link on the left hand side of the
screen to display the Plug Group Configuration menu.
In both the Text Interface and the Web Browser Interface, the Plug Group Directory
menu offers the following functions:
• View Plug Group Directory: Displays currently defined plug access rights for any
MPC Plug Group as described in Section 5.6.1.
• Add Plug Group to Directory: Creates new Plug Groups, and allows you to assign
plug access rights to each group as described in Section 5.6.2.
• Modify Plug Group Directory: This option is used to edit or change plug access
rights for each Plug Group, as described in Section 5.6.3.
• Delete Plug Group from Directory: Clears Plug Groups that are no longer
needed, as described in Section 5.6.4.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.6.1. Viewing Plug Groups
The "View Plug Group Directory" option allows you to view the configuration of each
Plug Group. Note that the View Plug Group Directory function is only available when
you have accessed command mode using a password that permits Administrator Level
commands. To view Plug Group details, proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Type /Gand press [Enter] to display the Plug Group Directory
menu. From the Plug Group Directory menu, type 1and press [Enter]. The MPC
will display a screen which lists all defined Plug Groups. Key in the name of the
Plug Group that you need to review and then press [Enter].
• Web Browser Interface: Click the "Plug Group Directory" link on the left hand
side of the screen to display the Plug Group Directory menu. From the Plug Group
Directory menu, click the "View/Modify Plug Group" link. The MPC will display
a menu that allows you to select the desired Plug Group and directory function.
Select the "View Plug Group" button, and then click on the down arrow, scroll to the
desired Plug Group, select the Plug Group, and then click "Choose Plug Group" to
view the selected Plug Group.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
ADD PLUG GROUP:
1. Plug Group Name:
2. Plug Access:
(undefined)
(undefined)
Enter: #<CR> to select,
<ESC> to return to previous menu ...
Figure 5.7: The Add Plug Group Menu (Text Interface)
Figure 5.8: The Add Plug Groups Menu (Web Browser Interface)
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.6.2. Adding Plug Groups
The "Add Plug Group to Directory" option allows you to create new Plug Groups and
assign plug access rights to each group. Note that the Add Plug Group function is only
available when you have accessed command mode using a password that permits
Administrator Level commands. To create new Plug Groups, proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Type /Gand press [Enter] to display the Plug Group Directory
menu. From the Plug Group Directory menu, type 2and press [Enter]. The MPC
will display the Add Plug Group menu as shown in Figure 5.7.
• Web Browser Interface: Click the "Plug Group Directory" link on the left hand
side of the screen to display the Plug Group Directory menu. From the Plug Group
Directory menu, click the "Add Plug Groups" link to display the Add Plug Group
menu as shown in Figure 5.8.
The Add Plug Group Menu can be used to define the following parameters for each new
account:
• Plug Group Name: Assigns a name to the Plug Group. (Default = undefined.)
• Plug Access: Determines which plugs this Plug Group will be allowed to control.
(Default = undefined.)
Notes:
• If your installation includes optional AUX units, please refer to Section 5.6.2.1
for additional instructions regarding granting plug group access to plugs on
AUX units.
• In the Text Interface, Plug Access is configured by selecting item 2 and then
selecting the desired plugs from the resulting submenu.
• In the Web Browser Interface, Plug Access is configured by selecting the
desired plugs from a list of all plugs in the Add Plug Group menu.
• After you have finished defining or editing Plug Group parameters, make
certain to save the changes before proceeding. In the Web Browser
Interface, click on the "Add Plug Group" button to save parameters; in the
Text Interface, press the [Esc] key several times until the MPC displays the
"Saving Configuration" message and the cursor returns to the command
prompt.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.6.2.1. Granting User Account Access to Plugs on AUX Units
Web Browser Interface
To grant a plug group access to plugs on AUX units, simply select the desired plugs
from the "Add Plug Groups" menu as you normally would and then click on the "Add
Plug Groups" button.
Text Interface
When Plug Access for each plug group is defined via the Text Interface, the following
procedure is used to grant access to plugs on optional AUX/Remote units:
1. From the Add Plug Group menu, type 2and press [Enter] to display the Plug
Access menu. At the Plug Access menu, select plugs for your local MPC unit as
you normally would, and when finished, press [Enter] to return to the Add Plug
Group menu.
2. To grant access to plugs on AUX units, type 2and press [Enter] again to return to
the Plug Access menu, and then type >(greater than symbol) and press [Enter] to
scroll to the desired AUX MPC unit. When the desired AUX unit is displayed, select
plugs for the AUX unit as you normally would, and then press [Enter] to return to
the Add Plug Group Menu.
Note: The first line of the Plug Access menu will indicate the name of the AUX
or Local MPC unit that is currently selected.
3. Repeat Step 2 above to grant access to plugs on additional AUX units.
4. When you have finished granting Plug Access rights to this plug group, make
certain to press [Esc] several times until the "Saving Configuration" message is
displayed and the unit returns to the MPC command prompt.
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.6.3. Modifying Plug Groups
The "Modify Plug Group" function allows you to edit existing Plug Groups in order
to change plug access rights. Note that this function is only available when you
have accessed command mode using a password that permits Administrator Level
commands. To modify an existing Plug Group , proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Type /Gand press [Enter] to display the Plug Group Directory
menu. From the Plug Group Directory menu, type 3and press [Enter]. The MPC
will display the Modify Plug Group menu.
• Web Browser Interface: Click the "Plug Group Directory" link on the left hand
side of the screen to display the Plug Group Directory menu. From the Plug Group
Directory menu, click the "View/Modify Plug Group" link. The MPC will display a
menu that lists all currently defined Plug Groups. Select the "Modify Plug Group"
button, then click the down arrow, scroll to the Plug Group that you wish to modify,
select the Plug Group, and then click "Choose Plug Group." The MPC will display
the Modify Plug Group menu.
Once you have accessed the Modify Plug Group menu, use the menu options to
redefine parameters in the same manner that is used for the Add Plug Group menu, as
discussed in Section 5.6.2.
Note: After you have finished changing or editing parameters, make certain to
save the changes before proceeding. In the Web Browser Interface, click on
the "Modify Plug Groups" button to save parameters; in the Text Interface, press
the [Esc] key several times until the MPC displays the "Saving Configuration"
message and the cursor returns to the command prompt.
5.6.4. Deleting Plug Groups
This function is used to delete individual Plug Groups. Note that this function is only
available when you have accessed command mode using a password that permits
Administrator Level commands. To delete an existing user account, proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Type /Gand press [Enter] to display the Plug Group Directory
menu. From the Plug Group Directory menu, type 4and press [Enter]. The MPC
will display a screen which lists all currently defined Plug Groups. Key in the name
of the Plug Group that you wish to delete and press [Enter]. The MPC will delete
the specified account without further prompting.
• Web Browser Interface: Click the "Plug Group Directory" link on the left hand
side of the screen to display the Plug Group Directory menu. From the Plug Group
Directory menu, click the "View/Modify Plug Group" link. The MPC will display a
menu that lists all currently defined Plug Groups. Select the "Delete Plug Group"
button, then click the down arrow, scroll to the Plug Group you wish to delete,
select the Plug Group, and then click "Delete Plug Group." The MPC will display a
screen that lists details for the specified Plug Group; click "Delete Plug Group" to
confirm deletion.
Note: Deleted accounts cannot be automatically restored.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
PLUG_PARAMETERS - LOCAL
1. A1 Plug Name:
Local_InfeedA_Outlet1
2. A1 Boot/Seq. Delay:
3. A1 Power Up Default:
0.5 Secs
On
4. A1 Boot Priority
5. A2 Plug Name:
:
1
Local_InfeedA_Outlet2
6. A2 Boot/Seq. Delay:
0.5 Secs
7. A2 Power Up Default:
On
8. A2 Boot Priority
9. A3 Plug Name:
:
2
Local_InfeedA_Outlet3
10. A3 Boot/Seq. Delay:
0.5 Secs
11. A3 Power Up Default:
On
12. A3 Boot Priority
13. A4 Plug Name:
:
3
Local_InfeedA_Outlet4
14. A4 Boot/Seq. Delay:
0.5 Secs
15. A4 Power Up Default:
16. A4 Boot Priority
On
4
:
Enter: #<CR> to select, “<” for previous plugs, “>” for next plugs.
<ESC> to exit and save configuration ...
Figure 5.9: The Plug Parameters Menu (Text Interface)
Figure 5.10: The Plug Parameters Menu (Web Browser Interface)
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.7. Defining Plug Parameters
The Plug Parameters Menu is used to define Plug Names, boot/sequence delay times
and Power Up Default values for each of the MPC's Switched AC Outlets. Note that this
function is only available when you have accessed command mode using a password
that permits Administrator Level commands. To define Plug Parameters, proceed as
follows:
• Text Interface: Type /PLand then press [Enter]. The Plug Parameters Menu will
be displayed as shown in Figure 5.9. To define Plug Parameters, key in the number
for the desired parameter, press [Enter] and then follow the instructions in the
resulting submenu.
• Web Browser Interface: Click the "Plug Parameters" link on the left hand side of
the screen to display the Plug Group Directory menu (Figure 5.10.) To define Plug
Parameters, either place the cursor in the Plug Name field and key in a new name,
or locate the drop down menu for the desired parameter, click on the down arrow,
and scroll to the desired parameter and select it. When you are finished selecting
Plug Parameters, click the "Change Plugs" button to apply he new parameters.
The Plug Parameters Menu allows you to define the following parameters:
• Plug Name: (Up to 16 Characters, Default = undefined.)
Note: Plug Names must begin with either a lower case alphabetic letter
or upper case alphabetic letter. Plug Names cannot begin with a number
character or symbol character.
• Boot/Seq. Delay: When more than one plug is switched On or a reboot cycle is
initiated, the Boot/Sequence delay determines how much time will elapse before
the next plug is switched On. When the Boot/Sequence Delay is applied, the MPC
will wait for the user-defined delay period before switching On the next plug. This
allows time for the device connected to the first plug to adequately "wake up" before
switching on power to the device connected to the next plug. When Reboot cycles
and switching actions are initiated, the Boot/Sequence Delay will be applied as
follows: (Default = 0.5 Second.)
■
Reboot Cycle Delay: During a reboot cycle, the MPC will first switch all selected
plugs "Off" (with a 0.5 second pause between each "Off" operation), and then
begin to switch selected plugs back On again, pausing for the user-defined
Boot/Sequence Delay before switching On the next plug. For example, if the
Boot/Sequence Delay for Plug 3 is ten seconds, then the MPC will pause for ten
seconds before proceeding to the next plug.
■
"On" Sequence Delay: When two or more plugs are switched On, the MPC will
pause for the user-defined Boot/Sequence Delay before switching On the next
plug.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
• Power Up Default: Determines how this plug will react when the Default
command (/D) is invoked, or after power to the unit has been interrupted and then
restored. After the default command is invoked, or power is restored, the MPC will
automatically switch each plug On or Off as specified by the Power-Up Default.
(Default = On).
Note:
• If you have accessed command mode using an account that permits
Administrator or SuperUser level commands, then the Default command will
be applied to all switched plugs.
• If you have accessed command mode via an User Level account, then the
Default command will only be applied to plugs allowed by your account.
• Boot Priority: When commands are applied to two or more plugs, the Boot
Priority parameter determines the order in which the plugs will be switched On.
The Plug that has been assigned a Boot Priority of "1" will always be switched on
first, followed by the plug that has been assigned the Boot Priority of "2", and so
forth. When you assign a boot priority to any given plug, then all subsequent plugs
will have their priority lowered by one. For more information on the Boot Priority
parameter, please refer to Section 5.7.1. (Default = All plugs prioritized according
to Plug Number.)
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.7.1. The Boot Priority Parameter
Normally, when an "On" or "Reboot" command is invoked, the MPC will switch on its
plugs in their default, numeric order. Although in many cases, the default, numeric order
will work fine, there are other cases where an individual device (such as a router) must
be switched on first, in order to support a second device that will be switched on later.
The Boot Priority Parameter simplifies the process of setting the order in which plugs
are switched On, by assigning a priority number to each plug, rather than by requiring
the user to make certain that devices are always connected to the MPC in a set order.
Likewise, when new devices are added to your equipment rack, the Boot Priority
Parameter eliminates the need to unplug all existing devices and then rearrange the
plugs connected to the MPC (and re-define plug parameters) to ensure that they are
switched on in the desired order.
Notes:
• No two plugs can be assigned the same Boot Priority number.
• When a higher Boot Priority is assigned to any given plug, all subsequent
plugs will have their boot priorities lowered by a factor of 1.
• The Boot Priority is also displayed on the Plug Status Screen.
5.7.1.1. Example 1: Change Plug A3 to Priority 1
In the Example shown in Figure 5.11, we start out with all Plugs set to their default Boot
Priorities, with Plug A1 first, Plug A2 second and so forth.
Next, the Boot Priority for Plug A3 is changed to Priority 1. This means that Plug A3
will now be switched On first after a reboot, and that Plug A1 will now be switched On
second, Plug A2 will be third, etc..
Note that when the Boot Priority for Plug A3 is set to 1, the Boot Priorities for all plugs
that were previously Booted before plug A1 are now lowered by a factor of one
BEFORE
(Plug No.) Priority
(Assign Plug A3
to Priority 1)
AFTER
(Plug No.) Priority
(A1) 1
(A2) 2
(A3) 3
(A4) 4
(A5) 5
(A6) 6
(A1) 2
(A2) 3
(A3) 1
(A4) 4
(A5) 5
(A6) 6
1
Figure 5.11: Boot Priority Example 1
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.7.1.2. Example 2: Change Plug A5 to Priority 2
In the second Example shown in Figure 5.12, we start out with Boot Priorities for the
plugs set as they were at the end of Example 1; Plug A3 is first, Plug A1 is second, Plug
A2 is third, Plug A4 is fourth, and Plug A6 is sixth.
Next, the Boot Priority for Plug A5 is changed to Priority 2. This means that Plug A3
will continue to be switched on first after a reboot, but now Plug A5 will be switched on
second, Plug A3 will be third, Plug A2 will be fourth, Plug A4 will be fifth and Plug A6 will
still be sixth.
Once again, note that when the Boot Priority for Plug A5 is set to 2, the Boot Priorities for
all plugs that were previously Booted before plug A5 are now lowered by a factor of one
BEFORE
(Plug No.) Priority
(Assign Plug A5
to Priority 2)
AFTER
(Plug No.) Priority
(A1) 2
(A2) 3
(A3) 1
(A4) 4
(A5) 5
(A6) 6
(A1) 3
(A2) 4
(A3) 1
(A4) 5
(A5) 2
(A6) 6
2
Figure 5.12: Boot Priority Example 2
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
PORT PARAMETERS #01:
COMMUNICATION SETTING
1. Baud Rate:
PORT MODE PARAMETERS
21. Port Name:
9600
(undefined)
2. Bits/Parity:
3. Stop Bits:
4. Handshake:
8-None
1
RTS/CTS
22. Port Mode:
23. DTR Output:
24. Modem Params:
Normal
Pulse
---
GENERAL PARAMETERS
11. Administrator Mode: Permit
12. Logoff Char:
13. Sequence Disc:
14. Inact Timeout:
15. Command Echo:
16. Accept Break:
^X
One Char
5 Min
On
On
Enter #<CR> to change,
<ESC> to exit and save configuration...
Figure 5.13: Serial Port Configuration Menu (Text Interface)
Figure 5.14: Port Configuration Menu (Web Browser Interface)
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.8. Serial Port Configuration
The Serial Port Configuration menus allow you to select parameters for the MPC's serial
Console Port, as well as the Remote Port and AUX Ports.
• Console Port: The serial Console Port (Port 1) can be configured for connection
to a local PC or Modem or used for connection to serial console ports on other
rack equipment. In addition, the Serial Port Configuration menu can also be used
to set communications parameters, disable Administrator level commands at the
Console Port and also select a number of other Console Port Parameters described
in Section 5.8.1.
• Remote Port: The RJ45 Remote Port is normally used for connection to the
optional MPC-DISPLAY remote display panel. Note however, that if necessary, the
Serial Port Configuration menu can also be used to configure the Remote Port for
communication with other serial devices as described in Section 5.8.2.
• AUX Ports: The RJ45 AUX Ports are normally used for connection to optional
remote MPC units. This allows you to connect up to three additional MPC units
when you need to control additional power outlets via a single IP address. If
necessary, the Serial Port Configuration menus can also be used to configure
the AUX ports for communications with other serial devices as described in
Section 5.8.2.
5.8.1. Console Port Configuration
To configure the MPC's serial Console Port, proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Type /P 1 and then press [Enter]. The Port Parameters menu will
be displayed as shown in Figure 5.13.
• Web Browser Interface: Click the "Serial Port" link on the left hand side of
the screen to display the Serial Port Configuration Menu. From the Serial Port
Configuration menu, use the dropdown menu to select Port 1 (the Console Port)
and then click on the Select Port button to display the Serial Port 1 Configuration
Menu, as shown in Figure 5.14.
The Console Port Configuration menu allows the following parameters to be defined.
Note that all of these parameters are available via both the Text Interface and Web
Browser Interface, and that parameters selected via one interface are also applied to the
other.
Communication Settings:
• Baud Rate: Any standard rate from 300 bps to 115.2K bps. (Default = 9600 bps)
• Bits/Parity: (Default = 8-None).
• Stop Bits: (Default = 1).
• Handshake Mode: XON/XOFF, RTS/CTS (hardware), Both, or None.
(Default = RTS/CTS).
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
General Parameters:
• Administrator Mode: Permits/denies port access to Administrator and
SuperUser level accounts. When enabled (Permit), the port will be allowed to
invoke Administrator and SuperUser level commands, providing they are issued
by an account that permits them. If disabled (Deny), then accounts that permit
Administrator and SuperUser level commands will not be allowed to access
command mode via this port. (Default = Permit).
• Logoff Character: The Logoff Character determines the command(s) or
character(s) that must be issued at this port in order to disconnect. Note that the
Logoff Character does not apply to Direct Connections. (Default = ^X.)
• Sequence Disconnect: Enables/Disables and configures the disconnect
command. This item offers the option to disable the Sequence Disconnect, select a
one character format or a three character format. (Default = One Character.)
• Inactivity Timeout: Enables and selects the Timeout Period for this port. If
enabled, the Console Port will disconnect when no additional data activity is
detected for the duration of the timeout period. (Default = 5 Minutes.)
• Command Echo: Enables or Disables command echo at the Console Port. When
disabled, commands that are sent to the Console Port will still be invoked, but the
actual keystrokes will not be displayed on your monitor. (Default = On.)
• Accept Break: Determines whether the port will accept breaks received from the
attached device. When enabled, breaks received at the port will be passed to any
port that this port is connected to. When disabled, breaks will be refused at this
port. (Default = On.)
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
Port Mode Parameters:
• Port Name: Allows you to assign a name to the Console Port.
(Default = undefined.)
• Port Mode: The operation mode for this port. (Default = Normal Mode)
Depending on the Port Mode selected, the MPC will also display the additional
prompts listed below. In the Text Interface, these parameters are accessible via a
submenu, which will only be active when the appropriate port mode is selected. In
the Web Browser Interface, fields will be "grayed out" unless the corresponding port
mode is selected.
◆
Normal Mode: Allows communication with a local PC and permits access to
command mode. When the Normal Mode is selected, the following mode-
specific parameter can also be defined:
➤ DTR Output: Determines how DTR will react when the port disconnects. DTR
can be held low, held high, or pulsed for 0.5 seconds and then held high.
(Default = Pulse.)
◆
Modem Mode: Permits access to command mode and simplifies connection
to an external modem. Modem Mode ports can perform all functions normally
available in Normal Mode, but Modem Mode also allows definition of the
following, additional parameters:
➤ Reset String: Redefines the modem reset string. The Reset String can be
sent prior to the Initialization string. (Default = ATZ.)
➤ Initialization String: Defines a command string that can be sent to
initialize a modem to settings required by your application. (Default =
AT&C1&D2S0=1&B1&H1&R2)
➤ Hang-Up String: Although the MPC will pulse the DTR line to hang-up an
attached modem, the Hang-Up string is often useful for controlling modems
that do not use the DTR line. (Default = undefined.)
➤ Periodic Reset Value: Determines how often the Reset String will be sent to
the modem at this port.
Note: When communicating with the MPC via modem, these parameters will
not be changed until after you exit command mode and disconnect.
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
AUX PORT PARAMETERS:
REMOTE SETTINGS
1. Port Function:
2. Baud Rate:
3. Bits/Parity:
4. Stop Bits:
AUX2 SETTINGS
Remote
----
----
----
----
----
13. Port Function:
14. Baud Rate:
15. Bits/Parity:
16. Stop Bits:
17. Handskake:
18. Inact Timeout:
Aux2
----
----
----
----
----
5. Handskake:
6. Inact Timeout:
AUX1 SETTINGS
AUX3 SETTINGS
7. Port Function:
8. Baud Rate:
9. Bits/Parity:
10. Stop Bits:
11. Handskake:
12. Inact Timeout:
Aux1
----
----
----
----
----
19. Port Function:
20. Baud Rate:
21. Bits/Parity:
22. Stop Bits:
23. Handskake:
24. Inact Timeout:
Aux3
----
----
----
----
----
Enter: #<CR> to change,
<ESC> to exit and save configuration ...
Figure 5.15: Remote/AUX Port Configuration Menu (Text Interface)
Figure 5.16: Remote/AUX Port Configuration Menu (Web Browser Interface)
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.8.2. Remote Port and AUX Port Configuration
In most applications, it is not necessary to change the configuration of the Remote Port
or AUX Port. If you do not intend to use the Remote or AUX ports, or if you intend to use
the Remote Port and AUX Ports for connection to the optional MPC-DISPLAY unit and
additional MPC units, then the factory default settings for these ports will work fine and
you will not need to change the configuration of these ports.
Note however, that in addition to their default functions (connection to the MPC-DISPLAY
unit or additional MPC units), the Remote and AUX Ports can also be configured to allow
serial communication with Console Ports on attached devices. In this case, you must
reconfigure the MPC's Remote and/or AUX Ports as follows:
• Text Interface: Type /P AUX and then press [Enter]. The Remote/AUX Port
Parameters menu will be displayed as shown in Figure 5.15.
• Web Browser Interface: Click the "Serial Port" link on the left hand side of the
screen. From the Serial Port Configuration menu, use the dropdown menu to select
"Aux" and then click on the Select Port button to display the Remote/AUX Port
Configuration Menu, as shown in Figure 5.16.
The Remote/AUX Port Configuration menus allow the following parameters to be
defined. Note that all of these parameters are available via both the Text Interface and
Web Browser Interface, and that parameters selected via one interface are also applied
to the other.
•
Port Function: Determines whether each port will be used for connection to
optional MPC devices, or used for serial communication.
(Default: Remote Port = "Remote"; AUX Port = "AUX".)
Notes:
• In the default state all other Remote/AUX Port parameters are inaccessible.
When the Remote/AUX Mode is selected for a port, additional menu items for
that port will then be activated.
• When the Remote and/or AUX Ports are used for serial communication,
Alarms will be temporarily suppressed whenever the ports are connected.
• If the AUX port is already connected to an AUX MPC unit, then you will need
to re-initialize the AUX unit before configuring the AUX port as a serial port.
Access your local MPC unit via the Text Interface and then issue the /I
(initialize) command at your local MPC unit. When the submenu appears,
select the AUX port that you intend to reconfigure as a serial port. After the
command is completed, disconnect the AUX MPC unit from the AUX port and
then reconfigure the AUX port as described in this section.
• When an AUX or Remote port is set for Serial Port mode, then accounts
that permit access to that port will be allowed to invoke the /C command to
connect to the port as described in Section 9.2.4.
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
• Baud Rate: Any standard rate from 300 bps to 115.2K bps. (Default = 9600 bps)
• Bits/Parity: (Default = 8-None)
• Stop Bits: (Default = 1)
• Handshake Mode: XON/XOFF, RTS/CTS (hardware), Both, or None.
(Default = RTS/CTS)
• Inactivity Timeout: Enables and selects the Timeout Period for this port. If
enabled, the port will disconnect when no additional data activity is detected for the
duration of the timeout period. (Default = 5 Minutes.)
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
NETWORK PARAMETERS:
COMMUNICATION SETTING
1. IP Address:
2. Subnet Mask:
3. Gateway Addr:
4. DHCP:
5. IP Security:
6. Static Route:
7. DNS Servers:
SERVERS AND CLIENTS
21. Telnet Access:
22. SSH Access:
23. Web Access:
24. SYSLOG Addr:
25. SNMP Access:
26. SNMP Trap:
27. LDAP:
28. TACACS:
29. RADIUS:
30. PING Access:
31. Multiple Logins:
32. Email Messaging:
207.212.30.80
255.255.255.0
207.212.30.1
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
(undefined)
GENERAL PARAMETERS
11. Administrator Mode:Permit
12. Logoff Char:
13. Sequence Disc:
14. Inact Timeout:
15. Command Echo:
16. Accept Break:
^X
One Char
Off
On
On
On
Off
Enter: #<CR> to change,
<ESC> to exit and save configuration ...
Figure 5.17: Network Parameters Menu (Text Interface)
Figure 5.18: Network Configuration Menu (Web Browser Interface)
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.9. Network Configuration
The Network Parameters Menus are used to select parameters and options for the
Network Port and also allow you to implement IP Security features, which can restrict
access based on the user’s IP Address.
Although the Web Browser Interface and Text Interface allow definition of essentially the
same parameters, parameters are arranged differently in the two interfaces. In the Text
Interface, most network parameters are defined via one menu. But in the Web Browser
Interface, network parameters are divided into separate menus as described in this
section.
To access the Network Parameters Menus, proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Type /Nand press [Enter]. The Network Parameters Menu shown
in Figure 5.17 will be displayed.
• Web Browser Interface: Click on the "Network Configuration" link on the left hand
side of the screen. The MPC will display the Network Configuration menu shown
in Figure 5.18, which allows you to access the various submenus used to configure
the network port. Alternately, you can also access a specific Network Configuration
submenu by placing the cursor over the "Network Configuration" link. When the fly-
out menu appears, click on the link for the desired submenu.
Notes:
• Settings for network parameters depend on the configuration of your network.
Please contact your network administrator for appropriate settings.
• The Network Parameters Menu selects parameters for all 16 logical Network
Ports.
• The IP Address, Subnet Address and Gateway Address cannot be changed
via the Web Browser Interface. In order to change these parameters, you
must access the unit via the Text Interface.
• When a new IP Address is selected, or the status of the DHCP feature is
changed, the unit will disconnect and reconfigure itself with the new values
when you exit the Network Parameters Menu. When configuring the unit,
make certain your DHCP server is set up to assign a known, fixed IP address
in order to simplify reconnection to the unit after the new address has been
assigned. DHCP Parameters cannot be changed via the Web Browser
Interface.
• The Network Parameters menu is only available when you have logged into
command mode using an account and port that permit Administrator level
commands (Supervisor Mode enabled.)
The Network Parameters menu allows you to define the parameters discussed in the
following sections. Note that although the descriptions of network parameters are
arranged according to the Web Browser Interface, in the Text Interface, most parameters
are included in a single menu.
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.9.1. Network Port Parameters
In the Text Interface, these parameters are found in the main Network Configuration
menu (Figure 5.17.) In the Web Browser Interface, these parameters are found by
placing the cursor over the "Network Configuration" link on the left hand side of the
screen, and then clicking on the "Network Port Parameters" link in the resulting
fly-out menu.
• Administrator Mode: Permits/denies port access to accounts that allow
Administrator or SuperUser level commands. When enabled (Permit), the port will
be allowed to invoke Administrator and SuperUser level commands, providing they
are issued by an account that permits them. If disabled (Deny), then accounts that
permit Administrator and SuperUser level commands will not be allowed to access
command mode via this port. (Default = Permit)
• Logoff Character: Defines the Logoff Character for this port. This determines
which command(s) must be issued at this port in order to disconnect from a second
port. (Default = ^X([Ctrl] plus [X]).)
Note: The Sequence Disconnect parameter can be used to pick a one
character or a three character logoff sequence.
• Sequence Disconnect: Enables/Disables and configures the Resident Disconnect
command. Offers the option to either disable the Sequence Disconnect, or select a
one character, or three character command format. (Default = One Character).
Notes:
• The One Character Disconnect is intended for situations where the
destination port should not receive the disconnect command. When the
Three Character format is selected, the disconnect sequence will pass
through to the destination port prior to breaking the connection.
• When Three Character format is selected, the Resident Disconnect uses the
format "[Enter]LLL[Enter]", where Lis the selected Logoff Character.
• Inactivity Timeout: Enables and selects the Inactivity Timeout period for the
Network Port. If enabled, and the port does not receive or transmit data for the
specified time period, the port will disconnect. (Default = 5 Minutes).
• Command Echo: Enables or Disables the command echo for the Network Port.
(Default = On).
• Accept Break: Determines whether the port will accept breaks received from the
attached device, and pass them along to a connected port. When enabled, breaks
received at this port will be passed to any port this port is connected to, and sent
to the device connected to the other port. When disabled, breaks will be refused at
this port. (Default = On.)
• Multiple Logins: If the MPC is installed in an environment that does not include
communication via an open network (local communication only), then the Multiple
Logins parameter can be used to determine whether or not multiple users will be
able to communicate with the unit at the same time. If this parameter is set to "Off"
then only one user will be allowed to communicate with the unit at a time.
(Default = On.)
Note: The "Multiple Logins" prompt is not included in the Web Browser
Interface.
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.9.2. Network Parameters
In the Text Interface, these parameters are accessed via the Network Configuration
menu (Figure 5.17.) In the Web Browser Interface, these parameters are found by
placing the cursor over the "Network Configuration" link on the left hand side of the
screen, and then clicking on the "Network Parameters" link in the resulting fly-out menu.
Note: The IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway Address and DHCP status
cannot be changed via the Web Browser Interface. In order to change these
parameters, you must access the MPC via the Text Interface.
• IP Address: (Default = 192.168.168.168.)
• Subnet Mask: (Default = 255.255.255.0.)
• Gateway Address: (Default = undefined.)
• DHCP: Enables/Disables Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. When this option
is "On", the MPC will perform a DHCP request. Note that in the Text Interface, the
MAC address for the MPC is listed on the Network Status Screen. (Default = Off.)
Note: Before configuring this feature, make certain your DHCP server is set up
to assign a known, fixed IP address. You will need this new IP address in order
to reestablish a network connection with the MPC unit.
• Telnet Access: Enables/disables Telnet access. When Telnet Access is "Off," users
will not be allowed to establish a Telnet connection to the unit. (Default = On.)
• Telnet Port: Selects the TCP/IP port number that will be used for Telnet
connections. Note that in the Text Interface, this item is defined via a submenu,
which is displayed when the Telnet Access parameter is selected (item number 21.)
(Default = 23.)
• Max. Per Source: Specifies the maximum number of Telnet sessions that will be
allowed per user MAC address. (Default = 4.)
Notes:
• In the Text Interface, the "Per Source" parameter is defined via a submenu of
item 21 (Telnet Access) in the Network Parameters menu.
• After changing the "Max Per Source" parameter, you must log out of all pre-
existing Telnet sessions in order for the new maximum value to be applied.
• SSH Access: Enables/disables SSH communication. (Default = On.)
• SSH Port: Selects the TCP/IP port number that will be used for SSH connections.
Note that in the Text Interface, this option is defined via a submenu that is displayed
when the SSH Access parameter is selected (item number 22). (Default = 22.)
• HTTP Access (Web Access): Enables/disables the Web Browser Interface.
When disabled, users will not be allowed to contact the unit via the Web Browser
Interface. (Default = Off.)
• HTTP Port: Selects the TCP/IP port number that will be used for SSH connections.
(Default = 80.)
• HTTPS Access: Enables/disables HTTPS communication. For instructions on
setting up SSL encryption, please refer to Section 14. (Default = On.)
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
• HTTPS Port: Selects the TCP/IP port number that will be used for HTTPS
connections. (Default = 443.)
Notes:
• In the Text Interface, HTTP and HTTPS parameters reside in a separate
submenu. To enable and configure HTTP and HTTPS Access via the
Text Interface, access the Network Configuration Menu as described in
Section 5.9, then type 23, press [Enter] and use the resulting submenu
(Figure 14.1) to select parameters.
• When the Web Access parameter is accessed via the Text Interface, the
resulting submenu will also allow you to select SSL (encryption) parameters
as described in Section 14.
• SYSLOG Address: The IP Address or domain name (up to 64 characters) for the
Syslog Daemon that will receive log records generated by the MPC. For more
information, please refer to Section 11. (Default = undefined.)
• Ping Access: Enables/Disables response to the ping command. When Disabled,
the MPC will not respond to Ping commands. Note that disabling Ping Access at
the Network Port will not effect the operation of the Ping-No-Access Alarm.
(Default = On.)
5.9.3. IP Security
The IP Security feature allows the MPC to restrict unauthorized IP addresses from
establishing inbound connections to the unit via telnet or Web Browser. This allows
you to grant access to only a specific group of Telnet or Web IP addresses, or block
a particular IP address completely. In the default state, the MPC accepts incoming IP
connections from all hosts.
In the Text Interface, IP Security parameters are defined via item 5 in the Network
Configuration menu (Figure 5.17.) In the Web Browser Interface, these parameters are
found by placing the cursor over the "Network Configuration" link on the left hand side of
the screen, and then clicking on the "IP Security" link in the resulting fly-out menu. In the
default state, IP Security is disabled. The IP Security Function employs a TCP Wrapper
program which allows the use of standard, Linux operators, wild cards and net/mask
pairs to create a host based access control list.
The IP Security configuration menus include "hosts.allow" and "hosts.deny" client lists.
Basically, when setting up IP Security, you must enter IP addresses for hosts that you
wish to allow in the Allow list, and addresses for hosts that you wish to deny in the Deny
list. Since Linux operators, wild cards and net/mask pairs are allowed, these lists can
indicate specific addresses, or a range of addresses to be allowed or denied. When the
IP Security feature is properly enabled, and a client attempts to connect, the MPC will
perform the following checks:
1. If the client’s IP address is found in the "hosts.allow" list, the client will be granted
immediate access. Once an IP address is found in the Allow list, the MPC will not
check the Deny list, and will assume you wish to allow that address to connect.
2. If the client’s IP address is not found in the Allow list, the MPC will then proceed to
check the Deny list.
3. If the client’s IP Address is found in the Deny list, the client will not be allowed to
connect.
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
4. If the client’s IP Address is not found in the Deny list, the client will be allowed to
connect, even if the address was not found in the Allow list.
Notes:
• If the MPC finds an IP Address in the Allow list, it will not check the Deny list,
and will allow the client to connect.
• If both the Allow and Deny lists are left blank, then the IP Security feature will
be disabled, and all IP Addresses will be allowed to connect (providing that
the proper password and/or SSH key is supplied.)
• When the Allow and Deny lists are defined, the user is only allowed to specify
the Client List; the Daemon List and Shell Command cannot be defined.
5.9.3.1. Adding IP Addresses to the Allow and Deny Lists
To add an IP Address to the Allow or Deny list, and begin configuring the IP Security
feature, proceed as follows.
Notes:
• Both the Allow and Deny list can include Linux operators, wild cards, and
net/mask pairs.
• In some cases, it is not necessary to enter all four "digits" of the IP Address.
For example, if you wish to allow access to all IP addresses that begin with
"192," then you would only need to enter "192."
• The IP Security Configuration menu is only available when the Administrator
Mode is active.
1. Access the IP Security Configuration Menu.
a) Text Interface: Type /N [Enter] to display the Network Configuration Menu.
From the Network Configuration Menu, type 5 [Enter] to display the IP
Security Menu.
b) Web Browser Interface: Place the cursor over the "Network Configuration"
link on the left hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click
on the "IP Security" Link to display the IP Security Menu.
2. Allow List: Enter the IP Address(es) for the clients that you wish to allow. Note that
if an IP Address is found in the Allow list, the client will be allowed to connect, and
the MPC will not check the Deny list.
a) Text Interface: Note the number for the first empty field in the Allow list, then
type that number at the command prompt, press [Enter], and then follow the
instructions in the resulting submenu.
b) Web Browser Interface: Place the cursor in the first empty field in the
parameters menu, then key in the desired IP Address, operators, wild cards,
and/or net/mask pairs.
3. Deny List: Enter the IP Address(es) for the clients that you wish to deny. Note that
if the client’s IP Address is not found in the Deny List, that client will be allowed to
connect. Use the same procedure for entering IP Addresses described in Step 2
above.
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.9.3.2. Linux Operators and Wild Cards
In addition to merely entering a specific IP address or partial IP address in the Allow or
Deny list, you may also use any standard Linux operator or wild card. In most cases,
the only operator used is "EXCEPT" and the only wild card used is "ALL," but more
experienced Linux users may note that other operators and wild cards may also be
used.
EXCEPT:
This operator creates an exception in either the "allow" list or "deny" list.
For example, if the Allow list includes a line which reads "192. EXCEPT 192.255.255.6,"
then all IP address that begin with "192." will be allowed; except 192.255.255.6
(providing that this address appears in the Deny list.)
ALL:
The ALL wild card indicates that all IP Addresses should be allowed or denied. When
ALL is included in the Allow list, all IP addresses will be allowed to connect; conversely,
if ALL is included in the Deny list, all IP Addresses will be denied (except for IP
addresses listed in the Allow list.)
For example, if the Deny list includes a line which reads "ALL EXCEPT 168.255.192.192,"
then all IP addresses except 168.255.192.192 will be denied (except for IP addresses
that are listed in the Allow list.)
Net/Mask Pairs:
An expression of the form "n.n.n.n/m.m.m.m" is interpreted as a "net/mask" pair. A host
address is matched if "net" is equal to the bitwise AND of the address and the "mask."
For example, the net/mask pattern "131.155.72.0/255.255.254.0" matches every address
in the range "131.155.72.0" through "131.155.73.255."
5.9.3.3. IP Security Examples
1. Mostly Closed: Access is denied by default and the only clients allowed,
are those explicitly listed in the Allow list. To deny access to all clients except
192.255.255.192 and 168.112.112.05, the Allow and Deny lists would be defined as
follows:
• Allow List:
1. 192.255.255.192
2. 168.112.112.05
• Deny List:
1. ALL
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
2. Mostly Open: Access is granted by default, and the only clients denied access,
are those explicitly listed in the Deny list, and as exceptions in the Allow list. To
allow access to all clients except 192.255.255.192 and 168.112.112.05, the Allow
and Deny lists would be defined as follows:
• Allow List:
1. ALL EXCEPT 192.255.255.192, 168.112.112.05
• Deny List:
1. 192.255.255.192, 168.112.112.05
Notes:
• When defining a line in the Allow or Deny list that includes several IP
addresses, each individual address is separated by either a space, a comma,
or a comma and a space as shown in Example 2 above.
• Take care when using the "ALL" wild card. When ALL is included in the Allow
list, it should always include an EXCEPT operator in order to allow the unit to
proceed to the Deny list and determine any addresses you wish to deny.
5.9.4. Static Route
The Static Route menu allows you to type in Linux routing commands that will be
automatically executed each time that the unit powers up or reboots. In the Text
Interface, the Static Route menu is accessed via item 6 in the Network Configuration
menu. In the Web Browser Interface, the Static Route menu is accessed by clicking the
Static Route link, located on the left-hand side of the screen.
To access the Static Route Menus, proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Type /Nand press [Enter] to display the Network Parameters
Menu (Figure 5.17.) At the Network Parameters Menu, type 6and press [Enter] to
display the Static Route Menu.
• Web Browser Interface: Place the cursor over the "Network Configuration" link on
the left hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the "Static
Route" link to display the Static Route Menu.
5.9.5. Domain Name Server
The DNS menu is used to select IP addresses for Domain Name Servers. When web
and network addresses are entered, the Domain Name Server interprets domain names
(e.g., www.yourcompanyname123.com), and translates them into IP addresses. Note
that if you don't define at least one DNS, then IP addresses must be used, rather than
domain names.
To access the Domain Name Server Menu, proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Type /Nand press [Enter] to display the Network Parameters
Menu (Figure 5.17.) At the Network Parameters Menu, type 7and press [Enter] to
display the Domain Name Server menu.
• Web Browser Interface: Place the cursor over the "Network Configuration" link on
the left hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the "DNS
Server" link to display the Domain Name Server menu.
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.9.6. SNMP Access Parameters
These menus are used to select access parameters for the SNMP feature. To define or
change SNMP MIB parameters, proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Type /Nand press [Enter] to display the Network Parameters
Menu (Figure 5.17.) At the Network Parameters Menu, type 25and press [Enter] to
display the SNMP Access Parameters Menu.
• Web Browser Interface: Place the cursor over the "Network Configuration" link
on the left hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the
"SNMP Parameters" link to display the SNMP Access Parameters Menu.
Note: After you have configured SNMP Access Parameters, you will then be
able to manage the MPC's User Directory, control power and reboot switching
and display unit status via SNMP, as described in Section 13.
The SNMP Access Parameters Menu allows the following parameters to be defined:
• Enable: Enables/disables SNMP Polling. (Default = Off.)
Note: This item only applies to external SNMP polling of the MPC; it does not
effect the ability of the MPC to send SNMP traps.
• Version: This parameter determines which SNMP Version the MPC will respond to.
For example, if this item is set to V3, then clients who attempt to contact the MPC
using SNMPv2 will not be allowed to connect. (Default = V1/V2 Only.)
• Read Only: Enables/Disables the "Read Only Mode", which controls the ability to
access configuration functions and invoke switching commands. When Enabled
("Yes"), you will not be able to change configuration parameters or invoke other
commands when you contact the MPC via SNMP. (Default = No.)
Note: In order to define user names for the MPC via your SNMP client, the
Read Only feature must be disabled. When the Read Only feature is enabled,
you will not be able to issue configuration commands to the MPC unit via SNMP.
• Authentication / Privacy: Configures the Authentication and Privacy features
for SNMPv3 communication. The Authentication / Privacy parameter offers two
options, which function as follows:
1. Auth/noPriv: An SNMPv3 username and password will be required at log in,
but encryption will not be used. (Default Setting.)
2. Auth/Priv: An SNMPv3 username and password will be required at log in, and
all messages will be sent using encryption.
Notes:
• The Authentication / Privacy item is not available when the Version parameter
is set to V1/V2.
• If the Version Parameter is set to V1/V2/V3 (all) and Authentication / Privacy
parameter is set to "Auth/Priv", then only V3 data will be encrypted.
• The MPC supports DES encryption, but does not currently support the AES
protocol.
• The MPC does not support "noAuth/noPriv" for SNMPv3 communication.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
• SNMPv3 User Name: Sets the User Name for SNMPv3. Note that this option is
not available when the Version parameter is set to V1/V2. (Default = undefined.)
• SNMPv3 Password: Sets the password for SNMPv3. Note that this option is not
available when the Version parameter is set to V1/V2. (Default = undefined.)
• SNMPv3 Password Confirm: This prompt is used to confirm the SNMPv3
password that was entered at the prompt above. Note that this option is not
available when the Version parameter is set to V1/V2. (Default = undefined.)
• Authentication Protocol: This parameter determines which authentication protocol
will be used. The MPC supports both MD5 and SHA1 authentication.
(Default = MD5.)
Notes:
• The Authentication Protocol that is selected for the MPC must match the
protocol that your SNMP client will use when querying the MPC unit.
• The Authentication Protocol option is not available when the Version
parameter is set to V1/V2
• SNMP Contact: (Default = undefined.)
• SNMP Location: (Default = undefined.)
• SNMP Community: Note that this parameter is not available when the SNMP
Version is set to V3. (Default = Public.)
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.9.7. SNMP Trap Parameters
These menus are used to select parameters that will be used when SNMP traps are
sent. For more information on SNMP Traps, please refer to Section 12. To define or
change SNMP Trap parameters, proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Type /Nand press [Enter] to display the Network Parameters
Menu (Figure 5.17.) At the Network Parameters Menu, type 26and press [Enter] to
display the SNMP Trap Parameters Menu.
• Web Browser Interface: Place the cursor over the "Network Configuration" link
on the left hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the
"SNMP Traps" link to display the SNMP Trap Parameters Menu.
Both the Text Interface and Web Browser Interface allow the following parameters to be
defined:
• SNMP Manager 1: The IP Address for the first SNMP Manager. For more
information, please refer to Section 12. (Default = Undefined.)
Note: In order to enable the SNMP Trap feature, you must define at least one
SNMP Manager.
• SNMP Manager 2: (Default = Undefined.)
• Trap Community: (Default = Public.)
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.9.8. LDAP Parameters
The MPC supports LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol,) which allows
authentication via the "Active Directory" network Directory Service. When LDAP is
enabled and properly configured, command access rights can be granted to new users
without the need to define individual new accounts at each MPC unit, and existing users
can also be removed without the need to delete the account from each MPC unit.
This type of authentication also allows administrators to assign users to LDAP groups,
and then specify which plugs the members of each group will be allowed to control at
each MPC unit.
In order to apply the LDAP feature, you must first define User Names and associated
Passwords and group membership via your LDAP server, and then access the MPC
command mode to enable and configure the LDAP settings and define port access
rights and command access rights for each group that you have specified at the LDAP
server.
To access the LDAP Parameters menu, login to MPC command mode using a password
that permits Administrator Level commands and then proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Type /Nand press [Enter] to display the Network Parameters
Menu (Figure 5.17.) At the Network Parameters Menu, type 27and press [Enter] to
display the LDAP Parameters Menu.
• Web Browser Interface: Place the cursor over the "Network Configuration" link on
the left hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the "LDAP
Parameters" link to display the LDAP Parameters Menu.
Notes:
• Plug access rights are not defined at the LDAP server. They are defined via
the LDAP Group configuration menu on each MPC unit and are specific to
that MPC unit alone.
• When LDAP is enabled and properly configured, LDAP authentication will
supersede any passwords and access rights that have been defined via the
MPC user directory.
• If no LDAP groups are defined on a given MPC unit, then access rights will
be determined as specified by the "default" LDAP group.
• The "default" LDAP group cannot be deleted.
The LDAP Parameters Menu allows you to define the following parameters:
• Enable: Enables/disables LDAP authentication. (Default = Off.)
• Primary Host: Defines the IP address or domain name (up to 64 characters) for
the primary LDAP server. (Default = undefined.)
• Secondary Host: Defines the IP address or domain name (up to 64 characters) for
the secondary (fallback) LDAP server. (Default = undefined.)
• LDAP Port: Defines the port that will be used to communicate with the LDAP
server. (Default = 389.)
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
• TLS/SSL: Enables/Disables TLS/SSL encryption. Note that when TLS/SSL
encryption is enabled, the LDAP Port should be set to 636. (Default = Off.)
• Bind Type: Sets the LDAP bind request password type. Note that in the Text
Interface, when the Bind Type is set to "Kerberos" LDAP menu will include an
additional prompt (item 14) that is used to select Kerberos parameters as described
in Section 5.9.8.5. In the Web Interface, the button which is used to access the
Kerberos Parameters menu is located at the bottom of the LDAP Parameters Menu.
(Default = Simple.)
• Search Bind DN: Selects the user name who is allowed to search the LDAP
directory. (Default = undefined.)
• Search Bind Password: Sets the Password for the user who is allowed to search
the LDAP directory. (Default = undefined.)
• User Search Base DN: Sets the directory location for user searches.
(Default = undefined.)
• User Search Filter: Selects the attribute that lists the user name. Note that this
attribute should always end with "=%S" (no quotes.) (Default = undefined.)
• Group Membership Attribute: Selects the attribute that list group membership(s).
(Default = undefined.)
• Group Membership Value Type: (Default = DN.)
• Fallback: Enables/Disables the LDAP fallback feature. When enabled, the MPC
will revert to it's own internal user directory (see Section 5.5) if no defined users are
found via the LDAP server. In this case, port access rights will then be granted as
specified in the default LDAP group. (Default = Off.)
• LDAP Group Setup: Provides access to a submenu, which is used to define LDAP
Groups as described in the Sections 5.9.8.1 through 5.9.8.4.
• Kerberos Setup: Provides access to the Kerberos Setup menu as described in
Section 5.9.8.5. When the Bind Type parameter is set to "Kerberos", the Kerberos
Setup menu is used to select Kerberos parameters. Note that in the Text Interface,
the link to the Kerberos Setup menu will not be displayed unless the Bind Type has
been set to Kerberos.
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.9.8.1. Adding LDAP Groups
Once you have defined several users and passwords via your LDAP server, and
assigned those users to LDAP Groups, you must then grant command and port access
rights to each LDAP Group at each individual MPC unit. To add LDAP groups to your
MPC unit, log in to the command mode using a password that permits access to
Administrator Level commands, and then proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Type /Nand press [Enter] to display the Network Parameters
Menu (Figure 5.17.) At the Network Parameters Menu, type 27and press [Enter] to
display the LDAP parameters menu, then type 13and press [Enter] to display the
LDAP Group Menu. At the LDAP Group Menu, type 2and press [Enter] to display
the Add LDAP Group Menu.
• Web Browser Interface: Access the LDAP Parameters Menu as described in
Section 5.9.8. At the LDAP Parameters Menu, click on the LDAP Group Setup
button to display the LDAP Group Setup Menu, then click the Add LDAP Group link
to display the Add LDAP Group Menu.
The Add LDAP Group menu allows the following parameters to be defined:
• Group Name: Note that this name must match the LDAP Group names that you
have assigned to users at your LDAP server. (Default = undefined.)
• Access Level: Sets the command access level to either Administrator, SuperUser,
User or ViewOnly. For more information on Access Levels, please refer to
Section 5.4.1. (Default = User.)
• Port Access: When the MPC's AUX Ports and/or Remote Port have been
reconfigured for use as standard serial ports, this item can be used to enable/
disable user access to these ports. (Default = All Ports Off.)
• Plug Access: This item is used to determine which plugs members of this group
will be allowed to control. (Default = All Plugs Off.)
Notes:
• Web Browser Interface: When granting access to plugs on optional AUX
units, via the Web Browser interface, select the desired plugs from the
"Configure Plug Access" drop down menu.
• Text Interface: When granting access to plugs on AUX units via the Text
Interface, proceed as follows:
1. From the Add LDAP Group menu, type 3and press [Enter] to display the
Plug Access menu. Select plugs for your local MPC unit as you normally
would, and then press [Enter] to return to the Add LDAP Group menu.
2. To grant access to plugs on AUX units, type 3and press [Enter] again to
return to the Plug Access menu, and then type >(greater than symbol)
and press [Enter] to scroll to the desired AUX MPC unit. When the
desired AUX unit is displayed, select plugs for the AUX unit, and then
press [Enter] to return to the Add LDAP Group Menu.
3. Repeat Step 2 above to grant access to plugs on additional AUX units.
4. When you have finished granting Plug Access rights to this LDAP group,
make certain to press [Esc] several times until the "Saving Configuration"
message is displayed and the unit returns to the MPC command prompt.
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
• Plug Group Access: This item is used to determine which plug groups the
members of this LDAP Group will be allowed to control. (Default = undefined.)
• Service Access: This item determines how members of this LDAP Group will be
allowed to access command mode. The Service Access parameter is used to allow
members of this LDAP group to access command mode via Serial Port or Telnet/
SSH or any combination thereof. (Default = Serial Port = On, Telnet/SSH = On.)
• Current/Power Metering: Determines whether or not members of this LDAP Group
will be allowed to view current, voltage and temperature readings from the
MPC unit.
Note: After you have finished defining LDAP Group parameters, make certain
to save the changes before proceeding. In the Web Browser Interface, click on
the "Add LDAP Group" button to save parameters; in the Text Interface, press
the [Esc] key several times until the MPC displays the "Saving Configuration"
message.
5.9.8.2 Viewing LDAP Groups
If you want to examine an existing LDAP group definition, the "View LDAP Groups"
function can be used to review the group's parameters and Plug Access Settings. To
view an existing LDAP group on your MPC unit, proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Type /Nand press [Enter] to display the Network Parameters
Menu (Figure 5.17.) At the Network Parameters Menu, type 27and press [Enter]
to display the LDAP Parameters Menu, then type 13and press [Enter] to display
the LDAP Group Menu, then type 1and press [Enter]. The MPC will prompt you to
select the desired group; key in the name of the group and press [Enter], the MPC
will display the View LDAP Group screen.
• Web Browser Interface: Access the LDAP Parameters Menu as described in
Section 5.9.8. At the LDAP Parameters Menu, click on the LDAP Group Setup
button to display the LDAP Group Setup Menu, then click the View/Modify LDAP
Group link to display the Choose LDAP Group Menu; use the drop down menu to
select the desired group, select View LDAP Group and then click the Choose LDAP
Group button.
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.9.8.3. Modifying LDAP Groups
If you want to modify an existing LDAP Group in order to change parameters or plug
access rights, the "Modify LDAP Group" function can be used to reconfigure group
parameters. To Modify an existing LDAP Group, access the MPC command mode using
a password that permits access to Administrator Level commands, and then proceed as
follows:
• Text Interface: Type /Nand press [Enter] to display the Network Parameters
Menu (Figure 5.17.) At the Network Parameters Menu, type 27and press [Enter]
to display the LDAP Parameters Menu, then type 13and press [Enter] to display
the LDAP Group Menu, then type 3and press [Enter]. The MPC will prompt you to
select the desired group; key in the name of the group and press [Enter], the MPC
will display the Modify LDAP Group screen.
• Web Browser Interface: Access the LDAP Parameters Menu as described in
Section 5.9.8. At the LDAP Parameters Menu, click on the LDAP Group Setup
button to display the LDAP Group Setup Menu, then click the View/Modify LDAP
Group link to display the Choose LDAP Group menu; use the drop down menu
to select the desired group, select Modify LDAP Group and then click the Choose
LDAP Group button.
Once you have accessed the Modify LDAP Group menu, use the menu options to
redefine parameters in the same manner that is used for the Add LDAP Group menu, as
discussed in Section 5.9.8.1.
Note: After you have finished modifying LDAP Group parameters, make certain
to save the changes before proceeding. In the Web Browser Interface, click on
the "Modify LDAP Group" button to save parameters; in the Text Interface, press
the [Esc] key several times until the MPC displays the "Saving Configuration"
message and the cursor returns to the command prompt.
5.9.8.4. Deleting LDAP Groups
The Delete LDAP Group function is used to delete LDAP Groups that are no longer in
use. To delete an existing LDAP Group, proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Type /Nand press [Enter] to display the Network Parameters
Menu (Figure 5.17.) At the Network Parameters Menu, type 27and press [Enter]
to display the LDAP Parameters Menu, then type 13and press [Enter] to display
the LDAP Group Menu, then type 4and press [Enter]. The MPC will prompt you to
select the desired group; key in the name of the group and press [Enter], the MPC
will delete the specified LDAP Group immediately, without further prompting.
• Web Browser Interface: Access the LDAP Parameters Menu as described in
Section 5.9.8. At the LDAP Parameters Menu, click on the LDAP Group Setup
button to display the LDAP Group Setup Menu, then click the View/Modify LDAP
Group link to display the Choose LDAP Group Menu; use the drop down menu
to select the desired group, select Delete LDAP Group and then click the Choose
LDAP Group button to display the Delete LDAP Group Menu. If the Delete LDAP
Group Menu shows the desired group, then click the Delete LDAP Group button to
immediately delete the group.
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.9.8.5. LDAP Kerberos Set Up
Kerberos is a network authentication protocol, which provides a secure means of
identity verification for users who are communicating via a non-secure network.
To access the LDAP Kerberos Set Up menu, access the command mode using a
password that permits access to Administrator Level commands and then proceed as
follows:
• Text Interface: Type /Nand press [Enter] to display the Network Parameters
Menu (Figure 5.17.) At the Network Parameters Menu, type 27and press [Enter]
to display the LDAP Parameters Menu. At the LDAP Parameters Menu, type 5and
press [Enter] and then use the resulting submenu to set the Bind Type to Kerberos.
Next, return to the LDAP Parameters Menu. Note that the LDAP Parameters Menu
now includes a prompt which is used to select Kerberos parameters. Type 14and
press [Enter] to display the Kerberos Set Up Menu.
• Web Browser Interface: Access the LDAP Parameters Menu as described in
Section 5.9.8. At the LDAP Parameters Menu, click on the LDAP Kerberos Setup
button to display the LDAP Kerberos Setup menu.
The LDAP Kerberos Setup menu allows you to define the following parameters:
• Port: (Default = 88.)
• Realm: (Default = Undefined.)
• Key Distribution Centers (KDC1 through KDC5): (Default = Undefined.)
• Domain Realms 1 through 5: (Default = Undefined.)
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.9.9. TACACS Parameters
To access the TACACS Configuration Menus, proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Type /Nand press [Enter] to access the Network Configuration
Menu. From the Network Configuration Menu, type 28and press [Enter] to display
the TACACS Configuration Menu.
• Web Browser Interface: Place the cursor over the "Network Configuration" link
on the left hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the
"TACACS Parameters" link to display the TACACS Configuration Menu.
The TACACS Configuration Menus offer the following options:
• Enable: Enables/disables the TACACS feature at the Network Port. (Default = Off.)
• Primary Address: Defines the IP address or domain name (up to 64 characters)
for your primary TACACS server. (Default = undefined.)
• Secondary Address: Defines the IP address or domain name (up to 64 characters)
for your secondary, fallback TACACS server (if present.) (Default = undefined.)
• Secret Word: Defines the shared TACACS Secret Word for both TACACS servers.
(Default = undefined.)
• Fallback Timer: Determines how long the MPC will continue to attempt to contact
the primary TACACS Server before falling back to the secondary TACACS Server.
(Default = 15 Seconds.)
• Fallback Local: Determines whether or not the MPC will fallback to its own
password/username directory when an authentication attempt fails. When enabled,
the MPC will first attempt to authenticate the password by checking the TACACS
Server; if this fails, the MPC will then attempt to authenticate the password by
checking its own internal username directory. (Default = Off.)
• Authentication Port: The port number for the TACACS function. (Default = 49.)
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.9.10. RADIUS Parameters
To access the RADIUS Configuration Menus, proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Type /Nand press [Enter] to access the Network Configuration
Menu. From the Network Configuration Menu, type 29and press [Enter] to display
the RADIUS Configuration Menu.
• Web Browser Interface: Place the cursor over the "Network Configuration" link
on the left hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the
"RADIUS Parameters" link to display the RADIUS Configuration Menu.
The RADIUS Configuration Menus offer the following options:
• Enable: Enables/disables the RADIUS feature at the Network Port. (Default = Off.)
• Primary Address Defines the IP address or domain name (up to 64 characters
long) for your primary RADIUS server. (Default = undefined.)
• Primary Secret Word: Defines the RADIUS Secret Word for the primary RADIUS
server. (Default = undefined.)
• Secondary Address: Defines the IP address or domain name (up to 64 characters
long) for your secondary, fallback RADIUS server (if present.)
(Default = undefined.)
• Secondary Secret Word: Defines the RADIUS Secret Word for the secondary
RADIUS server. (Default = undefined.)
• Fallback Timer: Determines how long the MPC will continue to attempt to contact
the primary RADIUS Server before falling back to the secondary RADIUS Server.
(Default = 3 Seconds.)
• Fallback Local: Determines whether or not the MPC will fallback to its own
password/username directory when an authentication attempt fails. When enabled,
the MPC will first attempt to authenticate the password by checking the RADIUS
Server; if this fails, the MPC will then attempt to authenticate the password by
checking its own internal username directory. This parameter offers three options:
◆
Off: Fallback Local is disabled (Default.)
◆
On (All Failures): Fallback Local is enabled, and the unit will fallback to it's
own internal user directory when it cannot contact the Radius Server, or when a
password or username does not match the Radius Server.
◆
On (Transport Failure): Fallback Local is enabled, but the unit will only fallback
to it's own internal user directory when it cannot contact the Radius Server.
• Authentication Port: The Authentication Port number for the RADIUS function.
(Default = 1812.)
• Accounting Port: The Accounting Port number for the RADIUS function.
(Default = 1813.)
• Debug: (Text Interface Only) When enabled, the MPC will put RADIUS debug
information into Syslog. (Default = Off.)
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.9.10.1.
Dictionary Support for RADIUS
The RADIUS dictionary file can allow you to define a user and assign command access
rights and plug access rights from a central location. The RADIUS dictionary file,
"dictionary.wti" is included on the CDROM along with this user's guide. To install the
dictionary file on your RADIUS server, please refer to the documentation provided with
your server; some servers will require the dictionary file to reside in a specific directory
location, others will require the dictionary file to be appended to an existing RADIUS
dictionary file.
The WTI RADIUS dictionary file provides the following commands:
• WTI-Super- Sets the command access level for the user. This command provides
the following arguments:
0= ViewOnly
1= User
2= SuperUser
3= Administrator
For example, in order to set command access level to "SuperUser", the command
line would be:
WTI-Super="2"
• WTI-Plug-Access- Determines which plug(s) the user will be allowed to access.
This command provides an argument that consists of a four character string, with
one character for each the MPC's switched outlets. The following options are
available for each switched plug:
0= Off (Deny Access)
1= On (Allow Access)
For example, to allow access to Plugs 2 and 4, the command line would be:
WTI-Plug-Access="0101"
• WTI-Group-Access- Determines which plug group(s) the user will be allowed
to access. The argument for this command includes a character for each, defined
plug group, with the first character in the string being used to represent the first
plug group defined, and the last character in the string representing the last plug
group defined. The following options are available for each plug group:
0= Off (Deny Access)
1= On (Allow Access)
For example, to allow access to the first three defined plug groups out of a total of
six defined plug groups, the command line would be:
WTI-Group-Access="111000"
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
Example:
The following command could be used to set the command access level to "User", allow
access to Serial Ports 1, 3, 5 and 7 and Plugs 1 and 2, and also allow access to the first
two of five defined plug groups:
tom Auth-Type:=Local, User-Password=="tom1"
Login-Service=Telnet,
Login-TCP-Port=Telnet,
User-Name="HARRY-tom",
WTI-Super="1",
WTI-Plug-Access="1100",
WTI-Group-Access="11000",
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.9.11. Email Message Parameters
The Email Parameters menu is used to define parameters for email messages that
the MPC can send to notify you when an alarm is triggered. To define email message
parameters, access the MPC Command Mode using a password that permits access to
Administrator Level commands and then proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Type /Nand press [Enter] to access the Network Configuration
Menu. From the Network Configuration Menu, type 32and press [Enter] to display
the Email Configuration Menu.
• Web Browser Interface: Place the cursor over the "Network Configuration" link on
the left hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the "Email
Messages" link to display the Email Configuration Menu.
The Email Configuration menu offers the following options:
• Enable: Enables/Disables the Email Messaging feature. When disabled, the MPC
will not be able to send email messages when an alarm is generated.
(Default = On.)
• SMTP Server: This prompt is used to define the address of your SMTP Email
server. (Default = undefined.)
• Port Number: Selects the TCP/IP port number that will be used for email
connections. (Default = 25.)
• Domain: The domain name for your email server. (Default = undefined.)
Note: In order to use domain names, you must first define Domain Name
Server parameters as described in Section 5.9.5.
• User Name: The User Name that will be entered when logging into your email
server. (Default = undefined.)
• Password: The password that will be used when logging into your email server.
(Default = undefined.)
• Auth Type: The Authentication type; the MPC allows you to select None, Plain,
Login, or CRAM-MD5 Authentication. (Default = Plain.)
• From Name: The name that will appear in the "From" field in email sent by the
MPC. (Default = undefined.)
• From Address: The email address that will appear in the "From" field in email sent
by the MPC. (Default = undefined.)
• To Address: The address(es) that will receive email messages generated by the
MPC. Note that up to three "To" addresses may be defined, and that when Alarm
Configuration parameters are selected as described in Section 7, you may then
designate one, two or all three of these addresses as recipients for email messages
that are generated by the alarms. (Default = undefined.)
• Send Test Email: Sends a test email, using the parameters that are currently
defined for the Email configuration menu.
Note: The "Send Test Email" function is only available via the Text Interface.
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Configuration
5.10. Save User Selected Parameters
It is strongly recommended to save all user-defined parameters to an ASCII file as
described in Section 15. This will allow quick recovery in the event of accidental
deletion or reconfiguration of port parameters.
When changing configuration parameters via the Text Interface, make certain that the
MPC has saved the newly defined parameters before exiting from command mode.
To save parameters, press the [Esc] key several times until you have exited from all
configuration menus and the MPC displays the "Saving Configuration" menu and the
cursor returns to the command prompt. If newly defined configuration parameters
are not saved prior to exiting from command mode, then the MPC will revert to the
previously saved configuration after you exit from command mode.
5.10.1. Restore Configuration
If you make a mistake while configuring the MPC unit, and wish to return to the
previously saved parameters, the Text Interface's "Reboot System" command (/I) offers
the option to reinitialize the unit using previously backed up parameters. This allows
you to reset the unit to previously saved parameters, even after you have changed
parameters and saved them.
Notes:
• The MPC will automatically backup saved parameters once a day, shortly
after Midnight. This configuration backup file will contain only the most
recently saved MPC parameters, and will be overwritten by the next night's
daily backup.
• When the /I command is invoked, a submenu will be displayed which
offers several Reboot options. Options 5 and 6 are used to restore the
configuration backup file. The dates shown next to options 5 and 6 indicate
the date that you last changed and saved unit parameters.
• If the daily automatic configuration backup has been triggered since the
configuration error was made, and the previously saved configuration has
been overwritten by newer, incorrect parameters, then this function will not
be able to restore the previously saved (correct) parameters.
To restore the previously saved configuration, proceed as follows:
1. Access command move via the Text Interface, using a username/password that
permits access to Administrator level commands (see Section 5.1.1.)
2. At the MPC command prompt, type /Iand press [Enter]. The MPC will display a
submenu that offers several different reboot options.
3. At the submenu, you may choose either Item 5 (Reboot & Restore Last Known
Working Configuration) or Item 6 (Restore Last Known Working Configuration.) Key
in the number for the desired option, and then press [Enter].
Note: When invoking the /I command to restore configuration parameters,
Item 5 is recommended.
4. The MPC will reboot and previously saved parameters will be restored.
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Reboot Options
In addition to performing reboot cycles in response to commands, the MPC can also be
configured to automatically reboot outlets when an attached device does not respond
to a Ping command (Ping-No-Answer Reboot) or according to a user defined schedule
(Scheduled Reboot.)
• Ping-No-Answer Reboot: When the Ping-No-Answer feature is enabled, the MPC
will Ping a user selected IP address at regular intervals. If the IP address does not
respond to the Ping command, the MPC will reboot one or more user selected
outlet(s). Typically, this feature is used to reboot devices when they cease to
respond to the Ping command.
• Scheduled Reboot: A scheduled reboot is used to initiate a reboot cycle at a user
selected time and day of the week. When properly configured and enabled, the
MPC will reboot one or more outlets on a daily or weekly basis. The Scheduled
Reboot feature can also be used to switch outlet(s) Off at a user selected time, and
then switch them back On again at a later, user selected time.
This section describes the procedure for configuring and enabling Ping-No-Answer
Reboots and Scheduled Reboots.
Note: When defining parameters via the Text Interface, make certain to press
the [Esc] key to completely exit from the configuration menus and save newly
defined parameters. When parameters are defined via the Text Interface, newly
defined parameters will not be saved until the "Saving Configuration" message is
displayed.
6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reboot Options
6.1. Ping-No-Answer Reboot
A Ping-No-Answer Reboot can be used to reboot one or more outlets when an attached
device does not respond to a Ping Command. In addition, the Ping-No-Answer Reboot
feature can also be configured to send an email, Syslog Message or SNMP Trap to
notify you whenever a Ping-No-Answer Reboot occurs. Please refer to Section 7.6 for
instructions on setting up email alarm notification for Ping-No-Answer reboots.
To set up a Ping-No-Answer Reboot, access command mode using a password that
permits Administrator level commands and then proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Type /RBand press [Enter]. The Reboot Options Menu will be
displayed. At the Reboot Options menu, type 1and press [Enter] to display
the Ping-No-Answer Reboot Directory menu. From the Ping-No-Answer Reboot
Directory Menu, you can Add, Modify, View or Delete Ping-No-Answer Reboot
operations.
• Web Browser Interface: Place the cursor over the "Reboot Options" link on the
left hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the "Ping-
No-Answer Reboot" link. The Ping-No-Answer Reboot Configuration menu will be
displayed. From the Ping-No-Answer Reboot Configuration menu, you can Add,
Modify, View or Delete Ping-No-Answer Reboot operations.
6.1.1. Adding Ping-No-Answer Reboots
To add a Ping-No-Answer Reboot, access command mode using a password that
permits Administrator Level commands and then proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Access the Ping-No-Answer Reboot Directory menu as described in
Section 6.1, then type 2and press [Enter].
• Web Browser Interface: Access the Ping-No-Answer Reboot Configuration menu
as described in Section 6.1, then click on the Add Ping-No-Answer Reboot link.
Up to 54 Ping-No-Answer Reboots can be defined. The Add Ping-No-Answer menu is
used to define the following parameters for each new Ping-No-Answer Reboot:
• IP Address or Domain Name: The IP address or Domain Name for the device
that you wish to Ping. When the device at this address fails to respond to the Ping
command, the MPC will reboot the selected outlets. (Default = undefined.)
Note: In order to use Domain Names, you must first define DNS parameters as
described in Section 5.9.5.
• Ping Interval: Determines how often the Ping command will be sent to the
selected IP Address. The Ping Interval can be any whole number, from 1 to 2,800
minutes. (Default = 15 Minutes.)
• Interval After Failed Ping: Determines how often the Ping command will be sent
after a previous Ping command receives no response. (Default = 1 Minute.)
• Ping Delay After Reboot: Determines how long the MPC will wait to send
additional Ping commands, after a Ping-No-Answer Reboot has been initiated.
Typically, this option is used to allow time for a device to fully "wake up" after a
Ping-No-Answer Reboot before attempting to Ping the device again.
(Default = 15 Minutes.)
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reboot Options
• Consecutive Failures: Determines how many consecutive failures of the Ping
command must be detected in order to initiate a Ping-No-Answer Reboot. For
example, if this value is set to "3", then after three consecutive Ping failures, a
Ping-No-Answer Reboot will be performed. (Default = 3.)
• Reboot: Enables/Disables the Ping-No-Answer Reboot function for the specified IP
address. When this item is disabled, the MPC will not reboot the specified outlet(s)
when a Ping-No-Answer is detected. However, the MPC will continue to notify you
via Email, Syslog Message and/or SNMP Trap, providing that parameters for these
functions have been defined as described in Section 5.9 and email notification
for the Ping-No-Answer function has been enabled as described in Section 7.6.
(Default = No.)
Notes:
• In order for Email/Text Message Notification to function, you must first define
Email/Text Message parameters as described in Section 5.9.11.
• In order for Syslog Message Notification to function, you must first define a
Syslog Address as described in Section 5.9.2.
• In order for SNMP Trap Notification to function, you must first define SNMP
parameters as described in Section 5.9.7.
• Reboot Action: Determines how the MPC will react when the IP address fails to
respond to a ping. The MPC can either continuously reboot the specified outlet(s)
and send notification until the IP address responds and the Ping-No-Answer Reboot
is cleared (Continuous Alarm/Reboot), or the MPC can reboot the specified outlet(s)
and send notification only once each time the Ping-No-Answer Reboot is initially
triggered (Single Alarm/Reboot.) (Default = Continuous Alarm/Reboot.)
• Plug Access: Determines which outlet(s) will be rebooted when the IP address for
this Ping-No-Answer operation does not respond to a Ping command. Note that
in the Text Interface, Plug Access is defined via a separate submenu; in the Web
Browser Interface, Plug Access is defined via a drop down menu, accessed by
clicking on the "plus" sign in the "Configure Plug Access" field. If your installation
includes optional AUX units, please refer to Section 6.1.1.1 for instructions
regarding granting access to plugs on AUX units. (Default = undefined.)
• Plug Group Access: Determines which Plug Group(s) the Ping-No-Answer
Reboot for this IP Address will be applied to. Note that in the Text Interface, Plug
Group Access is defined via a separate submenu; in the Web Browser Interface,
Plug Group Access is defined via a drop down menu, which may be accessed by
clicking on the "plus" sign. (Default = undefined.)
• Ping Test: (Text Interface Only) Sends a test Ping command to the IP Address
defined for this Ping-No-Answer Reboot.
Note: After you have finished defining or editing Ping-No-Answer Reboot
parameters, make certain to save the changes before proceeding. In the
Web Browser Interface, click on the "Add Ping No Answer" button to save
parameters; in the Text Interface, press the [Esc] key several times until the
MPC displays the "Saving Configuration" message and the cursor returns to the
command prompt.
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reboot Options
6.1.1.1. Granting Access to Plugs on AUX Units
Web Browser Interface
To grant access to plugs on AUX units, simply select the desired plugs from the
"Configure Plug Access" drop down menu and then click on the "Add Ping No Answer"
button.
Text Interface
When Plug Access for a Ping No Answer Reboot is defined via the Text Interface, the
following procedure is used to grant access to plugs on optional AUX/Remote units:
1. From the Add Ping-No-Answer menu, type 7and press [Enter] to display the Plug
Access menu. At the Plug Access menu, select plugs for your local MPC unit as
you normally would, and when finished, press [Enter] to return to the Add Ping No
Answer menu.
2. To grant access to plugs on AUX units, type 7and press [Enter] again to return to
the Plug Access menu, and then type >(greater than symbol) and press [Enter] to
scroll to the desired AUX MPC unit. When the desired AUX unit is displayed, select
plugs for the AUX unit as you normally would, and then press [Enter] to return to
the Add Ping No Answer Menu.
Note: The first line of the Plug Access menu will indicate the name of the AUX
or Local MPC unit that is currently selected.
3. Repeat Step 2 above to grant access to plugs on additional AUX units.
4. When you have finished granting Plug Access rights to this Ping No Answer
Reboot, define any other desired parameters required, and then make certain to
press [Esc] several times until the "Saving Configuration" message is displayed and
the unit returns to the MPC command prompt.
6.1.2. Viewing Ping-No-Answer Reboot Profiles
After you have defined one or more Ping-No-Answer Reboot profiles, you can review the
parameters selected for each profile using the View Ping-No-Answer feature. To view
the configuration of an existing Ping-No-Answer profile, access command mode using a
password that allows Administrator level commands and then proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Access the Ping-No-Answer Reboot Directory menu as described
in Section 6.1, then type 1and press [Enter]. The MPC will display a menu which
shows all defined Ping-No-Answer Profiles, listed by their IP Addresses. Key in the
IP Address for the desired profile, and then press [Enter] to display the View Ping-
No-Answer Profile menu.
• Web Interface: Access the Ping-No-Answer Reboot Configuration menu as
described in Section 6.1, then click on the View/Modify Ping-No-Answer Reboot
link. The MPC will display a menu that allows you to select the desired Ping-No-
Answer Reboot and directory function. Select the "View Profile" button, and then
click on the down arrow, scroll to the desired Ping-No-Answer Reboot Profile, select
the profile, and then click "Choose Ping-No-Answer Profile."
The MPC will display a screen which lists all defined parameters for the selected
Ping-No-Answer Reboot Profile.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reboot Options
6.1.3. Modifying Ping-No-Answer Reboot Profiles
After you have defined a Ping-No-Answer profile, you can modify the configuration of
the profile using the Modify Ping-No-Answer feature. To modify the configuration of an
existing Ping-No-Answer profile, access the command mode using a password that
allows Administrator level commands and then proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Access the Ping-No-Answer Reboot Directory menu as described
in Section 6.1, then type 3and press [Enter]. The MPC will display a menu which
shows all defined Ping-No-Answer Profiles, listed by their IP Addresses. Key in
the IP Address for the desired profile, and then press [Enter] to display the Modify
Ping-No-Answer Profile menu.
• Web Interface: Access the Ping-No-Answer Reboot Configuration menu as
described in Section 6.1, then click on the View/Modify Ping-No-Answer Reboot
link. The MPC will display a menu that allows you to select the desired Ping-No-
Answer Reboot and directory function. Select the "Modify Profile" button, and then
click on the down arrow, scroll to the desired Ping-No-Answer Reboot Profile, select
the profile, and then click "Choose Ping-No-Answer Profile."
The MPC will display a screen which allows you to modify parameters for the selected
Ping-No-Answer Reboot Profile. Note that this screen functions identically to the Add
Ping-No-Answer Reboot menu, as discussed in Section 6.1.1.
Note: After you have finished defining or editing Ping-No-Answer Reboot
parameters, make certain to save the changes before proceeding. In the
Web Browser Interface, click on the "Change Ping No Answer" button to save
parameters; in the Text Interface, press the [Esc] key several times until the
MPC displays the "Saving Configuration" message and the cursor returns to the
command prompt.
6.1.4. Deleting Ping-No-Answer Reboot Profiles
After you have defined one or more Ping-No-Answer profiles, you can delete profiles
that are no longer needed using the Delete Ping-No-Answer feature. To delete an
existing Ping-No-Answer profile, access the command mode using a password that
allows Administrator level commands and then proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Access the Ping-No-Answer Reboot Directory menu as described
in Section 6.1, then type 4and press [Enter]. The MPC will display a menu which
shows all defined Ping-No-Answer Profiles, listed by their IP Addresses. Key in the
IP Address for the desired profile, and then press [Enter] to delete the selected
profile. The selected profile will be deleted immediately, with no further prompting.
• Web Interface: Access the Ping-No-Answer Reboot Configuration menu as
described in Section 6.1, then click on the View/Modify Ping-No-Answer Reboot
link. The MPC will display a menu that allows you to select the desired Ping-No-
Answer profile and directory function. Select the "Delete Profile" button, and then
click on the down arrow, scroll to the desired Ping-No-Answer Reboot Profile, select
the profile, and then click "Choose Ping-No-Answer Profile." The MPC will display
a screen which lists all defined parameters for the selected profile. To confirm
deletion, Click on the "Delete Profile" button.
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reboot Options
6.2. Scheduled Reboot
The Scheduled Reboot feature can be used to reboot one or more outlets according to
a user-defined schedule, or to automatically turn outlets Off and then On according to a
user defined schedule.
To configure a Scheduled Reboot, access command mode using a password that
permits access to Administrator level commands and then proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Type /RBand press [Enter]. The Reboot Options Menu will be
displayed. At the Reboot Options menu, type 2and press [Enter] to display the
Scheduled Reboot Directory menu. From the Scheduled Reboot Directory Menu,
you can Add, Modify, View or Delete Scheduled Reboots as described in the
Sections that follow.
• Web Browser Interface: Place the cursor over the "Reboot Options" link on the left
hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the "Scheduled
Reboot" link to display the Scheduled Reboot Configuration menu. From the
Scheduled Reboot Configuration menu, you can Add, Modify, View or Delete
Scheduled Reboots as described in the Sections that follow.
Note: After you have finished defining or editing Scheduled Reboot
parameters, make certain to save the changes before proceeding. In the
Web Browser Interface, click on the "Add Scheduled Reboot" button to save
parameters; in the Text Interface, press the [Esc] key several times until the
MPC displays the "Saving Configuration" message and the cursor returns to the
command prompt.
6.2.1. Adding Scheduled Reboots
To add a Scheduled Reboot, access command mode using a password that permits
Administrator Level commands and then proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Access the Scheduled Reboot Directory menu as described in
Section 6.2, then type 2and press [Enter] to display the Add Scheduled Reboot
Menu.
• Web Browser Interface: Access the Scheduled Reboot Configuration menu as
described in Section 6.2, then click on the Add Scheduled Reboot link to display
the Add Scheduled Reboot Menu.
The MPC allows up to 54 Scheduled Reboots to be defined.
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reboot Options
The Add Scheduled Reboot menu allows you to define the following parameters for
each new Scheduled Reboot:
• Scheduled Reboot Name: Assigns a name to this Scheduled Reboot.
(Default = undefined.)
• Plug Action: Determines whether the Scheduled Reboot will result in the outlet(s)
being switched Off, or cycled Off and then On again (Reboot.) Note that when "Off"
is selected, the "Day On" option and the "Time On" option can be used to select a
time and day when the outlet(s) will be switched back On again. (Default = Off.)
• Recurrence: Determines whether the Scheduled Reboot will be performed on a
Daily basis or a Weekly basis. (Default = Daily.)
• Day: Determines the day of the week that this Scheduled Reboot will occur on.
(Default = undefined.)
• Time: Determines the time of the day that this Scheduled Reboot will occur on.
(Default = 12:00.)
• Turn ON Day: When the "Action" parameter is set to "Off", this parameter can
be used to determine the day that the outlet(s) will be switched back On again.
(Default = undefined.)
• Turn ON Time: When the "Action" parameter has been set to "Off", this parameter
can be used to determine the time when the outlet(s) will be switched back On
again. (Default = 12:01.)
• Plug Access: Determines which outlet(s) this Scheduled Reboot action will be
applied to. In the Text Interface, outlets are selected by typing 9, pressing [Enter]
and then following the instructions in the resulting submenu. In the Web Browser
Interface, outlets are designated by clicking on the "plus" sign in the Plug Access
field, and then selecting the desired outlets from the drop down menu. If your
installation includes optional AUX units, please refer to Section 6.2.1.1 for additional
instructions regarding granting user account access to plugs on AUX units.
(Default = undefined.)
• Plug Group Access: Determines which Plug Group(s) this Scheduled Reboot
action will be applied to. Note that in the Text Interface, Plug Group Access is
defined via a separate submenu; in the Web Browser Interface, Plug Group Access
is defined via a drop down menu, which may be accessed by clicking on the "plus"
sign in the Plug Group Access field. (Default = undefined.)
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reboot Options
6.2.1.1. Granting Access to Plugs on AUX Units
Web Browser Interface
To grant access to plugs on AUX units, simply select the desired plugs from the
"Configure Plug Access" drop down menu and then click on the "Add Scheduled
Reboot" button.
Text Interface
When Plug Access for a Scheduled Reboot is defined via the Text Interface, the following
procedure is used to grant access to plugs on optional AUX/Remote units:
1. From the Add Scheduled Reboot menu, type 8and press [Enter] to display the
Plug Access menu. At the Plug Access menu, select plugs for your local MPC
unit as you normally would, and when finished, press [Enter] to return to the Add
Scheduled Reboot menu.
2. To grant access to plugs on AUX units, type 8and press [Enter] again to return to
the Plug Access menu, and then type >(greater than symbol) and press [Enter] to
scroll to the desired AUX MPC unit. When the desired AUX unit is displayed, select
plugs for the AUX unit as you normally would, and then press [Enter] to return to
the Add Scheduled Reboot Menu.
Note: The first line of the Plug Access menu will indicate the name of the AUX
or Local MPC unit that is currently selected.
3. Repeat Step 2 above to grant access to plugs on additional AUX units.
4. When you have finished granting Plug Access rights to this Scheduled Reboot,
define any other desired parameters required, and then make certain to press [Esc]
several times until the "Saving Configuration" message is displayed and the unit
returns to the MPC command prompt.
6.2.2. Viewing Scheduled Reboot Actions
After you have defined one or more Scheduled Reboots, you can review the parameters
selected for each Reboot using the View Scheduled Reboot feature. To view the
configuration of an existing Scheduled Reboot, access the command mode using a
password that allows Administrator level commands and then proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Access the Scheduled Reboot Directory menu as described in
Section 6.2, then type 1and press [Enter]. The MPC will display a menu which
lists all defined Scheduled Reboots. Key in the name of the desired Scheduled
Reboot, and then press [Enter] to display the View Scheduled Reboot menu.
• Web Interface: Access the Scheduled Reboot Configuration menu as described
in Section 6.2, then click on the View/Modify Scheduled Reboot link. The MPC
will display a menu that allows you to select the desired Scheduled Reboot and
directory function. Select the "View Scheduled Reboot" button, and then click on
the down arrow, scroll to the desired Scheduled Reboot, select the reboot, and then
click the "Choose Scheduled Reboot" button.
The MPC will display a screen which lists all defined parameters for the selected
Scheduled Reboot action.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reboot Options
6.2.3. Modifying Scheduled Reboots
After you have defined a Scheduled Reboot, you can edit the configuration of the
Reboot action using the Modify Scheduled Reboot feature. To modify the configuration
of an existing Scheduled Reboot action, access the command mode using a password
that allows Administrator level commands and then proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Access the Scheduled Reboot Directory menu as described in
Section 6.2, then type 3and press [Enter]. The MPC will display a menu which
lists all defined Scheduled Reboot actions. Key in the name of the desired
Scheduled Reboot action, and then press [Enter] to display the Modify Scheduled
Reboot menu.
• Web Interface: Access the Scheduled Reboot Configuration menu as described
in Section 6.2, then click on the View/Modify Scheduled Reboot link. The MPC
will display a menu that allows you to select the desired Scheduled Reboot action
and directory function. Select the "Modify Scheduled Reboot" button, and then
click on the down arrow, scroll to the desired Scheduled Reboot action, select the
Scheduled Reboot, and then click the "Choose Scheduled Reboot" button.
The MPC will display a screen which allows you to modify parameters for the selected
Scheduled Reboot action. Note that this screen functions identically to the Add
Scheduled Reboot menu, as discussed in Section 6.2.1.
6.2.4. Deleting Scheduled Reboots
After you have defined one or more Scheduled Reboot actions, you can delete Reboot
actions that are no longer needed using the Delete Scheduled Reboot feature. To
delete an existing Scheduled Reboot, access the command mode using a password
that allows Administrator level commands and then proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Access the Scheduled Reboot Directory menu as described in
Section 6.2, then type 4and press [Enter]. The MPC will display a menu which
lists all defined Scheduled Reboot actions. Key in the name of the desired reboot
action, and then press [Enter] to delete the selected Scheduled Reboot. The
selected Scheduled Reboot action will be deleted immediately, with no further
prompting.
• Web Interface: Access the Scheduled Reboot Configuration menu as described
in Section 6.2, then click on the View/Modify Scheduled Reboot link. The MPC will
display a menu that allows you to select the desired Scheduled Reboot action and
directory function. Select the "Delete Scheduled Reboot" button, and then click on
the down arrow, scroll to the desired Scheduled Reboot, select the Reboot, and
then click the "Choose Scheduled Reboot" button. The MPC will display a screen
which lists all defined parameters for the selected Scheduled Reboot. To confirm
deletion, Click on the "Delete Scheduled Reboot" button.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Alarm Configuration
When properly configured, the MPC can meter current, temperature and voltage
readings, and log this information for future review. In addition, the MPC can also
generate alarms when current or temperature readings exceed user-defined trigger
levels, when input voltage is lost or restored to the unit, when a circuit breaker is open,
when communication with the AUX units is disrupted, when a Ping-No-Answer condition
is detected, and when the Invalid Access Lockout feature is triggered.
When any of these conditions are detected, the MPC can send an "Alarm" to the proper
personnel via Email, Syslog Message or SNMP trap. If the user-defined trigger levels
for temperature and current load are exceeded, the MPC can also automatically shut
off power to non-essential devices ("Load Shedding") in order to decrease current load
and/or the amount of heat generated within the rack. After Load Shedding has taken
place, the MPC can then restore power to the non-essential devices when temperature
and/or current load drop to user-defined acceptable levels.
This section describes the procedure for setting up the MPC to send alarm messages
when any of these critical situations are detected. For instructions regarding
configuration of the Log function, please refer to Section 5.3.4.
Notes:
• In order to send alarm notification via email, email addresses and parameters
must first be defined as described in Section 5.9.11. Email alarm notification
will then be sent for all alarms that are enabled as described in this Section.
• In order to send alarm notification via Syslog Message, a Syslog address
must first be defined as described in Section 5.9.2. Once the Syslog address
has been defined, Syslog Messages will be sent for every alarm that is
discussed in this Section, providing that the Trigger Enable parameter for the
alarm has been set to "On."
• In order to send alarm notification via SNMP Trap, SNMP Trap parameters
must first be defined as described in Section 5.9.7. Once SNMP Trap
Parameters have been defined, SNMP Traps will be sent for every alarm that
is discussed in this Section, providing that the Trigger Enable parameter for
the alarm has been set to "On."
• When defining parameters via the Text Interface, make certain to press the
[Esc] key to completely exit from the configuration menu and save newly
defined parameters. When parameters are defined via the Text Interface,
newly defined parameters will not be saved until the "Saving Configuration"
message is displayed.
To configure the MPC's Alarm functions, access the command mode using a password
that allows Administrator level commands and then proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Type /ACand then press [Enter] to display the Alarm
Configuration Menu.
• Web Browser Interface: Click the "Alarm Configuration" link, located on the left
hand side of the screen to display the Alarm Configuration Menu.
7-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alarm Configuration
7.1. The Over Current Alarms
The Over Current Alarms are designed to inform you when current consumption
reaches or exceeds user-defined levels. Depending on the specific MPC model, MPC
units can have up to four Over Current Alarms (two sets of two alarms):
• The Over Current Line (Initial) Alarm
• The Over Current Line (Critical) Alarm
• The Over Current Branch (Initial) Alarm
• The Over Current Branch (Critical) Alarm
Notes:
• The Line Alarms are only included in MPC models that include two or more
power branches per input line.
• The parameters that are defined via the Over Current (Initial and Critical)
Alarm Configuration menus will be applied to both Over Current Line Alarms
and Over Current Branch Alarms.
• The MPC does not include separate configuration menus for the Line and
Branch Overcurrent Alarms. Parameters that are defined via the Over Current
Alarm configuration menus will be applied to both Branch and Line (if
present) Alarms.
The Line alarms monitor the load on the input line, and are only available on single input
units, whereas the Branch alarms monitor the load on each branch circuit breaker.
The Initial alarms are used to provide notification when the level of current consumption
reaches a point where you might want to investigate it, whereas the Critical alarms can
provide notification when the level of current consumption approaches the maximum
allowed level. The trigger levels for the Initial alarms are generally set lower than the
trigger levels for the Critical alarms.
If the user-defined trigger levels for current load are exceeded, the MPC can
automatically shut off power to non-essential devices ("Load Shedding") in order to
decrease current load. After Load Shedding has taken place, the MPC can also restore
power to the non-essential devices when current load drops to user-defined acceptable
levels. For more information on Load Shedding, please refer to Section 7.1.1.
The Load Shedding feature can be configured to react in one manner when an Over
Current Line Alarm is triggered, and in a different manner when an Over Current Branch
Alarm is triggered. For example, Load Shedding may be configured in such a way that
when the Line Alarm is triggered, plugs A1 and B1 are switched Off, but when a Branch
Alarm is triggered, plugs A1 and A2 are switched Off.
Notes:
• In order for the MPC to provide alarm notification via Email, communication
parameters must first be defined as described in Section 5.9.11.
• In order for the MPC to provide alarm notification via Syslog Message, Syslog
parameters must first be defined and Syslog Messages must be enabled as
described in Section 5.9.2 and Section 11.
• In order for the MPC to provide alarm notification via SNMP Trap, SNMP
parameters must first be defined, and SNMP Traps must be enabled as
described in Section 5.9.7 and Section 12.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alarm Configuration
To configure the Over Current Alarms, access the MPC command mode using a
password that permits Administrator Level commands, and then proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Type /ACand then press [Enter] to display the Alarm Configuration
Menu. From the Alarm Configuration Menu, key in the number for the alarm that
you wish to configure and then press [Enter].
• Web Browser Interface: Click the "Alarm Configuration" link, located on the left
hand side of the screen to display the Alarm Configuration Menu. From the Alarm
Configuration Menu, click on the link for the alarm that you wish to configure.
Note that the configuration menus for the Over Current Alarms offer essentially the same
set of parameters, but the parameters defined for each alarm are separate and unique.
Therefore, parameters defined for a Critical Alarm will not be applied to an Initial Alarm
and vice versa.
The Over Current Alarm Configuration Menus offer the following parameters:
• Trigger Enable: Enables/Disables the trigger for this alarm. When Disabled, this
alarm will be suppressed. (Default = On.)
Note: To cancel an alarm without correcting the condition that caused the
alarm, simply toggle the Trigger Enable parameter Off and then back On again.
• Alarm Set Threshold: The trigger level for this alarm. When current load exceeds
the Alarm Set Threshold, the MPC can send an alarm (if enabled) and/or begin
load shedding (if enabled.) Note that the Alarm Set Threshold is entered as a
percentage of maximum capacity and is applied to both Over Current Branch Alarm
and Over Current Line Alarm (if present.) (Defaults: Initial Alarms = 80%;
Critical Alarms = 90%.)
• Alarm Clear Threshold: Determines how low the current load must drop in
order for the Alarm condition to be cancelled and for load shedding recovery (if
enabled) to occur. Note that the Alarm Clear Threshold is entered as a percentage
of maximum capacity and is applied to both Over Current Branch Alarm and Over
Current Line Alarm (if present.) (Defaults: Initial Alarms = 70%;
Critical Alarms = 80%.)
• Resend Delay: Determines how long the MPC will wait to resend an email
message generated by this alarm, when the initial attempt to send the notification
was unsuccessful. (Default = 60 Minutes.)
• Notify Upon Clear: When this item is enabled, the MPC will send additional
notification when the situation that caused the alarm has been corrected. For
example, when Notify Upon Clear is enabled, the MPC will first send notification
when it detects that current consumption has exceeded the trigger value, and then
send a second notification when it determines that the current consumption has
fallen below the trigger value. (Default = On.)
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alarm Configuration
• Email Message: Enables/Disables email notification for this alarm. (Default = On.)
Note: The Email Message parameter offers four different options: On, Off, On
(Copy to All Triggers) or Off (Copy to All Triggers). If either of the "Copy to All
Triggers" options is selected, then email notification for all other alarms will be
switched On or Off as indicated by this parameter. For example, If "Off (Copy
to All Triggers)" is selected, then Email notification will be disabled for all other
alarms too.
• Address 1, 2, and 3: These parameters are used to select which of the three email
addresses defined via the "Email Messages" menu (see Section 5.9.11) will receive
the email alarm notification messages generated by this alarm. The Address
parameters can be used to select one, or any combination of the addresses defined
via the Email Messages menu. (Default = All On.)
Note: If Email addresses have been previously defined, then the text under the
parameters will list the current, user selected email addresses.
• Subject: This parameter is used to define the text that will appear in the "Subject"
field for all email notification messages generated by the alarm.
(Defaults:
• Over Current (Initial) = "Alarm: Over Current (Initial)"
• Over Current (Critical) = "Alarm: Over Current (Critical)")
• Load Shedding: Provides access to a submenu, which is used to configure
and enable the Load Shedding feature for the Over Current Alarm. When Load
Shedding is enabled and properly configured, the MPC will switch specific,
user-selected plugs On or Off whenever the current load exceeds the Alarm Set
Threshold value. If the Auto Recovery feature is enabled, the MPC can also return
these user-selected plugs to their prior status, when current load falls below the
Alarm Clear Threshold value. For more information on the Load Shedding Feature
and Auto Recovery, please refer to Section 7.1.1.
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alarm Configuration
7.1.1. Over Current Alarms - Load Shedding and Auto Recovery
The Load Shedding feature is used to switch specific, user-defined, non-essential plugs
On or Off whenever current load exceeds the Alarm Set Threshold value. This allows
the MPC to automatically shut Off plugs in order to reduce current load when the load
approaches user-defined critical levels. When the Auto Recovery feature is enabled,
the MPC can also automatically "undo" the effects of the Load Shedding feature when
current load again falls to a user-defined non-critical level.
The MPC also allows you to define separate Load Shedding/Recovery actions for an
Over Current Branch Alarm and an Over Current Line Alarm. For example, if the Line
Alarm is triggered, Load Shedding can switch Off Plugs A1 and B1, yet when the Branch
"A" Alarm is triggered, the MPC can switch Off Plugs A1 and A2.
Together, the Load Shedding and Auto Recovery features allow the MPC to shut off
power to non-essential devices when the current load is too high, and then switch those
same non-essential devices back On again when the load falls to an acceptable level.
Notes:
• The Load Shedding Configuration Menus for all Over Current Alarms offer
essentially the same set of parameters, but the parameters defined for each
alarm are separate and unique. For example, parameters defined for Over
Current (Initial) Alarm Load Shedding will not be applied to Over Current
(Critical) Alarm Load Shedding and vice versa.
• The Load Shedding Configuration Menus for the Text Interface and Web
Browser Interface differ slightly; in the Web Browser Interface the Local/
AUX setting and Branch/Line setting are defined via the Over Current
Alarm Configuration Menu, whereas in the Text Interface, these settings are
accessed via submenus of the Load Shedding Configuration Menu.
7.1.1.1. Load Shedding & Auto Recovery Configuration - Text Interface
In the Text Interface, Load Shedding parameters for the Over Current Alarms are defined
as follows:
1. Access the Over Current Alarm Configuration Menu as described in Section 7.1.
2. At the Over Current Alarm Configuration Menu, type 5and press [Enter] to access
the Load Shedding Configuration Menu. The following parameters will be available:
1. Unit to Configure: When optional, remote MPC or BPM units have been
connected to your local MPC's AUX ports, this parameter is used to select the
Local or AUX unit that you wish to define Load Shedding parameters for.
(Default = Local.)
2. Branch A Load Shedding: Defines the Load Shedding actions that will be
executed by the selected (Local or AUX) MPC unit when an Over Current
Branch Alarm is triggered at Branch "A".
3. Branch B Load Shedding: Defines the Load Shedding actions that will be
executed by the selected (Local or AUX) MPC unit when an Over Current
Branch Alarm is triggered at Branch "B".
4. Line Load Shedding: Defines the Load Shedding actions that will be executed
by the selected (Local or AUX) MPC unit when an Over Current Line Alarm is
triggered.
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alarm Configuration
3. After defining the "Unit to Configure" parameter, use items 2, 3, and 4 to select
Load Shedding parameters for the selected branch or line. The Branch/Line Load
Shedding Configuration Menus offer the following parameters:
1. Enable: Enables/Disables Load Shedding for the corresponding alarm. When
enabled, the MPC will switch the user specified plugs whenever current load
exceeds the Alarm Set Threshold value. (Default = Disable.)
2. Plug State: Determines whether the selected plugs/plug groups will be
switched On or Off when Load Shedding is enabled and current load exceeds
the user-defined Alarm Set Threshold. For example, if the Plug State is set to
"Off", then the selected plugs/plug groups will be switched Off when the Alarm
Set Threshold is exceeded. (Default = Off.)
3. Auto Recovery: Enables/Disables the Auto Recovery feature for the selected
unit/branch/line. When both Load Shedding and Auto Recovery are enabled,
the MPC will return plugs to their former On/Off state after the current load falls
below the Alarm Clear Threshold value. This allows the MPC to "undo" the
effects of the Load Shedding feature after the current load has returned to an
acceptable level. (Default = Off.)
4. Plug Access: Determines which Plug(s) will be switched when the current
load exceeds the Alarm Set Threshold and the Load Shedding feature is
triggered. For example, if plugs A1, A2 and A3 are selected, then these plugs
will be switched On or Off whenever the current load exceeds the Alarm Set
Threshold. (Default = undefined.)
Notes:
• In the Text Interface, Plug Access is configured by typing 4, pressing [Enter]
and then selecting the desired Plug(s) from the resulting submenu.
• If your installation includes optional AUX units, please refer to Section 7.1.1.3
for additional instructions regarding granting access to plugs on AUX units.
5. Plug Group Access: Determines which Plug Group(s) will be switched when
the Load Shedding feature is triggered. For example, if you have defined
a Plug Group named "test", which includes Plugs B3, B4 and B5, and then
selected the "test" Plug Group via the Plug Group Access parameter, then all
of the plugs in the "test" Plug Group will be switched On or Off whenever the
current load exceeds the Alarm Set Threshold. (Default = undefined.)
Notes:
• In the Text Interface, Plug Group Access is configured by typing 5, pressing
[Enter] and then selecting the desired Plug Group(s) from the resulting
submenu.
• Plug Groups must first be defined (as described in Section 5.6) before they
will be displayed in the Load Shedding menu's Plug Group Access submenu.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alarm Configuration
7.1.1.2. Load Shedding & Auto Recovery Configuration - Web Browser Interface
In the Web Browser Interface, Load Shedding and Auto Recovery parameters are
defined as follows:
1. Access the Over Current Alarm Configuration Menu as described in Section 7.1.
2. At the Over Current Alarm Configuration Menu, use the two drop down menus next
to the Load Shedding button to determine the Local/AUX MPC unit and the desired
Branch or Line.
a) Local/AUX: ("Unit to Configure") When optional, remote MPC or BPM units
have been connected to your local MPC's AUX ports, this parameter is used to
select the Local or AUX unit that you wish to define Load Shedding parameters
for. (Default = Local.)
b) Branch/Line: Selects the configuration menu for the Branch A, Branch B or
Line Load Shedding actions. This allows you to define one set of actions that
will be performed when an alarm is triggered at Branch A, a different set of
actions that will be performed when an alarm is triggered at Branch B, and yet
another set of actions that will be performed when an alarm is triggered by the
Over Current Line Alarm.
Notes:
• The Over Current Line Alarm is only available in units that feature two or more
branches per input line.
• When an Over Current Alarm is triggered, the MPC will automatically perform
the set of actions that have been defined for the corresponding branch or
line.
3. After selecting the Local/AUX unit and power branch or line, click on the Load
Shedding button to select parameters for the selected unit/branch/line. The
resulting submenu will offer the following options:
• Enable: Enables/Disables Load Shedding for the selected unit and branch or
line. When enabled, the MPC will switch the user specified Plugs or Plug Groups
whenever the current load exceeds the user-defined Alarm Set Threshold value.
(Default = Disable.)
• Plug State: Determines whether the selected plugs/plug groups will be switched
On or Off when Load Shedding is enabled and current load exceeds the user-
defined Alarm Set Threshold. For example, if the Plug State is set to "Off",
then the selected plugs/plug groups will be switched Off when the Alarm Set
Threshold is exceeded at the selected unit/branch/line. (Default = Off.)
• Auto Recovery: Determines whether the selected plugs/plug groups will be
switched On or Off when Load Shedding is enabled and current load exceeds the
user-defined Alarm Set Threshold at the selected unit/branch/line. For example, if
the Plug State is set to "Off", then the selected plugs/plug groups will be switched
Off when the Alarm Set Threshold is exceeded. (Default = Off.)
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alarm Configuration
• Plug Access: Determines which Plug(s) will be switched when the current load
exceeds the Alarm Set Threshold and the Load Shedding feature is triggered at
the selected unit/branch/line. For example, if plugs A1, A2 and A3 are selected,
then these plugs will be switched On or Off whenever the current load exceeds
the Alarm Set Threshold at the selected unit/branch/line. (Default = undefined.)
Notes:
• In the Web Browser Interface, Plug Access is configured by clicking on the
"plus" symbol in the "Configure Plug Access" field to display the drop down
menu, and then selecting the desired Plug(s) from the drop down menu.
• If your installation includes optional AUX units, please refer to Section 7.1.1.3
for additional instructions regarding granting access to plugs on AUX units.
• Plug Group Access: Determines which Plug Group(s) will be switched when
the current exceeds the Alarm Set Threshold and the Load Shedding feature is
triggered at the selected unit/branch/line. For example, if you have defined a
Plug Group named "test", which includes Plugs B3, B4 and B5, and then selected
the "test" Plug Group via the Plug Group Access parameter, then all of the plugs
in the "test" Plug Group will be switched On or Off whenever the current exceeds
the Alarm Set Threshold at the selected unit/branch/line. (Default = undefined.)
Notes:
• In the Web Browser Interface, Plug Group Access is configured by clicking
on the "plus" symbol in the "Configure Plug Group Access" field to display
the drop down menu, and then selecting the desired Plug Group(s) from the
drop down menu.
• Plug Groups must first be defined (as described in Section 5.6) before they
will be displayed in the Load Shedding menu's Plug Group Access submenu.
4. After setting parameters for a given unit and branch or line, you may also define
additional parameters for other attached units or branches. To set Load Shedding
parameters for other units, branches or lines, return to the Alarm Configuration
menu and then repeat steps two and three.
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alarm Configuration
7.1.1.3. Granting Access to Plugs on AUX Units
Web Browser Interface
To grant access to plugs on AUX units, simply select the desired plugs from the
"Configure Plug Access" drop down menu and then click on the "Change Load
Shedding" button.
Text Interface
When Plug Access is defined via the Text Interface, the following procedure is used to
grant access to plugs on optional AUX/Remote units:
1. From the Load Shedding menu, type 4and press [Enter] to display the Plug
Access menu. At the Plug Access menu, select plugs for your local MPC unit
as you normally would, and when finished, press [Enter] to return to the Load
Shedding menu.
2. To grant access to plugs on AUX units, type 4and press [Enter] again to return to
the Plug Access menu, and then type >(greater than symbol) and press [Enter] to
scroll to the desired AUX MPC unit. When the desired AUX unit is displayed, select
plugs for the AUX unit as you normally would, and then press [Enter] to return to
the Load Shedding Menu.
Note: The first line of the Plug Access menu will indicate the name of the AUX
or Local MPC unit that is currently selected.
3. Repeat Step 2 above to grant access to plugs on additional AUX units.
4. When you have finished granting Plug Access rights for this alarm, define any other
desired parameters required, and then make certain to press [Esc] several times
until the "Saving Configuration" message is displayed and the unit returns to the
MPC command prompt.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alarm Configuration
7.2. The Over Temperature Alarms
The Over Temperature Alarms are designed to inform you when the temperature level
inside your equipment rack reaches or exceeds certain user-defined levels. There
are two separate Over Temperature Alarms; the Initial Threshold alarm and the Critical
Threshold Alarm.
Typically, the Initial Threshold alarm is used to notify you when the temperature within
your equipment rack reaches a point where you might want to investigate it, whereas the
Critical Threshold alarm is used to notify you when the temperature approaches a level
that may harm equipment or inhibit performance. The trigger for the Initial Threshold
alarm is generally set lower than the Critical Threshold alarm.
If the user-defined trigger levels for temperature are exceeded, the MPC can
automatically shut off power to non-essential devices ("Load Shedding") in order to
reduce the amount of temperature that is being generated within the rack. In addition,
the Load Shedding feature can also be used to switch On additional components, such
as fans or cooling systems in order to dissipate the excess heat. After Load Shedding
has taken place, the Load Shedding Recovery feature can be used to return plugs to
their previous state after the temperature drops to an acceptable level.
Notes:
• In order for the MPC to provide alarm notification via Email, communication
parameters must first be defined as described in Section 5.9.11.
• In order for the MPC to provide alarm notification via Syslog Message, Syslog
parameters must first be defined and Syslog Messages must be enabled as
described in Section 5.9.2 and Section 11.
• In order for the MPC to provide alarm notification via SNMP Trap, SNMP
parameters must first be defined, and SNMP Traps must be enabled as
described in Section 5.9.7 and Section 12.
• When additional, optional remote MPC units have been connected to the
AUX Ports on your local MPC unit, Over Temperature alarms can also be
separately defined for each individual Local/AUX unit.
To configure the Over Temperature Alarms, access the MPC command mode using a
password that permits Administrator Level commands, and then proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Type /ACand then press [Enter] to display the Alarm Configuration
Menu. From the Alarm Configuration Menu, either type 3and press [Enter] to
access the Over Temperature (Initial Threshold) Alarm, or type 4and press [Enter]
to access the Over Temperature (Critical Threshold) Alarm.
• Web Browser Interface: Click the "Alarm Configuration" link, located on the left
hand side of the screen to display the Alarm Configuration Menu. From the Alarm
Configuration Menu, click on either the "Over Temperature (Initial Threshold)" link or
the "Over Temperature (Critical Threshold)" link to access the desired menu.
Note that both the Initial Threshold menus and Critical Threshold menus offer essentially
the same set of parameters, but the parameters defined for each alarm are separate
and unique. Therefore, parameters defined for the Critical Threshold Alarm will not be
applied to the Initial Threshold Alarm and vice versa.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alarm Configuration
Both the Over Temperature (Initial Threshold) alarm and the Over Temperature (Critical
Threshold) alarm offer the following parameters:
• Trigger Enable: Enables/Disables the trigger for this alarm. When Disabled, this
alarm will be suppressed. (Default = On.)
Note: To cancel an alarm without correcting the condition that caused the
alarm, simply toggle the Trigger Enable parameter Off and then back On again.
• Alarm Set Threshold: The trigger level for this alarm. When temperature exceeds
the Alarm Set Threshold, the MPC can send an alarm (if enabled) and/or begin
Load Shedding (if enabled.) For more information on Load Shedding for the Over
Temperature Alarm, please refer to Section 7.2.1. (Initial Threshold: Default = 90°F
or 32°C, Critical Threshold: Default = 100°F or 38°C.)
• Alarm Clear Threshold: Determines how low the temperature must drop in order
for the Alarm condition to be cancelled and for Load Shedding (if enabled) to occur.
For more information on Load Shedding for the Over Temperature Alarm, please
refer to Section 7.2.1. (Initial Threshold: Default = 80°F or 27°C, Critical Threshold:
Default = 90°F or 38°C.)
Note: The System Parameters menu is used to set the temperature format for
the MPC unit to either Fahrenheit or Celsius as described in Section 5.3.
• Resend Delay: Determines how long the MPC will wait to resend an email
message generated by this alarm, when the initial attempt to send notification was
unsuccessful. (Default = 60 Minutes.)
• Notify Upon Clear: When this item is enabled, the MPC will send additional
notification when the situation that caused the alarm has been corrected. For
example, when Notify Upon Clear is enabled, the MPC will send initial notification
when it detects that the temperature has exceeded the trigger value, and then send
a second notification when it determines that the temperature has fallen below the
trigger value. (Default = On.)
• Email Message: Enables/Disables email notification for this alarm. (Default = On.)
Note: The Email Message parameter offers four different options: On, Off, On
(Copy to All Triggers) or Off (Copy to All Triggers). If either of the "Copy to All
Triggers" options is selected, then email notification for all other alarms will be
switched On or Off as indicated by this parameter. For example, If "Off (Copy
to All Triggers)" is selected, then Email notification will be disabled for all other
alarms too.
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alarm Configuration
• Address 1, 2, and 3: These parameters are used to select which of the three email
addresses, defined via the "Email Messages" menu (see Section 5.9.11,) will receive
the email alarm notification messages generated by this alarm. The Address
parameters can be used to select one, or any combination of the addresses defined
via the Email Messages menu. (Default = All On.)
Note: If Email addresses have been previously defined, then the text under the
parameters will list the current, user defined email addresses.
• Subject: This parameter is used to define the text that will appear in the "Subject"
field for all email notification messages generated by this alarm. (Default = "Alarm:
Over Temperature (Initial)" or "Alarm: Over Temperature (Critical)".)
• Load Shedding: Provides access to a submenu, which is used to configure
and enable the Load Shedding feature for the Over Temperature alarms. When
Load Shedding is enabled and properly configured, the MPC will switch specific,
user-selected plugs On or Off whenever the temperature exceeds the Alarm Set
Threshold value. If the Auto Recovery feature is enabled, the MPC can also return
these user-selected plugs to their prior status, when the temperature falls below the
Alarm Clear Threshold value. For more information on the Load Shedding Feature
and Auto Recovery, please refer to Section 7.2.1.
7.2.1. Over Temperature Alarms - Load Shedding and Auto Recovery
In the case of the Over Temperature Alarms, the Load Shedding feature is used to switch
specific, user-defined plugs On or Off whenever the temperature exceeds the Alarm Set
Threshold value. This allows the MPC to automatically shut Off non-essential devices in
order to reduce the temperature being generated within the rack, or automatically switch
On devices such as fans or cooling systems in order to dissipate heat from the rack.
When the Auto Recovery feature is enabled, the MPC can also automatically "undo" the
effects of the Load Shedding feature when the temperature again falls to a user-defined
non-critical level.
When additional, optional remote MPC units have been connected to the AUX ports on
your local MPC unit, separate Load Shedding and Auto Recovery actions can also be
separately defined for each individual Local/AUX unit.
Notes:
• The Load Shedding Configuration Menus for both the Initial and Critical Over
Temperature Alarms offer essentially the same set of parameters, but the
parameters defined for each alarm are separate and unique. For example,
parameters defined for Over Temperature (Initial) Alarm Load Shedding will
not be applied to Over Temperature (Critical) Alarm Load Shedding and
vice versa.
• The Load Shedding Configuration Menus for the Text Interface and Web
Browser Interface differ slightly; in the Web Browser Interface the Local/
AUX setting is defined via the Over Temperature Alarm Configuration Menu,
whereas in the Text Interface, this setting is accessed via submenus of the
Load Shedding Configuration Menu.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alarm Configuration
7.2.1.1. Load Shedding & Auto Recovery Configuration - Text Interface
In the Text Interface, Load Shedding parameters for the Over Temperature Alarm are
defined as follows:
1. Access the Over temperature Alarm Configuration Menu as described in
Section 7.2.
2. At the Over Temperature Alarm Configuration Menu, type 5and press [Enter] to
access the Load Shedding Configuration Menu. The following parameters will be
available:
1. Unit to Configure: When optional, remote MPC or BPM units have been
connected to your local MPC's AUX ports, this parameter is used to select the
Local or AUX unit that you wish to define Load Shedding parameters for.
(Default = Local.)
2. Configure Load Shedding for Unit: Provides access to a submenu that is
used to define Over Temperature Alarm Load Shedding parameters for the unit
selected at the "Unit to Configure" prompt as described in the next step.
3. After defining the "Unit to Configure" parameter, use type 2 and press [Enter] to
define Load Shedding parameters for the selected unit. The Over Temperature
Alarm Load Shedding Configuration Menu offers the following parameters:
1. Enable: Enables/Disables Load Shedding for the Over Temperature Alarm.
When enabled, the MPC will switch the user specified plugs whenever the
temperature exceeds the Alarm Set Threshold value. (Default = Disable.)
2. Plug State: Determines whether the selected plugs/plug groups will be
switched On or Off when Load Shedding is enabled and temperature exceeds
the user-defined Alarm Set Threshold. For example, if the Plug State is set to
"Off", then the selected plugs/plug groups will be switched Off when the Alarm
Set Threshold is exceeded. (Default = Off.)
3. Auto Recovery: Enables/Disables the Auto Recovery feature for the selected
unit. When both Load Shedding and Auto Recovery are enabled, the MPC will
return plugs to their former On/Off state after the temperature falls below the
Alarm Clear Threshold value. This allows the MPC to "undo" the effects of the
Load Shedding feature after the temperature returned to an acceptable level.
(Default = Off.)
4. Plug Access: Determines which Plug(s) will be switched when the
temperature exceeds the Alarm Set Threshold and the Load Shedding feature
is triggered. For example, if plugs A1, A2 and A3 are selected, then these
plugs will be switched On or Off whenever the temperature exceeds the Alarm
Set Threshold. (Default = undefined.)
Notes:
• In the Text Interface, Plug Access is configured by typing 4, pressing [Enter]
and then selecting the desired Plug(s) from the resulting submenu.
• If your installation includes optional AUX units, please refer to Section 7.2.1.3
for additional instructions regarding granting access to plugs on AUX units.
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alarm Configuration
5. Plug Group Access: Determines which Plug Group(s) will be switched when
the Load Shedding feature is triggered. For example, if you have defined
a Plug Group named "test", which includes Plugs B3, B4 and B5, and then
selected the "test" Plug Group via the Plug Group Access parameter, then all
of the plugs in the "test" Plug Group will be switched On or Off whenever the
temperature exceeds the Alarm Set Threshold. (Default = undefined.)
Notes:
• In the Text Interface, Plug Group Access is configured by typing 5, pressing
[Enter] and then selecting the desired Plug Group(s) from the resulting
submenu.
• Plug Groups must first be defined (as described in Section 5.6) before they
will be displayed in the Load Shedding menu's Plug Group Access submenu.
7.1.1.2. Load Shedding & Auto Recovery Configuration - Web Browser Interface
In the Web Browser Interface, Load Shedding and Auto Recovery parameters for the
Over Temperature Alarms are defined as follows:
1. Access the Over Temperature Alarm Configuration Menu as described in
Section 7.2.
2. At the Over Temperature Alarm Configuration Menu, use the drop down menu next
to the Load Shedding button to determine the Local/AUX MPC unit. When optional,
remote MPC or BPM units have been connected to your local MPC's AUX ports,
this parameter is used to select the Local or AUX unit that you wish to define Over
Temperature Alarm Load Shedding parameters for. (Default = Local.)
3. After selecting the Local/AUX unit, click on the Load Shedding button to select
parameters for the selected unit. The resulting submenu will offer the following
options:
• Enable: Enables/Disables Load Shedding for the selected unit. When enabled,
the MPC will switch the user specified Plugs or Plug Groups whenever the
temperature exceeds the user-defined Alarm Set Threshold value.
(Default = Disable.)
• Plug State: Determines whether the selected plugs/plug groups will be switched
On or Off when Load Shedding is enabled and the temperature exceeds the
user-defined Alarm Set Threshold. For example, if the Plug State is set to "Off",
then the selected plugs/plug groups will be switched Off when the Alarm Set
Threshold is exceeded at the selected unit. (Default = Off.)
• Auto Recovery: Determines whether the selected plugs/plug groups will be
switched On or Off when Load Shedding is enabled and the temperature exceeds
the user-defined Alarm Set Threshold at the selected unit. For example, if the
Plug State is set to "Off", then the selected plugs/plug groups will be switched Off
when the Alarm Set Threshold is exceeded. (Default = Off.)
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alarm Configuration
• Plug Access: Determines which Plug(s) will be switched when the temperature
exceeds the Alarm Set Threshold and the Load Shedding feature is triggered at
the selected unit. For example, if plugs A1, A2 and A3 are selected, then these
plugs will be switched On or Off whenever the temperature exceeds the Alarm
Set Threshold at the selected unit/branch/line. (Default = undefined.)
Notes:
• In the Web Browser Interface, Plug Access is configured by clicking on the
"plus" symbol in the "Configure Plug Access" field to display the drop down
menu, and then selecting the desired Plug(s) from the drop down menu.
• If your installation includes optional AUX units, please refer to Section 7.2.1.3
for additional instructions regarding granting access to plugs on AUX units.
• Plug Group Access: Determines which Plug Group(s) will be switched when the
temperature exceeds the Alarm Set Threshold and the Load Shedding feature
is triggered at the selected unit. For example, if you have defined a Plug Group
named "test", which includes Plugs B3, B4 and B5, and then selected the "test"
Plug Group via the Plug Group Access parameter, then all of the plugs in the
"test" Plug Group will be switched On or Off whenever the temperature exceeds
the Alarm Set Threshold at the selected unit. (Default = undefined.)
Notes:
• In the Web Browser Interface, Plug Group Access is configured by clicking
on the "plus" symbol in the "Configure Plug Group Access" field to display
the drop down menu, and then selecting the desired Plug Group(s) from the
drop down menu.
• Plug Groups must first be defined (as described in Section 5.6) before they
will be displayed in the Load Shedding menu's Plug Group Access submenu.
4. After setting parameters for a given unit, you may also define additional parameters
for other attached units. To set Load Shedding parameters for other units, return to
the Alarm Configuration menu and then repeat steps two and three.
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alarm Configuration
7.2.1.3. Granting Access to Plugs on AUX Units
Web Browser Interface
To grant access to plugs on AUX units, simply select the desired plugs from the
"Configure Plug Access" drop down menu and then click on the "Change Load
Shedding" button.
Text Interface
When Plug Access is defined via the Text Interface, the following procedure is used to
grant access to plugs on optional AUX units:
1. From the Load Shedding menu, type 4and press [Enter] to display the Plug
Access menu. At the Plug Access menu, select plugs for your local MPC unit
as you normally would, and when finished, press [Enter] to return to the Load
Shedding menu.
2. To grant access to plugs on AUX units, type 4and press [Enter] again to return to
the Plug Access menu, and then type >(greater than symbol) and press [Enter] to
scroll to the desired AUX MPC unit. When the desired AUX unit is displayed, select
plugs for the AUX unit as you normally would, and then press [Enter] to return to
the Load Shedding Menu.
Note: The first line of the Plug Access menu will indicate the name of the AUX
or Local MPC unit that is currently selected.
3. Repeat Step 2 above to grant access to plugs on additional AUX units.
4. When you have finished granting Plug Access rights for this alarm, define any other
desired parameters required, and then make certain to press [Esc] several times
until the "Saving Configuration" message is displayed and the unit returns to the
MPC command prompt.
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alarm Configuration
7.3. The Circuit Breaker Open Alarm
The Circuit Breaker Alarm is intended to provide notification in the event that one of the
MPC's circuit breakers is opened. When a circuit breaker is open, the MPC can provide
prompt notification via Email, Syslog Message or SNMP Trap.
Notes:
• In order for the MPC to provide alarm notification via Email, communication
parameters must first be defined as described in Section 5.9.11.
• In order for the MPC to provide alarm notification via Syslog Message, Syslog
parameters must first be defined and Syslog Messages must be enabled as
described in Section 5.9.2 and Section 11.
• In order for the MPC to provide alarm notification via SNMP Trap, SNMP
parameters must first be defined, and SNMP Traps must be enabled as
described in Section 5.9.7 and Section 12.
To configure the Circuit Breaker Alarm, access the MPC command mode using a
password that permits Administrator Level commands, and then proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Type /ACand then press [Enter] to display the Alarm Configuration
Menu. From the Alarm Configuration Menu, type 5and press [Enter] to access the
configuration menu for the Circuit Breaker Alarm.
• Web Browser Interface: Click the "Alarm Configuration" link, located on the
left hand side of the screen to display the Alarm Configuration Menu. From the
Alarm Configuration Menu, click on the "Circuit Breaker Open" link to access the
configuration menu.
The Circuit Breaker Open Alarm Configuration Menu offers the following parameters:
• Trigger Enable: Enables/Disables the trigger for this alarm. When Disabled, this
alarm will be suppressed. (Default = On.)
Note: To cancel an alarm without correcting the condition that caused the
alarm, simply toggle the Trigger Enable parameter Off and then back On again.
• Resend Delay: Determines how long the MPC will wait to resend an email
message generated by this alarm, when the initial attempt to send the notification
was unsuccessful. (Default = 60 Minutes.)
• Notify Upon Clear: When this item is enabled, the MPC will send additional
notification when the situation that caused the alarm has been corrected. For
example, when Notify Upon Clear is enabled, the MPC can send initial notification
when it detects an open circuit breaker, and then send a second notification when it
determines that the circuit breaker has been closed. (Default = On.)
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alarm Configuration
• Email Message: Enables/Disables email notification for this alarm. (Default = On.)
Note: The Email Message parameter offers four different options: On, Off, On
(Copy to All Triggers) or Off (Copy to All Triggers). If either of the "Copy to All
Triggers" options is selected, then email notification for all other alarms will be
switched On or Off as indicated by this parameter. For example, If "Off (Copy
to All Triggers)" is selected, then Email notification will be disabled for all other
alarms too.
• Address 1, 2, and 3: These parameters are used to select which of the three email
addresses defined via the "Email Messages" menu (see Section 5.9.11) will receive
the email alarm notification messages generated by this alarm. The Address
parameters can be used to select one, or any combination of the addresses defined
via the Email Messages menu. (Default = All On.)
Note: If Email addresses have been previously defined, then the text under the
parameters will list the current, user selected email addresses.
• Subject: This parameter is used to define the text that will appear in the "Subject"
field for all email notification messages generated by this alarm. (Default = "Alarm:
Circuit Breaker Open")
7.4. The Lost Communication with AUX Units Alarm
The Lost Communication with AUX Units Alarm is intended to provide prompt
notification when communication with the optional AUX MPC units is disrupted.
When communication with an attached AUX unit is interrupted, the MPC can provide
notification via Email, Syslog Message or SNMP Trap.
Notes:
• In order for the MPC to provide alarm notification via Email, communication
parameters must first be defined as described in Section 5.9.11.
• In order for the MPC to provide alarm notification via Syslog Message, Syslog
parameters must first be defined and Syslog Messages must be enabled as
described in Section 5.9.2 and Section 11.
• In order for the MPC to provide alarm notification via SNMP Trap, SNMP
parameters must first be defined, and SNMP Traps must be enabled as
described in Section 5.9.7 and Section 12.
To configure the Lost Communication with AUX Alarm, access the MPC command mode
using a password that permits Administrator Level commands, then proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Type /ACand then press [Enter] to display the Alarm Configuration
Menu. From the Alarm Configuration Menu, type 6and press [Enter] to access the
configuration menu for the Lost Communication with AUX Units Alarm.
• Web Browser Interface: Click the "Alarm Configuration" link, located on the left
hand side of the screen to display the Alarm Configuration Menu. From the Alarm
Configuration Menu, click on the "Lost Communication with AUX Units" link to
access the configuration menu.
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alarm Configuration
The Lost Communication with AUX Units Alarm Configuration Menu offers the following
parameters:
• Trigger Enable: Enables/Disables the trigger for this alarm. When Disabled, this
alarm will be suppressed. (Default = On.)
Note: To cancel an alarm without correcting the condition that caused the
alarm, simply toggle the Trigger Enable parameter Off and then back On again.
• Resend Delay: Determines how long the MPC will wait to resend an email
message generated by this alarm, when the initial attempt to send the notification
was unsuccessful. (Default = 60 Minutes.)
• Notify Upon Clear: When this item is enabled, the MPC will send additional
notification when the situation that caused the alarm has been corrected. For
example, when Notify Upon Clear is enabled, the MPC will send initial notification
when it detects lost communication with the AUX unit, and then send a second
notification when it determines that communication has been restored.
(Default = On.)
• Email Message: Enables/Disables email notification for this alarm. (Default = On.)
Note: The Email Message parameter offers four different options: On, Off, On
(Copy to All Triggers) or Off (Copy to All Triggers). If either of the "Copy to All
Triggers" options is selected, then email notification for all other alarms will be
switched On or Off as indicated by this parameter. For example, If "Off (Copy
to All Triggers)" is selected, then Email notification will be disabled for all other
alarms too.
• Address 1, 2, and 3: These parameters are used to select which of the three email
addresses defined via the "Email Messages" menu (see Section 5.9.11) will receive
the email alarm notification messages generated by this alarm. The Address
parameters can be used to select one, or any combination of the addresses defined
via the Email Messages menu. (Default = All On.)
Note: If Email addresses have been previously defined, then the text under the
parameters will list the current, user defined email addresses.
• Subject: This parameter is used to define the text that will appear in the "Subject"
field for all email notification messages generated by this alarm. (Default = "Alarm:
Lost Comm with AUX Unit")
7-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alarm Configuration
7.5. The Lost Voltage (Line In) Alarm
The Lost Voltage (Line In) Alarm is intended to provide notification when one of the
power input lines connected to the MPC unit, is lost or disconnected. When one of the
power supplies is lost, the MPC can provide notification via Email, Syslog Message or
SNMP Trap.
Notes:
• The Lost Voltage (Line In) alarm will provide notification when one of the
available power supplies is lost or disconnected. This alarm will not function
if all input power to the MPC unit is lost. To provide notification when all input
power is lost and restored, please use the Power Cycle Alarm as described
in Section 7.8.
• In order for the MPC to provide alarm notification via Email, communication
parameters must first be defined as described in Section 5.9.11.
• In order for the MPC to provide alarm notification via Syslog Message, Syslog
parameters must first be defined and Syslog Messages must be enabled as
described in Section 5.9.2 and Section 11.
• In order for the MPC to provide alarm notification via SNMP Trap, SNMP
parameters must first be defined, and SNMP Traps must be enabled as
described in Section 5.9.7 and Section 12.
To configure the Lost Voltage (Line In) Alarm, access the MPC command mode using a
password that permits Administrator Level commands, and then proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Type /ACand then press [Enter] to display the Alarm Configuration
Menu. From the Alarm Configuration Menu, type 7and press [Enter] to access the
configuration menu for the Lost Voltage (Line In) Alarm.
• Web Browser Interface: Click the "Alarm Configuration" link, located on the
left hand side of the screen to display the Alarm Configuration Menu. From the
Alarm Configuration Menu, click on the "Lost Voltage (Line In)" link to access the
configuration menu.
The Lost Voltage Alarm Configuration menu offers the following parameters:
• Trigger Enable: Enables/Disables the trigger for this alarm. When Disabled, this
alarm will be suppressed. (Default = On.)
Note: To cancel an alarm without correcting the condition that caused the
alarm, simply toggle the Trigger Enable parameter Off and then back On again.
• Resend Delay: Determines how long the MPC will wait to resend an email
message generated by this alarm, when the initial attempt to send the notification
was unsuccessful. (Default = 60 Minutes.)
• Notify Upon Clear: When this item is enabled, the MPC will send additional
notification when the situation that caused the alarm has been corrected. For
example, when Notify Upon Clear is enabled, the MPC will send initial notification
when it detects that one of it's power supplies has been lost or disconnected, and
then send a second notification when it determines that power has been restored.
(Default = On.)
7-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alarm Configuration
• Email Message: Enables/Disables email notification for this alarm. (Default = On.)
Note: The Email Message parameter offers four different options: On, Off, On
(Copy to All Triggers) or Off (Copy to All Triggers). If either of the "Copy to All
Triggers" options is selected, then email notification for all other alarms will be
switched On or Off as indicated by this parameter. For example, If "Off (Copy
to All Triggers)" is selected, then Email notification will be disabled for all other
alarms too.
• Address 1, 2, and 3: These parameters are used to select which of the three email
addresses defined via the "Email Messages" menu (see Section 5.9.11) will receive
the email alarm notification messages generated by this alarm. The Address
parameters can be used to select one, or any combination of the addresses defined
via the Email Messages menu. (Default = All On.)
Note: If Email addresses have been previously specified, then the text under
the parameters will list the current, user defined email addresses.
• Subject: This parameter is used to define the text that will appear in the "Subject"
field for all email notification messages generated by this alarm. (Default = "Alarm:
Lost Voltage (Line In)")
7-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alarm Configuration
7.6. The Ping-No-Answer Alarm
The Ping-No-Answer Alarm is intended to provide notification when one of the IP
addresses defined via the Ping-No-Answer Reboot feature (as described in Section 6.1)
fails to respond to a Ping command. When one of the user-defined IP addresses fails to
answer a Ping command, the MPC can provide notification via Email, Syslog Message
or SNMP Trap.
Notes:
• In order for this alarm to function, IP Addresses for the Ping-No-Answer
reboot feature must first be defined as described in Section 6.1.
• When a Ping-No-Answer condition is detected, the MPC can still reboot the
user-selected outlet(s) as described in Section 6.1, and can also send an
email, Syslog Message and/or SNMP trap if properly configured as described
in this section.
• In order for the MPC to provide Email alarm notification, communication
parameters must first be defined as described in Section 5.9.11.
• In order for the MPC to provide Syslog Message notification, Syslog
parameters must first be defined and Syslog Messages must be enabled as
described in Section 5.9.2 and Section 11.
• In order for the MPC to provide SNMP Trap notification when this alarm is
triggered, SNMP parameters must first be defined, and SNMP Traps must be
enabled as described in Section 5.9.7 and Section 12.
To configure the Lost Voltage (Line In) Alarm, access the MPC command mode using a
password that permits Administrator Level commands, and then proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Type /ACand then press [Enter] to display the Alarm Configuration
Menu. From the Alarm Configuration Menu, type 8and press [Enter] to access the
configuration menu for the Ping-No-Answer Alarm.
• Web Browser Interface: Click the "Alarm Configuration" link, located on the left
hand side of the screen to display the Alarm Configuration Menu. From the Alarm
Configuration Menu, click on the "Ping-No-Answer" link to access the configuration
Menu.
7-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alarm Configuration
The Ping-No-Answer alarm configuration menu offers the following parameters:
• Trigger Enable: Enables/Disables the trigger for this alarm. When Disabled, this
alarm will be suppressed. (Default = On.)
Note: To cancel an alarm without correcting the condition that caused the
alarm, simply toggle the Trigger Enable parameter to Off and then back On
again.
• Resend Delay: Determines how long the MPC will wait to resend an email
message generated by this alarm, when the initial attempt to send the notification
was unsuccessful. (Default = 60 Minutes.)
• Notify Upon Clear: When this item is enabled, the MPC will send additional
notification when the situation that caused the alarm has been corrected. For
example, when Notify Upon Clear is enabled, the MPC will send initial notification
when it detects that a Ping command has failed, and then send a second
notification when it determines that the IP address is again responding to the Ping
command. (Default = On.)
• Email Message: Enables/Disables email notification for this alarm. (Default = On.)
Note: The Email Message parameter offers four different options: On, Off, On
(Copy to All Triggers) or Off (Copy to All Triggers). If either of the "Copy to All
Triggers" options is selected, then email notification for all other alarms will be
switched On or Off as indicated by this parameter. For example, If "Off (Copy
to All Triggers)" is selected, then Email notification will be disabled for all other
alarms too.
• Address 1, 2, and 3: These parameters are used to select which of the three email
addresses defined via the "Email Messages" menu (see Section 5.9.11) will receive
the email alarm notification messages generated by this alarm. The Address
parameters can be used to select one, or any combination of the addresses defined
via the Email Messages menu. (Default = All On.)
Note: If Email addresses have been previously specified, then the text under
the parameters will list the current, user defined email addresses.
• Subject: This parameter is used to define the text that will appear in the "Subject"
field for all email notification messages that are generated by this alarm.
(Default = "Alarm: Ping-No-Answer")
7-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alarm Configuration
7.7. The Invalid Access Lockout Alarm
The Invalid Access Lockout Alarm is intended to provide notification when the MPC
has locked the Network port due to repeated, invalid attempts to access command
mode. Normally, the Invalid Access Lockout feature (discussed in Section 5.3.2) will
lock the network port whenever the MPC detects that a user-defined number of invalid
passwords have been entered at the Network Port. When the Invalid Access Lockout
Alarm is properly configured and enabled as described in this section, the MPC can also
provide notification via Email, Syslog Message or SNMP Trap.
Notes:
• In order for this alarm to function, Invalid Access Lockout parameters must
first be configured and enabled as described in Section 5.3.2.
• When an Invalid Access Lockout occurs, the MPC can still lock the network
port as described in Section 5.3.2, and can also send an email, Syslog
Message and/or SNMP trap if properly configured.
• If desired, the MPC can be configured to count Invalid Access attempts and
provide notification when the counter exceeds a user defined trigger level,
without actually locking the port in question. To do this, enable the Invalid
Access Lockout Alarm as described here, but when you configure Invalid
Access Lockout parameters as described in Section 5.3.2, set the Lockout
Attempts and Lockout Duration as you would normally, and then set the
"Lockout Enable" parameter to "Off."
• In order for the MPC to provide Email alarm notification, communication
parameters must first be defined as described in Section 5.9.11.
• In order for the MPC to provide Syslog Message notification, Syslog
parameters must first be defined and Syslog Messages must be enabled as
described in Section 5.9.2 and Section 11.
• In order for the MPC to provide SNMP Trap notification when this alarm is
triggered, SNMP parameters must first be defined, and SNMP Traps must be
enabled as described in Section 5.9.7 and Section 12.
To configure the Invalid Access Lockout Alarm, access the MPC command mode using
a password that permits Administrator Level commands, and then proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Type /ACand then press [Enter] to display the Alarm Configuration
Menu. From the Alarm Configuration Menu, type 9and press [Enter] to access the
configuration menu for the Invalid Access Lockout Alarm.
• Web Browser Interface: Click the "Alarm Configuration" link, located on the
left hand side of the screen to display the Alarm Configuration Menu. From the
Alarm Configuration Menu, click on the "Invalid Access Lockout" link to access the
configuration menu.
7-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alarm Configuration
The Invalid Access Lockout alarm configuration menu offers the following parameters:
• Trigger Enable: Enables/Disables the trigger for this alarm. When Disabled, this
alarm will be suppressed. (Default = On.)
Note: To cancel an alarm without unlocking the port, simply toggle the Trigger
Enable parameter Off and then back On again.
• Resend Delay: Determines how long the MPC will wait to resend an email
message generated by this alarm, when the initial attempt to send the notification
was unsuccessful. (Default = 60 Minutes.)
• Notify Upon Clear: When this item is enabled, the MPC will send additional
notification when the situation that caused the alarm has been corrected. For
example, when Notify Upon Clear is enabled, the MPC will send initial notification
when it detects that an Invalid Access Lockout has occurred, and then send a
second notification when it determines that the port has been unlocked.
(Default = On.)
• Email Message: Enables/Disables email notification for this alarm. (Default = On.)
Note: The Email Message parameter offers four different options: On, Off, On
(Copy to All Triggers) or Off (Copy to All Triggers). If either of the "Copy to All
Triggers" options is selected, then email notification for all other alarms will be
switched On or Off as indicated by this parameter. For example, If "Off (Copy
to All Triggers)" is selected, then Email notification will be disabled for all other
alarms too.
• Address 1, 2, and 3: These parameters are used to select which of the three email
addresses defined via the "Email Messages" menu (see Section 5.9.11) will receive
the email alarm notification messages generated by this alarm. The Address
parameters can be used to select one, or any combination of the addresses defined
via the Email Messages menu. (Default = All On.)
Note: If Email addresses have been previously specified, then the text under
the parameters will list the current, user defined email addresses.
• Subject: This parameter is used to define the text that will appear in the "Subject"
field for all email notification messages generated by this alarm. (Default = "Alarm:
Invalid Access Lockout")
7-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alarm Configuration
7.8. The Power Cycle Alarm
The Power Cycle Alarm can provide notification when all input power to the MPC unit is
lost and then restored. When one of the power supplies is lost, the MPC can provide
notification via Email, Syslog Message or SNMP Trap.
Notes:
• The Power Cycle alarm can provide notification when all input power to the
MPC unit is lost and then restored. This alarm will not function when only
one power input line is disconnected. To provide notification when one
power input line is lost or disconnected, please use the Lost Voltage (Line In)
Alarm as described in Section 7.5.
• In order for the MPC to provide alarm notification via Email, communication
parameters must first be defined as described in Section 5.9.11.
• In order for the MPC to provide alarm notification via Syslog Message, Syslog
parameters must first be defined and Syslog Messages must be enabled as
described in Section 5.9.2 and Section 11.
• In order for the MPC to provide alarm notification via SNMP Trap, SNMP
parameters must first be defined, and SNMP Traps must be enabled as
described in Section 5.9.7 and Section 12.
To configure the Power Cycle Alarm, access the MPC command mode using a
password that permits Administrator Level commands, and then proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Type /ACand then press [Enter] to display the Alarm Configuration
Menu. From the Alarm Configuration Menu, type 10and press [Enter] to access
the configuration menu for the Power Cycle Alarm.
• Web Browser Interface: Click the "Alarm Configuration" link, located on the left
hand side of the screen to display the Alarm Configuration Menu. From the Alarm
Configuration Menu, click on the "Power Cycle" link to access the configuration
menu.
The Power Cycle Alarm configuration menu offers the following parameters:
• Trigger Enable: Enables/Disables the trigger for this alarm. When Disabled, this
alarm will be suppressed. (Default = On.)
• Email Message: Enables/Disables email notification for this alarm. (Default = On.)
Note: The Email Message parameter offers four different options: On, Off, On
(Copy to All Triggers) or Off (Copy to All Triggers). If either of the "Copy to All
Triggers" options is selected, then email notification for all other alarms will be
switched On or Off as indicated by this parameter. For example, If "Off (Copy
to All Triggers)" is selected, then Email notification will be disabled for all other
alarms too.
7-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alarm Configuration
• Address 1, 2, and 3: These parameters are used to select which of the three email
addresses defined via the "Email Messages" menu (see Section 5.9.11) will receive
the email alarm notification messages generated by this alarm. The Address
parameters can be used to select one, or any combination of the addresses defined
via the Email Messages menu. (Default = All On.)
Note: If Email addresses have been previously specified, then the text under
the parameters will list the current, user defined email addresses.
• Subject: This parameter is used to define the text that will appear in the "Subject"
field for all email notification messages generated by this alarm. (Default = "Alarm:
Power Cycle")
7-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. The Status Screens
The Status Screens are used to display status information about the switched outlets,
Network Port, Plug Groups, Current and Power Metering and the Alarm Log and Audit
Log. The Status Screens are available via both the Text Interface and Web Browser
Interface.
8.1. Product Status
The Product Status Screen lists the model number, power rating, input line count, input
line frequency and software version for your local MPC unit as well as any optional
remote units that have been connected to the local unit's AUX ports.
To view the Product Status Screen, access the command mode and then proceed as
follows:
• Text Interface: Type /J * and press [Enter].
• Web Browser Interface: Click on the "Product Status" link on the left hand side of
the screen.
The Product Status Screen lists the following items for the local MPC unit as well as any
optional AUX MPC units:
• Product: The make/model number of the MPC unit.
• Rating: The current rating, in Amps.
• Line Count: The number of power line inputs included on the MPC unit.
• Branch Count: The number of power branches present on the MPC unit.
• Line Frequency: The line frequency in Hertz.
• SW Version: The software version that is currently installed on the MPC unit.
8-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Status Screens
8.2. The Network Status Screen
The Network Status screen shows activity at the MPC's 16 virtual network ports, and lists
the TCP Port Number, Active/Free Status and current user name for each virtual
network port.
To view the Network Status Screen, access command mode using a password that
permits access to Administrator Level commands and then proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Type /SNand press [Enter].
• Web Browser Interface: Click on the "Network Status" link on the left hand side of
the screen.
The Network Status Screen lists the following items:
• Port: The virtual network port for each connection.
• TCP Port: The number of the TCP Port for each connection.
• Status: This column will read "Free" if no users are currently connected to the
corresponding port, or "Active" if a user has currently accessed command mode via
this port.
• User Name: The user name for the account that has currently accessed command
mode via this port. Note that when the Network Status Screen is viewed via the Text
Interface, usernames that are longer than 22 characters will be truncated and the
remaining characters will be displayed as two dots (..).
8-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Status Screens
8.3. The Plug Status Screen
The Plug Status screen shows the On/Off status of the MPC's switched outlets, and lists
user-defined Plug Names, Boot/Sequence Delay values, and Default On/Off settings.
Note:
• When the Plug Status Screen is viewed by an account with "Administrator"
or "SuperUser" command access, all MPC plugs are listed. When the Plug
Status Screen is viewed by an account with "User" or "ViewOnly" command
access, then the screen will list only the outlets that are allowed by that
account.
• Section 5.7 describes the procedure for configuring the plug parameters that
are listed in the Plug Status Screen.
• When the Plug Status Screen is viewed via the Text Interface, only the first 16
plugs will be displayed. If you are viewing the status of a 20 plug unit, press
[Enter] to display the additional plugs. Press [Esc] to exit from the Plug
Status Screen.
To view the Plug Status Screen, access the MPC command mode and then proceed as
follows:
• Text Interface: Type /Sand press [Enter].
• Web Browser Interface: Click on the "Plug Status" link on the left hand side of
the screen.
The Plug Status Screen lists the following parameters for each switched outlet:
• Plug: The alphanumeric number of each switched outlet.
Note: If an asterisk appears next to the plug number in this column, this
indicates that the plug is "busy", and still in the process of completing a
previous command. This could be a command that was invoked by the current
user or another user.
• Name: The user-defined name for each switched outlet.
• Status: The current On/Off status of each switched outlet. If the Status column
includes an asterisk, this means that this outlet is busy completing another
command, that was previously invoked, either by you or another user.
• Boot Seq. Delay: The user-defined Boot/Sequence Delay for each switched outlet.
• Default: The Default On/Off value for each switched outlet.
• Priority: The user-defined priority setting for each switched outlet.
8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Status Screens
8.4. The Plug Group Status Screen
The Plug Group Status screen shows the configuration details and On/Off status for the
MPC's user-defined Plug Groups.
Notes:
• When the Plug Group Status Screen is viewed by an account with
"Administrator" or "SuperUser" command access, all MPC plugs and plug
groups are listed. When the Plug Status Screen is viewed by an account with
"User" or "ViewOnly" command access, then the screen will list only the plugs
and plug groups that are allowed by that account.
• The procedure for defining parameters for individual plugs is described
in Section 5.7. The procedure for defining Plug Groups is described in
Section 5.6.
• In order to display the Plug Group Status screen, you must first define at least
one Plug Group as described in Section 5.6.
• When the Plug Group Status Screen is viewed via the Text Interface, only the
first 16 plugs will be displayed. Press [Enter] to display the additional plugs.
Press [Esc] to exit from the Plug Status Screen.
To view the Plug Group Status Screen, access the MPC command mode and then
proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Type /SGand press [Enter].
• Web Browser Interface: Click on the "Plug Group Status" link on the left hand side
of the screen. The MPC will display a screen that lists all currently defined Plug
Groups. Click the check box(es) next to the Plug Group(s) that you want to review,
and then click on the "Get Plug Group Status" button.
The Plug Group Status Screen lists the following parameters for each Plug Group:
• Group Name: The user-defined name for each Plug Group.
• Unit: This field will read "Local" if the outlet is located on your local MPC unit, or
"Remote", if the outlet is located on an optional, remote AUX MPC unit.
• Plug: The alphanumeric number of each switched outlet in the Plug Group.
• Plug Name: (Web Interface Only) The User Defined name for each switched outlet
in the Plug Group.
• Default: The Default On/Off value for each switched outlet in the Plug Group.
• Boot Seq. Delay: The user-defined Boot/Sequence Delay for each switched outlet
in the Plug Group.
• Status: The On/Off status of each switched outlet in the Plug Group. If the Status
column includes an asterisk, this means that this outlet is busy completing another
command, that was previously invoked, either by you or another user.
8-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Status Screens
8.5. The Current Metering Status Screen
The Current Metering Status screen is used to display up-to-date readings for Amps,
Watts, Voltage and temperature for the MPC unit as well as any optional AUX MPC units
that may be connected.
To view the Current Metering Log screen, access the MPC command mode and then
proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Type /Mand press [Enter].
• Web Browser Interface: Place the cursor over the "Current Metering" link on the
left hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the "Current
Metering Status" link.
The Current Metering Status screen lists the following parameters for your local MPC
unit, as well as any attached AUX/Remote MPC units:
• Current A: The total current consumption, in Amps, for power circuit A.
• Voltage A: The total voltage for power circuit A.
• Power A: The total power consumption, in Watts, for power circuit A.
• Current B: The total current consumption, in Amps, for power circuit B (if present.)
• Voltage B: The total voltage for power circuit B (if present.)
• Power B: The total power consumption, in Watts, for power circuit B (if present.)
• Current C: The total current consumption, in Amps, for power circuit C (if present.)
• Voltage C: The total voltage for power circuit C (if present.)
• Power C: The total power consumption, in Watts, for power circuit C (if present.)
• Current D: The total current consumption, in Amps, for power circuit D (if present.)
• Voltage D: The total voltage for power circuit D (if present.)
• Power D: The total power consumption, in Watts, for power circuit D (if present.)
• Temperature: The rack temperature(s) currently detected by the MPC unit(s).
• Total Current: The total current, in Amps, for both power circuits.
• Total Power: The total power, in Watts, for both power circuits.
• Over Temperature: Lists the values for the Initial Threshold and Critical Threshold
for the Over Temperature Alarms. Note that when the Current Metering Status
Screen is viewed via the Web Browser Interface, Over Temperature Alarm settings
are not listed. To view Over Temperature Alarm settings via the Web Browser
Interface, please use the Current History Screen as described in Section 8.6. For
more information on the Over Temperature Alarms, please refer to Section 7.2.
• Over Current: Lists the values (as a percentage) for the Initial Threshold and
Critical Threshold for the Over Current Alarms. For more information on the Over
Current Alarms, please refer to Section 7.1.
• Power Factor: The user-defined Power Factor value.
• Power Efficiency: The user-defined Power Efficiency value.
8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Status Screens
8.6. The Current History Screen
The Current History Screen is used to display current, voltage and temperature
readings as a function of time. In the Web Browser Interface, the Current History can be
displayed as a graph, downloaded in CSV format, or downloaded in XML format. In the
Text Interface, the Current History can be displayed as straight, ASCII data, or can be
downloaded in CSV or XML format.
To view the Current History Screen, access the MPC command mode and then proceed
as follows:
• Text Interface: Type /Land press [Enter] to access the "Display Logs" main
menu. From the "Display Logs" menu, type 3and press [Enter] to display the
Current Metering Log Menu. From the Current Metering Log Menu, you can display
the Current Metering Log in ASCII, CSV or XML format or erase the existing Current
Metering Log.
• Web Browser Interface: Place the cursor over the "Current Metering" link on the
left hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the "Current
History" link to display the Current Metering Log menu. At the Current Metering Log
menu, you can display the Current Metering Log as a graph, or download or display
the log in ASCII, CSV or XML format.
When the Current History Screen is displayed in ASCII, CSV or XML format, the MPC
will show Branch Current, Branch Voltage and temperature readings in tabular format.
When the Current History Screen is displayed in graph format, via the Web Browser
Interface, the MPC will display a page with four graphs:
• Branch Current: This graph shows current consumption versus time for each
available branch, and also shows the Initial Threshold and Critical Threshold values
for the Over Current Branch Alarms.
• Branch Voltage: This graph shows voltage consumption versus time for each
available branch.
• Line Current: This graph shows current consumption versus time for each
available line, and will also show the Initial Threshold and Critical Threshold values
for the Over Current Line Alarms.
Note: The Line Current History graph and the Over Current Line Alarms are not
available on MPC units that include two power inputs.
• Temperature: This graph shows unit temperature versus time for the MPC unit,
and also shows the Initial Threshold and Critical Threshold values for the Over
Temperature Alarms.
When the Current History Screen is displayed in graph format via the Web Browser, the
resulting page will also include a drop down menu which can be used to graph current
history for either the local MPC unit or remote MPC units, and another drop down menu
with can be used to graph current history on a daily, weekly, monthly or yearly basis,
or show "Live" current history, which graphs current consumption during the last ten
minutes (approximately.)
8-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Status Screens
To save Current History data, access command mode using an account that permits
Administrator level commands, and then proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Type /Land press [Enter] to show the Display Logs menu. From
the Display Logs menu, type 3and press [Enter] to display the Current History
menu, which allows you to either display the Current History log in ASCII format,
download and save in CSV or XML format, or erase the Current History Log.
• Web Browser Interface: Place the cursor over the "Current Metering" link on the
left hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the "Current
History" link to display the Current Metering Log menu, which offers the choice to
display Current History in graph, ASCII, CSV or XML format.
• ASCII: To save in ASCII format, click the "Display ASCII" link. The MPC will
prompt you to select the desired unit; use the drop down menu to select either
the local MPC unit or a Remote/AUX MPC unit and then click on the "Get History"
link. The MPC will display Current History data in ASCII format; to save the data,
copy and paste to Windows Notepad or a similar ASCII text editing program and
then save the file using the ".txt" filename extension.
• CSV: Click the "Display CSV" link. Windows will then prompt you to either save
the Current History data or display it using your default CSV program.
• XML: Click the "Display XML" link; the MPC will display Current History data
in XML format. To save the data, copy and paste to Windows Notepad or a
similar ASCII text editing program and then save the file using the ".xml" filename
extension.
For more information on Current Metering and Current History, please refer to
Section 5.3.4
8-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Status Screens
8.7. The Power Range Status Screen
The Power Range Status Screen can be used to display power consumption readings
over a user-selected period of time, for the MPC unit as well as any optional remote
MPC units that may be connected.
To view the Power Range Status Screen, access the MPC command mode using an
account that permits access to Administrator or SuperUser level commands and then
proceed as follows:
• Text Interface: Type /Land press [Enter] to access the "Display Logs" menu.
From the Display Logs menu, type 4and press [Enter] to display the Power
Metering Log menu, then type 1and press [Enter] to access the Power Metering
menu. At the Power Metering menu, you can use item 1to select the MPC unit to
view and item 2to select the duration period for the Power Metering status screen.
After selecting the unit to view and duration period, type 3and press [Enter] to view
the Power Metering Status Screen.
• Web Browser Interface: Place the cursor over the "Power Metering" link on the
left hand side of the screen. When the fly-out menu appears, click on the "Power
Range" link to display the Power Metering menu. At the Power Metering menu, key
in the start date and the end date, and then use the drop-down menu to determine
whether the MPC will display data for only the Local MPC unit, or display total
power consumption for the Local MPC unit and all connected AUX MPC units. Click
on the "Get Chart" button to display the Power Metering Status Screen.
The MPC will display a chart that graphs power consumption versus time, and also lists
the following for each available branch:
• Kilowatt Hours: The number of Kilowatt Hours that were consumed by each
branch during the specified time period.
• Average Current: The average current draw for each branch during the specified
time period.
• Average % of Max.: The average percentage of maximum available current that
was used by each branch during the specified time period.
• Average Power: The average power consumption for each branch during the
specified time period.
8-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Status Screens
8.8. The Power History Screen
The Power History Screen provides a graph that shows power consumption versus time.
To view the Power History Screen, access the MPC command mode using an account
that permits access to Administrator or SuperUser level commands, and then proceed
as follows:
Text Interface:
Type /Land press [Enter] to access the "Display Logs" menu. From the Display Logs
menu, type 4and press [Enter] to display the Power Metering Log menu, then type 2
and press [Enter] to access the Power History menu.
The Power History menu offers three options:
1. Display Power History: Type 1and press [Enter] to access the "Display Power
History" menu, which allows you to select the duration period (date) for the Power
History screen and then display the resulting data.
2. Download Power History in CSV Format: Type 2and press [Enter] to access
the "Download Power History CSV" menu, which allows you to select the duration
period (date) for the Power History report and then download the resulting data in
CSV format.
3. Download Power History in XML Format: Type 3and press [Enter] to access
the "Download Power History XML" menu, which allows you to select the duration
period (date) for the Power History report and then download the resulting data in
XML format.
Web Interface:
Place the cursor over the "Power Metering" link on the left hand side of the screen.
When the fly-out menu appears, click on the "Power History" link to display the Power
History menu. The Power History menu offers the options to display Power History as a
graph, or download the Power History in ASCII, CSV or XML format.
To save Power History data, click on the "Power History" link on the left hand side of
the screen to display the Power History menu, which offers the choice to display Power
History in graph, ASCII, CSV or XML format:
• ASCII: To save in ASCII format, click the "Display ASCII" link. The MPC will prompt
you to select the time resolution for the Power History report; use the drop down
menu to select either "Day" or "Month" and then click on the "Get History" link. The
MPC will display Power History data in ASCII format; to save the data, copy and
paste to Windows Notepad or a similar ASCII text editing program and then save
the file using the ".txt" filename extension.
• CSV: Click the "Display CSV" link. Windows will then prompt you to either save the
Power History data or display it using your default CSV program.
• XML: Click the "Display XML" link; the MPC will display Power History data in XML
format. To save the data, copy and paste to Windows Notepad or a similar ASCII
text editing program and then save the file using the ".xml" filename extension.
8-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Operation
The MPC offers two separate command interfaces; the Web Browser Interface and
the Text Interface. Both interfaces offer essentially the same command options and
features, and in most cases, parameters defined via the Web Browser Interface will also
apply when communicating via the Text Interface (and vice versa.)
9.1. Operation via the Web Browser Interface
When using the Web Browser Interface, switching commands are invoked via the Plug
Control Screen and Plug Group Control Screen.
9.1.1. The Plug Control Screen - Web Browser Interface
The Plug Control Screen lists the current On/Off status of the MPC’s Switched Outlets
and is used to control switching and rebooting of the outlets.
To invoke On, Off, or Reboot commands, proceed as follows:
1. Access the MPC Command Mode as described in Section 5.1.
2. Click on the "Plug Control" link on the left hand side of the screen to display the
Plug Control Screen.
Notes:
• When switching and reboot operations are initiated, Boot/Sequence Delay
times will be applied as described in Section 5.7.
• If a switching or reboot command is directed to a plug that is already in the
process of being switched or rebooted by a previous command, then the
new command will be placed in a queue until the plug is ready to receive
additional commands.
• If the Status column in the Plug Control Screen includes an asterisk, this
means that the corresponding outlet is busy completing a previously invoked
command.
• When the Plug Control Screen is displayed by an account that permits
Administrator or SuperUser level commands, all switched outlets will be
displayed.
• When the Plug Control Screen is displayed by a User level account, the
screen will only include the switched outlets that are allowed by the account.
9-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
3. Initiating a Reboot Cycle: From the Plug Control Menu, click the down arrow
in the "Action" column for the desired outlet(s), then select "Reboot" from the
dropdown menu and click on the "Confirm Plug Actions" button.
4. Switching Outlets Off: From the Plug Control Menu, click the down arrow in the
"Action" column for the desired outlet(s), then select "Off" from the dropdown menu
and click on the "Confirm Plug Actions" button.
5. Switching Outlets On: From the Plug Control Menu, click the down arrow in the
"Action" column for the desired outlet(s), then select "On" from the dropdown menu
and click on the "Confirm Plug Actions" button.
6. Set Outlets to Default On/Off Status: From the Plug Control Menu, click the down
arrow in the "Action" column for the desired outlet(s), then select "Default" from the
dropdown menu and click on the "Confirm Plug Actions" button..
When the "Confirm Plug Actions" button is pressed, the MPC will display a screen which
lists the selected action(s) and asks for confirmation before proceeding. To implement
the selected plug action(s), click on the "Execute Plug Actions" button. The MPC will
display a screen which indicates that a switching operation is in progress, then display
the Plug Status screen when the command is complete. At that time, the Status Screen
will list the updated On/Off status of each plug.
9.1.2. The Plug Group Control Screen - Web Browser Interface
The Plug Group Control Screen is used to send switching and reboot commands to
the user-defined Plug Groups. As described in Section 5.6, Plug Groups allow you to
specify a group of outlets that are dedicated to a similar purpose or client, and then
direct switching and reboot commands to the group, rather than switching one plug
at a time.
To invoke On, Off, or Reboot commands, proceed as follows:
1. Access the MPC Command Mode as described in Section 5.1.
2. Click on the "Plug Group Control" link on the left hand side of the screen to display
the Plug Group Control Screen.
Notes:
• When switching and reboot operations are initiated, Boot/Sequence Delay
times will be applied as described in Section 5.7.
• If a switching or reboot command is directed to a plug that is already in the
process of being switched or rebooted by a previous command, then the
new command will be placed in a queue until the plug is ready to receive
additional commands.
• When the Plug Group Control Screen is displayed by an account that permits
Administrator or SuperUser level commands, all user-defined Plug Groups
will be displayed.
• When the Plug Control Screen is displayed by a User level account, the
screen will only include the Plug Groups that are specifically allowed for
that account.
9-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
3. Initiating a Reboot Cycle: From the Plug Group Control screen, locate the Plug
Group(s) that you wish to control, then click the down arrow in the task selector box
in the "Action" column and use the dropdown menu to select the "Reboot" option.
Then click on the "Confirm Plug Group Actions" button to execute the Reboot
command.
4. Switching Plug Groups Off: From the Plug Group Control screen, locate the Plug
Group(s) that you wish to control, then click the down arrow in the task selector box
in the "Action" column and use the dropdown menu to select the "Off" option. Then
click on the "Confirm Plug Group Actions" button to switch all plugs in the group
Off.
5. Switching Plug Groups On: From the Plug Group Control screen, locate the Plug
Group(s) that you wish to control, then click the down arrow in the task selector box
in the "Action" column and use the dropdown menu to select the "On" option. Then
click on the "Confirm Plug Group Actions" button to switch all plugs in the group
On.
6. Setting Plug Groups to Default On/Off Status: From the Plug Group Control
screen, locate the Plug Group(s) that you wish to control, then click the down arrow
in the task selector box in the "Action" column and use the dropdown menu to
select the "Default" option. Then click on the "Confirm Plug Group Actions" button
to set all plugs in the selected Plug Group(s) to their user defined default On/Off
settings.
When the "Confirm Plug Group Actions" button is pressed, the MPC will display a screen
which lists the selected plug group(s) and action(s) and asks for confirmation before
proceeding. To implement the selected plug group action(s), click on the "Execute Plug
Group Actions" button. The MPC will display a screen which indicates that a switching
operation is in progress, then display the Plug Status screen when the command is
complete. At that time, the Status Screen will list the updated On/Off status of each
plug.
9-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
COMMAND MENU:
Version 1.60
DISPLAY
/S
/SG
/SN
/H
CONFIGURATION
/F
/P [AUX]
/PL [n]
/G
/N
/RB
/AC
/I
Plug Status
System Parameters
Port Parameters
Plug Parameters
Plug Grouping Parameters
Network Configuration
Reboot Options
Alarm Configuration
Reboot System
Plug Group Status
Network Status
Command Menu (Help)
Log
Current Metering
Site ID
/L
/M
/J [*]
CONTROL
<Enter>
/X
/C <n>
/D <n>
/BOOT <n>
/ON <n>
/OFF <n>
/DPL
/U
/K <k>
/UL
Add ,Y to bypass “Sure?”
MPC>
Enter Command Mode
Exit Command Mode
Connect - Local
Disconnect Port
Boot Plug n
/UF
/TEST
Upgrade Firmware
Test Network Options
+-------------------------------+
| n Plug/Port # or name
| n:n = plug n through plug n
| n+n = plug n and plug n
| k Key type (1-3)
| * “all”
| <> Required entry
| [] Optional entry
| , Link multiple plug commands|
+-------------------------------+
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Turn on Plug n
Turn off Plug n
Default all plugs
Send Parameter File
Send SSH Keys
Unlock (Invalid Access)
Figure 9.1: The Help Menu (Administrator Mode; Text Interface)
9.2. Operation via the Text Interface
When using the Text Interface, all switching functions are performed by invoking simple,
ASCII commands. ASCII commands are also used to display status screens and to log
out of command mode. The Text Interface includes a Help Menu, which summarizes all
available MPC commands. To display the Text Interface Help Menu (Figure 9.1), type /H
and press [Enter].
Note: When the Help Menu is displayed by a SuperUser, User or ViewOnly
level account, the screen will not include commands that are only available to
Administrator level accounts.
9.2.1. The Plug Status Screen - Text Interface
When you login to the MPC command mode via the Text Interface, the first screen
displayed after login is the Plug Status Screen. The Plug Status Screen lists the current
status of the MPC’s Switched AC Outlets and displays the currently defined Site I.D.
Message.
Normally, the Plug Status Screen will also be re-displayed each time a command
is successfully executed. Note however, that if desired, the Automated Mode (See
Section 9.3) can be enabled to suppress the display of the Plug Status Screen after
each command.
9-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
9.2.2. Switching and Reboot Commands - Text Interface
These commands can be used to switch or reboot the MPC’s switched plugs, and can
also be used to set plugs to the user-defined Power-Up Default values. Plugs may be
specified by name or number.
Notes:
• If a switching or reboot command is directed to a plug that is already being
switched or rebooted by a previous command, then the new command will
be placed in a queue until the plug is ready to receive additional commands.
• If an asterisk appears in the "Status" column for any given plug, this indicates
that the plug is currently busy, processing a previously issued command.
• Commands are not case sensitive. All commands are invoked by pressing
[Enter].
• When the Plug Control Screen is displayed by an account that permits
Administrator level command access, all switched outlets will be displayed.
• When you have accessed command mode using an account that permits
Administrator or SuperUser level commands, then switching and reboot
commands can be applied to all plugs.
• When you have accessed command mode via a User level account,
switching and reboot commands can only be applied to the plugs that are
specifically allowed for that account.
• If command confirmation is enabled, the MPC will display the Status Screen
after commands are successfully completed.
• When switching and reboot operations are initiated, Boot/Sequence Delay
times will be applied as described in Section 5.7.
• When used in On/Off/Reboot command lines, plug names and plug group
names are not case sensitive.
9-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
When switching and reboot commands are executed, the MPC will display a "Sure?"
prompt, wait for user response, and then complete the command. The unit will pause
for a moment while the command is executed, and then return to the Plug Status
Screen. To Switch Plugs, or initiate a Reboot Cycle, proceed as follows:
1. Switch Plug(s) On:
a) Local MPC Units or Individual MPC Units: To power-on a plug or Plug
Group, type /ON n and press [Enter]. Where "n" is the alphanumeric number
or name of the desired plug or Plug Group. For example:
/ON A1 [Enter] or /ON ROUTER [Enter]
b) AUX/Remote MPC Units: If your local MPC unit is connected to one or more
optional AUX/Remote MPC units, type /ON aux n and press [Enter]. Where
"aux" is the AUX/Remote unit and "n" is the alphanumeric number or name of
the desired plug. For Example, to switch On Plug A1 on the AUX1 unit, enter
the following:
/ON AUX1 A1 [Enter]
Note: Enter a space to separate the AUX parameter from the Plug number.
2. Switch Plug(s) Off:
a) Local MPC Units or Individual MPC Units: To power-off a plug or Plug
Group, type /OFF nand press [Enter]. Where "n" is the alphanumeric number
or name of the desired plug or Plug Group. Note that the “/OFF” command
can also be entered as “/OF”. For example:
/OFF B2 [Enter] or /OF ROUTER [Enter]
b) AUX/Remote MPC Units: If your local MPC unit is connected to one or more
optional AUX/Remote MPC units, type /OFF aux n and press [Enter]. Where
"aux" is the AUX/Remote unit and "n" is the alphanumeric number or name
of the desired plug. Note that the “/OFF” command can also be entered as
“/OF”. For Example, to switch Off Plug A2 on the AUX3 unit, enter either of the
following command lines:
/OFF AUX3 A2 [Enter] or /OF AUX3 A2 [Enter]
Note: Enter a space to separate the AUX parameter from the Plug number.
9-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
3. Reboot Plug(s):
a) Local MPC Units or Individual MPC Units: To initiate a Boot cycle, type
/BOOT nand press [Enter]. Where "n" is the alphanumeric number or name
of the desired plug or Plug Group. Note that the "/BOOT" command can also
be entered as "/BO". For example:
/BOOT B3 [Enter] or /BO ATMSWTCH [Enter]
b) AUX/Remote MPC Units: If your local MPC unit is connected to one or more
optional AUX/Remote MPC units, type /BOOT aux n and press [Enter].
Where "aux" is the AUX/Remote unit and "n" is the alphanumeric number
or name of the desired plug. Note that the “/BOOT” command can also be
entered as “/BO”. For Example, to boot Plug A4 on the AUX2 unit, enter either
of the following command lines:
/BOOT AUX2 A4 [Enter] or /BO AUX2 A4 [Enter]
Note: Enter a space to separate the AUX parameter from the Plug number.
4. Set All Plugs to Power Up Defaults: Type /DPLand press [Enter]. All plugs
permitted by your account will be set to their default On/Off status, which is defined
via the Plug Parameters Menu as described in Section 5.7.
Notes:
• When you have accessed command mode using an Administrator or
SuperUser level account, the Default command will be applied to all plugs.
• When you have accessed command mode using an account that permits
only User level command access, the Default command will only be applied
to the plugs specifically allowed by that account.
• The /DPL command is not available in ViewOnly mode.
• The /DPL command will also be applied to any optional AUX/Remote MPC
units that have been connected to your Local MPC unit's AUX Ports
5. Suppress Command Confirmation Prompt: To execute a Boot/On/Off command
without displaying the "Sure?" prompt, include the ",Y" option at the end of the
command line. For example:
/ON ROUTER,Y or /BOOT B2,Y
9-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
9.2.3. Applying Commands to Several Plugs - Text Interface
As described below, switching and reboot commands can be applied to only one
Switched AC Outlet, or to an assortment of outlets. In addition, when optional AUX/
Remote MPC units have been connected to the AUX ports, the same command line can
also be used to switch outlets on several different AUX units.
Note: When switching and reboot operations are initiated, Boot/Sequence
Delay times will be applied as described in Section 5.7.
1. Switch Several Plugs: To apply a command to several plugs, enter the numbers
or names for the plugs, separated by a "plus sign" (+) or a comma (,).
Note: In order for the "+" or "," operators to work, there must be no spaces
between the plug name or number and the plus sign or comma.
a) Switch Several Plugs on Local Unit: When switching more than one plug on
your local MPC unit, simply enter the numbers of the desired plugs, separated
by commas or plus signs. For example to switch plugs A1, A3, and A4 on your
local MPC unit Off, enter either of the following commands:
/OFF A1+A3+A4 [Enter]
or
/OFF A1,A3,A4 [Enter]
b) Switch Several Plugs on AUX/Remote Units: Use the same command format
described above, except pair each plug number with the AUX port where the
plug resides. For example, to switch On Plug A1 on the AUX1 unit, Plug A3
on the AUX2 unit and Plug A4 on the AUX3 unit, enter either of the following
command lines:
/ON AUX1 A1+AUX2 A3+AUX3 A4 [Enter]
or
/ON AUX1 A1,AUX2 A3,AUX3 A4 [Enter]
Note: Enter a space to separate the AUX parameter from the Plug number.
c) Switch Several Plugs on Both Local and AUX Units: Use the same
command format described above. However, note that in the case of the Local
MPC unit, it is not necessary to enter the AUX argument. For example, to
switch On Plug A1 on your Local MPC unit, Plug A1 on the AUX1 unit and Plug
A1 on the AUX2 unit, enter either of the following command lines:
/ON A1+AUX1 A1+AUX2 A1 [Enter]
or
/ON A1+AUX1 A1+AUX2 A1 [Enter]
Note: Enter a space to separate the AUX parameter from the Plug number.
9-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
2. Switch a Series of Plugs: To apply a command to a series of plugs, enter the
alphanumeric number for the plugs that mark the beginning and end of the series,
separated by a colon.
a) Switch a Series of Plugs on Local Unit: When switching a series of plugs
on your local MPC unit, simply enter the numbers for the plugs that mark the
beginning and end of the series, separated by a colon. For example to switch
On plugs A1 through A4 on your local MPC unit, enter the following:
/ON A1:A4 [Enter]
b) Switch a Series Plugs on AUX/Remote Units: If optional AUX/Remote units
are connected to your Local unit, use the same command format described
above for the Local Unit, except pair each plug number with the AUX port
where the plug resides. For example, to switch On plugs A1 through A4 on the
AUX 2 unit, enter the following:
/ON AUX2 A1:A4 [Enter]
Note: Enter a space to separate the AUX parameter from the Plug numbers.
c) Switch a Series of Plugs on Both Local and AUX Units: Use the same
command format described above for AUX units. However, note that in the
case of the Local MPC unit, it is not necessary to enter the AUX argument. For
example, to switch On Plugs A1 through A3 on your Local MPC unit, and Plugs
A2 through A4 on the AUX1 unit, enter either of the following command lines:
/ON A1:A3+AUX1 A2:A4 [Enter]
or
/ON A1:A3,AUX1 A2:A4 [Enter]
Note: Enter a space to separate the AUX parameter from the Plug number.
4. All Plugs: To apply a command to all plugs, enter an asterisk in place of the name
or number. For example, to Boot all plugs, enter the following:
/BO * [Enter]
Notes:
• When this command is invoked by a User level account, it will only be
applied to the plugs that are specifically allowed for that account.
• If your local MPC unit is connected to one or more AUX/Remote units,
commands that include the asterisk character will also be applied to all
permitted plugs on the AUX/Remote units.
9-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
9.2.4. Connecting to Serial Ports - Text Interface
In addition to their default functions, the Console Port, Remote Port and AUX ports can
also be used for connection to serial console ports on rack mounted devices, providing
convenient back door access. Normally, the Remote Port is used for connection to the
optional MPC-DISPLAY unit, the AUX ports are used for connection to additional, remote
MPC units, and the Console port is used for connection to a local control device.
However, if the Remote port and AUX ports have been reconfigured as described in
Section 5.8.2, then Administrators, SuperUsers and Users will be able to connect to
these ports by accessing command mode via the Text Interface and invoking the /C
command.
Notes:
• In order to connect to the Remote or AUX ports, you must first configure
these ports as serial ports as described in Section 5.8.2.
• User level accounts will only be able to connect to the ports that are
specifically permitted by the account as described in Section 5.5.
• Administrator accounts, SuperUser accounts and properly configured User
accounts will always be allowed to connect to the serial Console port.
To create a connection to a serial port, first make certain that the port is configured
for serial mode, then use an Administrator account, SuperUser account or properly
configured User account to access the Text Interface via the Network Port, and proceed
as follows:
1. Console Port Connection: To connect to the Console port, type /C 1and
press [Enter].
2. Remote Port Connection: To connect to the Remote port, type /C REMOTE
and press [Enter].
3. AUX Port Connection: To connect to one of the three AUX ports, proceed as
follows:
a) AUX1 Port: Type /C AUX1and press [Enter].
b) AUX2 Port: Type /C AUX2and press [Enter].
c) AUX3 Port: Type /C AUX3and press [Enter].
To terminate a connection between your port and another serial port, type ^X([Ctrl]
plus [X]) or issue the currently defined disconnect sequence. To terminate a connection
between two other serial ports, type /D n and then press [Enter] (where n is the
number or name of one of the two connected ports
9-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
9.3. The Automated Mode
The Automated Mode allows the MPC to execute switching and reboot commands,
without displaying menus or generating response messages. Automated Mode is
designed to allow the MPC to be controlled by a device which can generate commands
to control power switching functions without human intervention.
When Automated Mode is enabled, the /ON, /OFF, /BOOT, /DPL and /X commands
are executed without a "Sure?" confirmation prompt and without command response
messages; the only reply to these commands is the "MPC>" prompt, which is displayed
when the command is complete.
Note that although Automated Mode can be enabled using either the Web Browser
Interface or Text Interface, Automated Mode is designed primarily for users who wish to
send ASCII commands to the MPC without operator intervention, and therefore does not
specifically apply to the Web Browser Interface. When Automated Mode is enabled, the
Web Browser Interface can still be used to invoke On / Off / Boot commands.
Notes:
• When Automated Mode is enabled, all MPC password security functions are
disabled, and users are able to access System Level command functions
(including the configuration menus) and control plugs without entering a
password.
• If you need to enable the Automated Mode, but want to restrict network
access to MPC configuration menus, it is recommended to enable and
configure the IP Security Function as described in Section 5.9.3.
To enable/disable Automated Mode, access the System Parameters menu (see
Section 5.3,) then set the "Automated Mode" option to "On". When Automated Mode is
enabled, MPC functions will change as follows:
1. All Password Security Suppressed: When a user attempts to access command
mode, the password prompt will not be displayed at either the Console Port or
the Network Port. Unless specifically restricted by the IP Security Function, all
users will be allowed to access both switching and configuration functions, and
all commands will be immediately accepted without the requirement to enter a
password.
2. Status Screen Suppressed: The status screens will not be automatically
displayed after commands are successfully executed. Note however, that the /S
command can still be invoked to display the status screen as needed.
3. "Sure?" Prompt Suppressed: All commands are executed without prompting for
user confirmation.
4. Error Messages Suppressed: If the [Enter] key is pressed without entering a
command, the MPC will not respond with the "Invalid Command" message. Note
however, that an error message will still be generated if commands are invoked
using invalid formats or arguments.
All other status display and configuration commands will still function as normal.
9-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
9.4. Manual Operation
In addition to the command driven functions available via the Web Browser Interface and
Text Interface, some MPC functions can also be controlled manually. For a summary of
front panel control functions, please refer to Section 2.1 and Section 2.3.
9.5. Logging Out of Command Mode
When you have finished communicating with the MPC, it is important to always
disconnect using either the "LogOut" link (Web Browser Interface) or the /X command
(Text Interface), rather than by simply closing your browser window or communications
program. When communicating via a PDA, use the PDA's "Close" function to disconnect
and logout.
When you disconnect using the LogOut link or /X command, this ensures that the MPC
has completely exited from command mode, and is not waiting for the inactivity timeout
period to elapse before allowing additional connections.
9-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. SSH Encryption
In addition to standard Telnet protocol, the MPC also supports SSH connections, which
provide secure, encrypted access via network. In order to communicate with the MPC
using SSH protocol, your network node must include an appropriate SSH client.
Note that when the /K (Send SSH Key) command is invoked, the MPC can also provide
you with a public SSH key, which can be used to streamline connection to the MPC
when using SSH protocol.
Although you can establish an SSH connection to the unit without the public key,
the public key provides validation for the MPC, and once this key is supplied to the
SSH client, the client will no longer display a warning indicating that the MPC is not a
recognized user when the client attempts to establish a connection.
The /K command uses the following format:
/K <k> [Enter]
Where kis an argument that determines which type of public key will be displayed, and
the kargument offers the following options:
1. SSH1
2. SSH2 RSA
3. SSH2 DSA
For example, to obtain the public SSH key for an SSH2 RSA client, type /K 2and then
press [Enter]. Note that when capturing the SSH key, you can either configure your
terminal application to receive the parameter file, or simply copy and paste the resulting
SSH key.
Notes:
• Although the MPC does not support SSH1, the /K 1 command will still return
a key for SSH1.
• When capturing the SSH key, you can either configure your terminal
application to receive the parameter file, or simply copy and paste the
resulting key
10-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. Syslog Messages
The Syslog feature can create log records of each Alarm Event. As these event records
are created, they are sent to a Syslog Daemon, located at an IP address defined via the
Network Parameters menu.
11.1. Configuration
If you wish to employ this feature, you must set the real-time clock and calendar via the
System Parameters Menu, and define the IP address for the Syslog Daemon via the
Network Port Configuration menu.
To configure the Syslog function, please proceed as follows:
1. Access command mode: Note that the following configuration menus are only
available to accounts that permit Administrator level commands.
2. System Parameters Menu: Access the System Parameters Menu as described in
Section 5.3, then set the following parameters:
a) Set Clock and Calendar: Set the Real Time Clock and Calendar and/or
configure and enable the NTP server feature.
3. Network Parameters Menu: Access the Network Parameters Menu as described
in Section 5.9, then set the following parameters:
a) Syslog IP Address: Determine the IP address for the device that will run the
Syslog Daemon, then use the Network Port Configuration menu to define the IP
Address for the Syslog Daemon.
4. Syslog Daemon: In order to capture messages sent by the MPC, a computer must
be running a Syslog Daemon (set to UDP Port 514) at the IP address specified in
Step 3 above.
Once the Syslog Address is defined, Syslog messages will be generated whenever one
of the alarms discussed in Section 7 is triggered.
11-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Syslog Messages
TEST NETWORK OPTIONS:
1. SNMP Trap Test Manager 1
2. SNMP Trap Test Manager 2
3. Syslog Test
4. Ping
Enter: #<CR> to select,
<ESC> to exit ...
Figure 11.1: The Test Menu (Text Interface, Administrator Mode Only)
11.2. Testing Syslog Configuration
After you have configured the MPC as described in Section 11.1, the /TEST command
can be used to make certain that the function is properly set up. To test the Syslog
function, access the MPC command mode via the Text Interface using an account that
permits Administrator level commands, then type /TEST and press [Enter] to display
the Test Menu shown in Figure 11.1.
When the Syslog Test feature is selected, the MPC will attempt to send a test Syslog
message, using the current Syslog configuration. If the test message is not received by
your Syslog Daemon, review the procedure outlined in Section 11.1 to make certain the
MPC and the Syslog Daemon are properly configured.
In addition to providing a means to test the Syslog and SNMP Trap features, the Test
Menu also includes a Ping command option, which can be used in a manner similar
to the DOS ping command to check to make certain that the unit is communicating
properly. Note that in order for the Ping command to function with domain names, you
must first configure Domain Name Server parameters as described in Section 5.9.5.
11-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. SNMP Traps
SNMP is an acronym for "Simple Network Management Protocol". The SNMP Trap
function allows the MPC to send Alarm Notification messages to two different SNMP
managers, each time one of the Alarms discussed in Section 7 is triggered.
Note:
• The SNMP feature cannot be configured via the SNMP Manager.
• SNMP reading ability is limited to the System Group.
• The SNMP feature includes the ability to be polled by an SNMP Manager.
• Once SNMP Trap Parameters have been defined, SNMP Traps will be
sent each time an Alarm is triggered. For more information on Alarm
Configuration, please refer to Section 7.
12.1. Configuration:
To configure the SNMP Trap function, proceed as follows:
1. Access command mode using an account that permits Administrator level
commands.
2. SNMP Trap Parameters: Access the SNMP Trap Parameters Menu as described in
Section 5.9.7. Set the following:
a) SNMP Managers 1 and 2: The address(es) that will receive SNMP Traps
that are generated by one of the Alarms discussed in Section 7. Consult
your network administrator to determine the IP address(es) for the SNMP
Manager(s), then use the Network Parameters menu to set the IP address
for each SNMP Manager. Note that it is not necessary to define both SNMP
Managers.
Note: To enable the SNMP Trap feature, you must define at least one SNMP
Manager. SNMP Traps are automatically enabled when at least one SNMP
Manager has been defined.
b) Trap Community: Consult your network administrator, and then use the
Network Parameters menus to set the Trap Community.
Once SNMP Trap Parameters have been defined, the MPC will send an SNMP Trap each
time an alarm is triggered.
12-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP Traps
12.2. Testing the SNMP Trap Function
After you have finished setting up the SNMP Trap function, it is recommended to test the
configuration to ensure that it is working correctly. To test configuration of the SNMP
Trap function, proceed as follows:
1. Configure the SNMP Trap function as described in Section 12.1.
2. Access the Text Interface command mode using an account that permits
Administrator level commands, then invoke the "/TEST" command at the MPC
command prompt. Note that the /TEST Command is only available in Administrator
Mode.
3. Select Item 1 or 2 to send an SNMP test trap to Manager 1 or 2, respectively. It is
possible that the ARP table will not be properly setup. If this occurs a message to
that effect is displayed and the MPC immediately refreshes the ARP table. Repeat
steps 2 and 3 to try again.
For more information on the /TESTcommand and the Test Menu, please refer to
Section 11.2.
12-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13. Operation via SNMP
If SNMP Access Parameters have been defined as described in Section 5.9.6, then you
will be able to manage user accounts, control power and reboot switching and display
unit status via SNMP. This section describes SNMP communication with the MPC unit,
and lists some common commands that can be employed to manage users, control
switching and reboot actions and display unit status.
13.1. MPC SNMP Agent
The MPC’s SNMP Agent supports various configuration, control, status and event
notification capabilities. Managed objects are described in the WTI-MPC-MIB.txt
document, which can be found on the CDROM included with the MPC unit, or in the
user's guide archive on the WTI web site (http://www.wti.com/manuals.htm).
The WTI-MPC-MIB.txt document can be compiled for use with your SNMP client.
13.2. SNMPv3 Authentication and Encryption
The major limitations of SNMPv2 were the failure to include proper username/password
login credentials (v2 only used a password type of login, i.e., community name) and the
exclusion of encryption for data moving over the internet. SNMPv3 addresses both of
these shortcomings.
For SNMPv3, the MPC supports two forms of Authentication/Privacy: Auth/noPriv which
requires a username/password, but does not encrypt data going over the internet and
Auth/Priv which requires a username/password AND encrypts the data going over the
internet using DES (AES is not supported at this time). For the Password protocol, the
MPC supports either MD5 or SHA1.
13-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation via SNMP
13.3. Configuration via SNMP
MPC User accounts can be viewed, created, modified, and deleted via SNMP. User
accounts are arranged in a table of 128 rows, and indexed 1-128. User account
parameters, as seen through the SNMP, are summarized below.
• userTable::userName– 32 character username
• userTable::userPasswd– 16 character password
• userTable::userAccessLevel– Account access level.
0– View Access
1– User Access
2– Superuser Access
3– Administrator Access
• userTable::userPortAccess- Determines which AUX/Remote ports the user
will be allowed to connect to. This parameter only applies when the AUX/Remote
ports have been configured as serial ports.
• userTable::userLocalAccess– A string of 20 characters, with one character
for each of the 20 possible plugs on the LOCAL MPC unit. A ‘0’ indicates that the
account does not have access to the plug, and a ‘1’ indicates that the user does
have access to the plug.
• userTable::userAux1Access– A string of 20 characters, with one character for
each of the 20 possible plugs on the AUX1 MPC unit. ‘0’ indicates that the account
cannot access the plug, and ‘1’ indicates that the user can access the plug.
• userTable::userAux2Access– A string of 20 characters, with one character for
each of the 20 possible plugs on the AUX2 MPC unit. ‘0’ indicates that the account
cannot access the plug, and ‘1’ indicates that the user can access the plug.
• userTable::userAux3Access– A string of 20 characters, with one character for
each of the 20 possible plugs on the AUX3 MPC unit. ‘0’ indicates that the account
cannot access the plug, and ‘1’ indicates that the user can access the plug.
• userTable::userGroupAccess– A string of 54 characters, with one character
for each of the 54 possible plug groups in the system. ‘0’ indicates that the account
cannot access the group, and ‘1’ indicates that the user can access the group.
• userTable::userSerialAccess– Access to the serial interface
0– No access
1– Access
• userTable::userTelnetSshAccess– Access to the Telnet/SSH interface
0– No access
1- Access
• userTable::userWebAccess– Access to the Web interface
0– No access
1- Access
• userTable::userCurrentPowerMetering– Access to the systems current/
power metering
0– No access
1– Access
• userTable::userCallbackNum– 32 character callback number for account
• userTable::userSubmit– Set to 1to submit changes.
13-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation via SNMP
13.3.1. Viewing Users
To view users, issue a GET request on any of the user parameters for the index
corresponding to the desired user.
13.3.2. Adding Users
For an empty index, issue a SET request on the desired parameters. Minimum
requirement is a username and password to create a user, all other parameters will
be set to defaults if not specified. To create the user, issue a SET request on the
userSubmit object.
13.3.3. Modifying Users
For the index corresponding to the user you wish to modify, issue a SET request on
the desired parameters to be modified. Once complete, issue a SET request on the
userSubmit object.
13.3.4. Deleting Users
For the index corresponding to the user you wish to delete, issue a SET request on the
username with a blank string. Once complete, issue a SET request on the userSubmit
object.
13-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation via SNMP
13.4. Plug Control via SNMP
13.4.1. Controlling Plugs
ON, OFF, BOOT, and DEFAULT commands can be issued for plugs via SNMP. Plugs
are arranged in a table of N rows, where N is the number of plugs in the system. Plug
parameters are described below.
• plugTable::plugID– String indicating the plug's ID.
• plugTable::plugName- String indicating the plug's user-defined name.
• plugTable::plugStatus– Current state of the plug
0– Plug is OFF
1– Plug is ON
• plugTable::plugAction– Action to be taken on plug
1– Mark to turn ON (does not execute)
2– Mark to turn OFF (does not execute)
3– Mark to BOOT (does not execute)
4 – Mark to DEFAULT (does not execute)
5 – Mark to turn ON and execute plug actions
6 - Mark to turn OFF and execute plug actions
7 - Mark to BOOT and execute plug actions
8 - Mark to DEFAULT and execute plug actions
Set plugTable::plugActionto desired action, as specified by values 1-4 above, for
each plug index the action is to be applied to. For the last plug you wish to set before
executing the commands, use values 5-8 instead, which will invoke the requested
commands all at once.
13.4.2. Controlling Plug Groups
ON, OFF, BOOT, and DEFAULT commands can be issued for plug groups via SNMP.
Plug groups are arranged in a table of 54 rows, one row for each plug group in the
system. Plug Group parameters are described below.
• plugGroupTable::plugGroupName– String indicating the plug groups name
• plugGroupTable::plugGroupAction– Action to be taken on plug group
1– Mark to turn ON (does not execute)
2– Mark to turn OFF (does not execute)
3– Mark to BOOT (does not execute)
4– Mark to DEFAULT (does not execute)
5– Mark to turn ON and execute plug group actions
6- Mark to turn OFF and execute plug group actions
7- Mark to BOOT and execute plug group actions
8- Mark to DEFAULT and execute plug group actions
Set plugGroupTable::plugGroupActionto desired action, as specified by values
1-4 above, for each plug group index the action is to be applied to. For the last plug
group you wish to set before executing the commands, use values 5-8 instead, which
will invoke the requested commands all at once.
13-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation via SNMP
13.5. Viewing MPC Status via SNMP
Status of various components of the MPC can be retrieved via SNMP. Plug Status, and
Environmental Status are currently supported.
13.5.1. Plug Status
The status of each plug in the system can be retrieved using the command below.
• plugTable::plugStatus– The status of the plug.
0– Plug is OFF
1– Plug is ON
• plugTable::plugName- String indicating the plug's user-defined name.
13.5.2. Unit Environment Status
The environment status can be retrieved for various variables for all of the MPC units in
the system. The environmentUnitTable contains four rows, one row for each unit in the
system (LOCAL, AUX1, AUX2, AUX3.)
• environmentUnitTable::environmentUnitName– The unit (LOCAL, AUX1,
AUX2, or AUX3.)
• environmentUnitTable::environmentUnitTemperature– The temperature
of the given unit.
• environmentUnitTable::environmentUnitCurrentA– Unit's total current
for Branch A. Note that Current will be reported in tenths of an Amp (divide result
by ten to determine value in Amps.)
• environmentUnitTable::environmentUnitVoltageA– Unit voltage for
Branch A
• environmentUnitTable::environmentUnitPowerA– Power drawn by
Branch A
• environmentUnitTable::environmentUnitCurrentB– Unit's total current
for Branch B. Note that Current will be reported in tenths of an Amp.
• environmentUnitTable::environmentUnitVoltageB– Unit voltage for
Branch B
• environmentUnitTable::environmentUnitPowerB– Power drawn on
Branch B
• environmentUnitTable::environmentUnitCurrentC– Unit's total current
for Branch C. Note that Current will be reported in tenths of an Amp.
• environmentUnitTable::environmentUnitVoltageC– Unit voltage for
Branch C
• environmentUnitTable::environmentUnitPowerC– Power drawn on
Branch C
• environmentUnitTable::environmentUnitCurrentD– Unit's total current
for Branch D. Note that Current will be reported in tenths of an Amp.
• environmentUnitTable::environmentUnitVoltageD– Unit voltage for
Branch D
• environmentUnitTable::environmentUnitPowerD– Power drawn on
Branch D
13-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation via SNMP
13.5.3. System Environment Status
The system environment status for the local MPC unit and all connected AUX units can
be retrieved for the entire system.
• environmentBranchATotalCurrent– Total Branch A current for MPC system
(LOCAL and AUX units.) Note that Total Current will be reported in tenths of an Amp
(divide result by ten to determine value in Amps.)
• environmentBranchATotalPower– Total Branch A power for MPC system
(LOCAL and AUX units)
• environmentBranchBTotalCurrent– Total Branch B current for MPC system
(LOCAL and AUX units.) Note that Total Current will be reported in tenths of an Amp
(divide result by ten to determine value in Amps.)
• environmentBranchBTotalPower– Total Branch B power for MPC system
(LOCAL and AUX units)
• environmentBranchCTotalCurrent– Total Branch C current for MPC system
(LOCAL and AUX units.) Note that Total Current is reported in tenths of an Amp.
• environmentBranchCTotalPower– Total Branch C power for MPC system
(LOCAL and AUX units)
• environmentBranchDTotalCurrent– Total Branch D current for MPC system
(LOCAL and AUX units.) Note that Total Current is reported in tenths of an Amp.
• environmentBranchDTotalPower– Total Branch D power for MPC system
(LOCAL and AUX units)
• environmentSystemTotalCurrent- Total current drawn by Branch A plus
Branch B. Note that Total Current will be reported in tenths of an Amp (divide result
by ten to determine value in Amps.)
• environmentSystemTotalPower- Total power drawn by Branch A plus
Branch B.
• environmentMonthlyPowerLog- The monthly power usage log.
13.6. Sending Traps via SNMP
Traps that report various unit conditions can be sent to an SNMP Management Station
from the MPC. The following traps are currently supported.
• WarmStartTrap – Trap indicating a warm start
• ColdStartTrap – Trap indicating a cold start
• AlarmTrap – Trap indicating an alarm condition
• TestTrap – Test trap invoked by user via the Text Interface (CLI.)
• AlarmTrap – Trap indicating an alarm condition. A trap with a unique enterprise
OID is defined for every possible alarm in the system, under which several specific
trap-types are defined to indicate the setting or clearing of that particular alarm
condition.
13-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14. Setting Up SSL Encryption
This section describes the procedure for setting up a secure connection via an https
web connection to the MPC.
Note: SSL parameters cannot be defined via the Web Browser Interface. In
order to set up SSL encryption, you must contact the MPC via the Text Interface.
There are two different types of https security certificates: "Self Signed" certificates and
"Signed" certificates.
Self Signed certificates can be created by the MPC, without the need to go to an outside
service, and there is no need to set up your domain name server to recognize the MPC.
The principal disadvantage of Self Signed certificates, is that when you access the MPC
command mode via the Web Browser Interface, the browser will display a message
which warns that the connection might be unsafe. Note however, that even though this
message is displayed, communication will still be encrypted, and the message is merely
a warning that the MPC is not recognized and that you may not be connecting to the
site that you intended.
®
Signed certificates must be created via an outside security service (e.g., VeriSign ,
Thawte™, etc.) and then uploaded to the MPC unit to verify the user's identity. In order
to use Signed certificates, you must contact an appropriate security service and set up
your domain name server to recognize the name that you will assign to the MPC unit
(e.g., service.wti.com.) Once a signed certificate has been created and uploaded to
the MPC, you will then be able to access command mode without seeing the warning
message that is normally displayed for Self Signed certificate access.
WEB ACCESS:
HTTP:
1. Enable: On
2. Port:
80
HTTPS:
3. Enable: Off
4. Port: 443
SSL Certificates:
5. Common Name:
6. State or Province:
7. Locality:
8. Country:
9. Email Address:
10. Organization Name:
11. Organizational Unit:
12. Create CSR:
15. Export Server Private Key:
16. Import Server Private Key:
13. View CSR:
14. Import CRT:
Enter: #<CR> to change,
<ESC> to return to previous menu ...
Figure 14.1: Web Access Parameters (Text Interface Only)
14-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving and Restoring Configuration Parameters
14.1. Creating a Self Signed Certificate
To create a Self Signed certificate, access the Text interface via Telnet or SSH, using a
password that permits access to Administrator level commands and then proceed as
follows:
1. Type /Nand press [Enter] to display the Network Parameters menu.
2. At the Network Parameters menu, type 23and press [Enter] to display the
Web Access menu (Figure 14.1.) Type 3and press [Enter] and then follow the
instructions in the resulting submenu to enable HTTPS access.
3. Next, use the Web Access menu to define the following parameters.
Note: When configuring the MPC, make certain to define all of the following
parameters. Although most SSL applications require only the Common Name,
in the case of the MPC all of the following parameters are mandatory.
• 5. Common Name: A domain name, that will be used to identify the MPC unit.
If you will use a Self Signed certificate, then this name can be any name that you
choose, and there is no need to set up your domain name server to recognize
this name. However, if you will use a Signed certificate, then your domain name
server must be set up to recognize this name (e.g., service.wti.com.)
• 6. State or Province: The name of the state or province where the MPC unit will
be located (e.g., California.)
• 7. Locality: The city or town where the MPC unit will be located (e.g., Irvine.)
• 8. Country: The two character country code for the nation where the MPC will
be located (e.g., US.)
• 9. Email Address: An email address, that can be used to contact the person
responsible for the MPC (e.g., [email protected].)
• 10. Organizational Name: The name of your company or organization
(e.g., Western Telematic.)
• 11. Organizational Unit: The name of your department or division; if necessary,
any random text can be entered in this field (e.g., tech support.)
14-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving and Restoring Configuration Parameters
4. After you have defined parameters 5 through 11, type 12and press [Enter] (Create
CSR) to create a Certificate Signing Request. By default, this will overwrite any
existing certificate, and create a new Self Signed certificate.
a) The MPC will prompt you to create a password. Key in the desired password
(up to 16 characters) and then press [Enter]. When the MPC prompts you
to verify the password, key it again and then press [Enter] once. After a brief
pause, the MPC will return to the Web Access Menu, indicating that the CSR
has been successfully created.
b) When the Web Access Menu is re-displayed, press [Esc] several times until
you exit from the Network Parameters menu and the "Saving Configuration"
message is displayed.
5. After the new configuration has been saved, test the Self Signed certificate by
accessing the MPC via the Web Interface, using an HTTPS connection.
a) Before the connection is established, the MPC should display the warning
message described previously. This indicates that the Self Signed certificate
has been successfully created and saved.
b) Click on the "Yes" button to proceed. The MPC will prompt you to enter a user
name and password. After keying in your password, the main menu should be
displayed, indicating that you have successfully accessed command mode.
14.2. Creating a Signed Certificate
To create a Signed certificate, and eliminate the warning message, first set up your
domain name server to recognize the Common Name (item 5) that you will assign to
the unit. Next, complete steps one through five as described in Section 14.1 and then
proceed as follows:
1. Capture the Newly Created Certificate: Type 13and press [Enter] (View CSR).
The MPC will prompt you to configure your communications (Telnet) program to
receive the certificate. Set up your communications program to receive a binary
file, and then press [Enter] to capture the file and save it. This is the Code Signing
Request that you will send to the outside security service (e.g., VeriSign, Thawte,
etc.) in order to have them sign and activate the certificate.
2. Obtain the Signed Certificate: Send the captured certificate to the outside
security service. Refer to the security service's web page for further instructions.
14-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving and Restoring Configuration Parameters
3. Upload the Signed Certificate to the MPC: After the "signed" certificate is
returned from the security service, return to the Web Access menu.
a) Access the MPC command mode via the Text Interface using an account that
permits Administrator level commands as described previously, then type /N
and press [Enter] to display the Network Parameters menu, and then type 23
and press [Enter] to display the Web Access menu.
b) From the Web Access menu, type 14and press [Enter] (Import CRT) to
begin the upload process. At the CRT Server Key submenu, type 1and press
[Enter] to choose "Upload Server Key."
c) Use your communications program to send the binary format Signed
Certificate to the MPC unit. When the upload is complete, press [Escape] to
exit from the CRT Server Key submenu.
d) After you exit from the CRT Server Key submenu, press [Escape] several times
until you have exited from the Network Parameters menu and the "Saving
Configuration" message is displayed.
4. After the configuration has been saved, test the signed certificate by accessing the
MPC via the Web Browser Interface, using an HTTPS connection. For example, if
the common name has been defined as "service.companyname111.com", then you
would enter "https://service.companyname111.com" in your web browser's
address field. If the Signed Certificate has been properly created and uploaded,
the warning message should no longer be displayed.
14.3. Downloading the Server Private Key
When configuring the MPC's SSL encryption feature (or setting up other security/
authentication features), it is recommended to download and save the Server Private
Key. To download the Server Private Key, access the Text interface via Telnet or SSH,
using a password that permits access to Administrator level commands and then
proceed as follows:
1. Type /Nand press [Enter] to display the Network Parameters menu.
2. At the Network Parameters menu, type 23and press [Enter] to display the Web
Access menu (Figure 14.1.)
a) To download the Server Private Key from the MPC unit, make certain that SSL
parameters have been defined as described in Section 14.1, then type 15and
press [Enter] and store the resulting key on your hard drive.
b) To upload a previously saved Server Private Key to the MPC unit, make certain
that SSL parameters have been defined as described in Section 14.1, then type
16and press [Enter] and follow the instructions in the resulting submenu.
14-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15. Saving and Restoring Configuration Parameters
Once the MPC is properly configured, parameters can be downloaded and saved as an
ASCII text file. Later, if the configuration is accidentally altered, the saved parameters
can be uploaded to automatically reconfigure the unit without the need to manually
assign each parameter.
Saved parameters can also be uploaded to other identical MPC units, allowing rapid
set-up when several identical units will be configured with the same parameters.
The "Save Parameters" procedure can be performed from any terminal emulation
©
program (e.g. HyperTerminal™, TeraTerm , etc.), that allows downloading of ASCII files.
Note: The Save and Restore features described in this section are only
available via the Text Interface.
15.1. Sending Parameters to a File
1. Start your terminal emulation program and access the Text Interface command
mode using an account that permits Administrator level commands.
2. When the command prompt appears, type /Uand press [Enter]. The MPC will
prompt you to configure your terminal emulation program to receive an ASCII
download.
a) Set your terminal emulation program to receive an ASCII download, and the
specify a name for a file that will receive the saved parameters (e.g. MPC.PAR).
b) Disable the Line Wrap function for your terminal emulation program. This will
prevent command lines from being broken in two during transmission.
3. When the terminal emulation program is ready to receive the file, return to the
MPC’s Save Parameter File menu, and press [Enter] to proceed. MPC parameters
will be saved on your hard drive in the file specified in Step 2 above.
4. The MPC will send a series of ASCII command lines which specify currently
selected parameters. When the download is complete, press [Enter] to return to
the command prompt.
15-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving and Restoring Configuration Parameters
15.2. Restoring Saved Parameters
This section describes the procedure for using your terminal emulation program to send
saved parameters to the MPC.
1. Start your terminal emulation program and access the MPC’s Text Interface
command mode using an account that permits Administrator level commands.
2. Configure your terminal emulation program to upload an ASCII text file.
3. Upload the ASCII text file with the saved MPC parameters. If necessary, key in the
file name and directory path.
4. Your terminal emulation program will send the ASCII text file to the MPC. When the
terminal program is finished with the upload, make certain to terminate the Upload
mode.
Note: If the MPC detects an error in the file, it will respond with the "Invalid
Parameter" message. If an error message is received, carefully check the
contents of the parameters file, correct the problem, and then repeat the Upload
procedure.
5. If the parameter upload is successful, the MPC will send a confirmation message,
and then return to the command prompt. Type /Sand press [Enter], the Status
Screen will be displayed. Check the Status Screen to make certain the unit has
been configured with the saved parameters.
15-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving and Restoring Configuration Parameters
15.3. Restoring Previously Saved Parameters
If you make a mistake while configuring the MPC unit, and wish to return to the
previously saved parameters, the Text Interface's "Reboot System" command (/I)
offers the option to reinitialize the MPC unit using previously backed up parameters.
This allows you to reset the unit to previously saved parameters, even after you have
changed parameters and saved them.
Notes:
• The MPC will automatically backup saved parameters once a day, shortly
after Midnight. This configuration backup file will contain only the most
recently saved MPC parameters, and will be overwritten by the next night's
daily backup.
• When the /I command is invoked, a submenu will be displayed which
offers several Reboot options. Options 5 and 6 are used to restore the
configuration backup file. The dates shown next to options 5 and 6 indicate
the date that you last changed and saved unit parameters.
• If the daily automatic configuration backup has been triggered since the
configuration error was made, and the previously saved configuration has
been overwritten by newer, incorrect parameters, then this function will not
be able to restore the previously saved (correct) parameters.
To restore the previously saved configuration, proceed as follows:
1. Access command move via the Text Interface, using a username/password that
permits access to Administrator level commands (see Section 5.1.1.)
2. At the MPC command prompt, type /Iand press [Enter]. The MPC will display a
submenu that offers several different reboot options.
3. At the submenu, you may choose either Item 5 (Reboot & Restore Last Known
Working Configuration) or Item 6 (Restore Last Known Working Configuration.) Key
in the number for the desired option, and then press [Enter].
Note: When invoking the /I command to restore configuration parameters,
Item 5 is recommended.
4. The MPC will reboot and previously saved parameters will be restored.
15-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16. Upgrading MPC Firmware
When new, improved versions of the MPC firmware become available, the "Upgrade
Firmware" function can be used to update the unit. Updates can be uploaded via FTP
or SFTP protocols.
Notes:
• The FTP/SFTP servers can only be started via the Text Interface.
• All other ports will remain active during the firmware upgrade procedure.
• If the upgrade includes new parameters or features not included in the
previous firmware version, these new parameters will be set to their default
values.
• The upgrade procedure will require approximately 15 minutes for your local
MPC unit, plus 30 minutes for each attached AUX/Remote unit.
1. Obtain the update file. Firmware modifications can either be mailed to the
customer, or downloaded from WTI. Place the upgrade CDR in your disk drive or
copy the file to your hard drive.
2. Access Text Interface command mode via Serial Port, Telnet or SSH client session,
using a username/password and port that permit Administrator level commands.
3. When the command prompt appears, type /UFand then press [Enter]. The MPC
will display a screen which offers the following options:
a) Start FTP/SFTP Servers Only (Do NOT default parameters): To proceed
with the upgrade, while retaining user-defined parameters, type 1and press
[Enter]. All existing parameter settings will be restored when the upgrade is
complete.
b) Start FTP/SFTP Servers & Default (Keep IP parameters & SSH Keys): To
proceed with the upgrade and default all user-defined parameters except for
the IP Parameters and SSH Keys, type 2and press [Enter]. When the upgrade
is complete, all parameter settings except the IP Parameters and SSH Keys,
will be reset to factory default values.
c) Start FTP/SFTP Servers & Default (Default ALL parameters): To proceed
with the upgrade, and reset parameters to default settings, type 3and press
[Enter]. When the upgrade is complete, all parameters will be set to default
values.
Note that after any of the above options is selected, the MPC will start the receiving
servers and wait for an FTP/SFTP client to make a connection and upload a valid
firmware binary image.
4. To proceed with the upgrade, select either option 1 or option 2. The MPC will
display a message that indicates that the unit is waiting for data. Leave the current
Telnet/SSH client session connected at this time.
16-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Upgrading MPC Firmware
5. Open your FTP/SFTP application and (if you have not already done so,) login to the
MPC unit, using a username and password that permit access to Administrator
level commands.
6. Transfer the md5 format upgrade file to the MPC.
7. After the file transfer is complete, the MPC will install the upgrade file and then
reboot itself and break all port connections. Note that it will take approximately 10
minutes to complete the installation process. The unit will remain accessible until it
reboots.
a) Some FTP/SFTP applications may not automatically close when the file transfer
is complete. If this is the case, you may close your FTP/SFTP client manually
after it indicates that the file has been successfully transferred.
b) When the upgrade process is complete, the MPC will send a message to all
currently connected network sessions, indicating that the MPC is going down
for a reboot.
Note: Do not power down the MPC unit while it is in the process of installing
the upgrade file. This can damage the unit's operating system.
8. If you have accessed the MPC via the Network Port, in order to start the FTP/SFTP
servers, the MPC will break the network connection when the system is reinitialized.
• If you initially selected "Start FTP/SFTP Servers and Save Parameters", you may
then reestablish a connection with the MPC using your former IP address.
• If you initially selected "Start FTP/SFTP Servers and Default Parameters", you
must then login using the MPC’s default IP address (Default = 192.168.168.168)
or access command mode via Serial Port 1 or 2 or via Modem.
When firmware upgrades are available, WTI will provide the necessary files. At that time,
an updated Users Guide or addendum will also be available.
16-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
17. Command Reference Guide
17.1. Command Conventions
Most commands described in this section conform to the following conventions:
• Text Interface: Commands discussed in this section, can only be invoked via the
Text Interface. These commands cannot be invoked via the Web Browser Interface.
• Slash Character: Most MPC Text Interface commands begin with the Slash
Character (/).
• Apply Command to All Plugs: When an asterisk is entered as the argument of
the /ON(Switch Plugs On), /OFF(Switch Plugs Off) or /BOOT(Reboot Plugs)
commands, the command will be applied to all plugs. For example, to reboot all
allowed plugs, type /BOOT * [Enter].
• Command Queues: If a switching or reboot command is directed to a plug that
is already being switched or rebooted by a previous command, then the new
command will be placed into a queue until the plug is ready to receive additional
commands.
• "Busy" Plugs: If the "Status" column in the Plug Status Screen includes an asterisk,
this means that the plug is currently busy, and is in the process of completing a
previously issued command. If a new command is issued to a busy plug, then the
new command will placed into a queue to be executed later, when the plug is ready
to receive additional commands.
• Plug Name Wild Card: It is not always necessary to enter the entire plug name.
Plug names can be abbreviated in command lines by entering the first character(s)
of the name followed by an asterisk (*). For example, a plug named "SERVER" can
be specified as "S*". Note however, that this command would also be applied to
any other plug name that begins with an "S".
• Suppress Command Confirmation Prompt: When the /ON(Switch Plug
On), /OFF(Switch Plug Off), /BOOT(Reboot Plug) or /DPL(Default All Plugs)
commands are invoked, the ",Y" option can be included to override the Command
Confirmation ("Sure?") prompt. For example, to reboot Plug A4 without displaying
the Sure prompt, type /BOOT A4,Y [Enter].
• Enter Key: Most commands are invoked by pressing [Enter].
• Configuration Menus: To exit from a configuration menu, press [Esc].
17-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command Reference Guide
17.2. Command Summary
Function
Command Syntax
Command Access Level
Admin. SuperUser
User ViewOnly
Display
Plug Status
/S [Enter]
/SG [Enter]
/SN [Enter]
/H [Enter]
/L [Enter]
/M [Enter]
/J[*] [Enter]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Plug Group Status
Network Status
Help Menu
X
X
X
X
X
X
Log Functions
Current Metering
Site ID / Unit Information
Control
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Exit Command Mode
Boot Plug n
/X [Enter]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
/BOOT <n>[,Y] [Enter]
/ON <n>[,Y] [Enter]
/OFF <n>[,Y] [Enter]
/DPL[,Y] [Enter]
/C [n] [Enter]
/D [n] [Enter]
Turn Plug n On
Turn Plug n Off
Default All Plugs
Connect to Port
Disconnect from Port
Send Parameter File
Send SSH Keys
Unlock Invalid Access
Configuration
System Parameters
Serial Port Parameters
Plug Parameters
Plug Group Parameters
Network Configuration
Reboot Options
Alarm Configuration
Reboot System
/U [Enter]
/K <n> [Enter]
/UL [Enter]
/F [Enter]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
/P [n] [Enter]
/PL [Enter]
/G [Enter]
/N [Enter]
/RB [Enter]
/AC [Enter]
/I [Enter]
Upgrade Firmware
/UF [Enter]
Test Network Configuration /TEST [Enter]
In Administrator Mode and SuperUser Mode, all MPC outlets are displayed. In User Mode
and ViewOnly Mode, the Plug Status Screen will only include the plugs that are allowed by
your account.
In Administrator Mode, all Plug Groups are displayed. In SuperUser Mode, User Mode and
ViewOnly Mode, the Plug Group Status Screen will only include the Plug Groups that are
allowed by your account.
In Administrator Mode, the Help Menus will list all MPC commands. In the SuperUser Mode,
User Mode and ViewOnly Mode, the Help Menus will only list the commands that are allowed
by the access level.
If the optional asterisk (*) argument is included in the command line, this command will also
show model numbers, current ratings and software versions for the local MPC unit as well as
any other MPC units that may be attached to the AUX ports.
The ",Y" argument can be included in the command line to suppress the command
confirmation prompt.
The /C command can only be used to connect to the Remote and AUX ports when those
ports have been specifically configured as serial ports.
In SuperUser Mode, configuration menus can be displayed, but parameters cannot be
changed.
17-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command Reference Guide
17.3. Command Set
This Section provides information on all Text Interface commands, sorted by
functionality
17.3.1. Display Commands
/S
Display Plug Status Screen
Displays the Plug Status Screen, which lists the current On/Off state, plus the plug
number, plug name, Boot/Sequence Delay value and Default On/Off value for each plug.
For more information, please refer to Section 8.3.
Note: In Administrator Mode and SuperUser Mode, all MPC outlets are
displayed. In User Mode and ViewOnly Mode, the Plug Status Screen will only
include the plugs allowed by your account.
Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User, ViewOnly
Format: /S [Enter]
/SG
Display Plug Group Status Screen
Displays the Plug Group Status Screen, which lists the available Plug Groups, the
numbers of the plugs included in each Plug Group, the current On/Off state, the user-
defined Boot/Sequence Delay value, and the Default On/Off value for each plug. For
more information, please refer to Section 8.4.
Note: In Administrator Mode all user defined Plug Groups are displayed. In
SuperUser Mode, User Mode and ViewOnly Mode, the Plug Group Status
Screen will only include the Plug Groups allowed by your account.
Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User, ViewOnly
Format: /SG [Enter]
/SN
Display Network Status
Displays the Network Status Screen, which lists current network connections to the
MPC's Network Port. For more information, please refer to Section 8.2.
Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User, ViewOnly
Format: /SN [Enter]
17-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command Reference Guide
/H
Help
Displays a Help Screen, which lists all available Text Interface commands along with a
brief description of each command.
Note: In the Administrator Mode, the Help Screen will list the entire MPC Text
Interface command set. In SuperUser Mode, User Mode and ViewOnly Mode,
the Help Screen will only list the commands that are allowed by the account's
access level.
Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User, ViewOnly
Format: /H [Enter]
/L
Log Functions
Provides access to a menu which allows you to display the Audit Log, Alarm Log
Current Metering Log and Power Metering Log. For more information on Log Functions,
please refer to Section 5.3.4 and Section 8.
Availability: Administrator, SuperUser
Format: /L [Enter]
/M
Current Metering Status
Displays the Current Metering Status Screen, which lists current, voltage and power
readings, and also lists the trigger settings for the Over Temperature Alarm and the Over
Current Alarm. When one or more AUX/Remote MPC units are connected to your local
MPC unit, the Current Metering Status screen will also show current levels at the AUX/
Remote units. For more information on Current Metering, please refer to Section 8.4.
For more information on Alarm Configuration, please refer to Section 7.
Availability: Administrator, SuperUser
Format: /M [Enter]
/J
Display Site ID / Unit Information
Displays the user-defined Site I.D. message. If the optional asterisk (*) argument is
included in the command line, the command will also show model numbers, current
ratings, and software versions for the local MPC unit, as well as any remote MPC units
that may be connected to the AUX ports.
Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User, ViewOnly
Format: /J[*] [Enter]
Where *(asterisk) is an optional command argument, that is used to display the
model number, current rating and software version for the local MPC unit, as well as
any remote MPC units that may be connected to the AUX ports.
17-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command Reference Guide
17.3.2. Control Commands
/X Exit Command Mode
Exits command mode. When issued at the Network Port, also ends the Telnet session.
Note: If the /X command is invoked from within a configuration menu, recently
defined parameters may not be saved. In order to make certain that parameters
are saved, always press the [Esc] key to exit from all configuration menus and
then wait until "Saving Configuration" message has been displayed and the
cursor has returned to the command prompt before issuing the /X command.
Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User, ViewOnly
Format: /X [Enter]
/BOOT Initiate Boot Cycle
Initiates a boot cycle at the selected plug(s) or Plug Group(s). When a Boot cycle is
performed, the MPC will first switch the selected plug(s) Off, then pause for the user-
defined Boot/Sequence Delay Period, then switch the plug(s) back on. The /BOOT
command can also be entered as /BO.
Note: When this command is invoked in Administrator Mode or SuperUser
Mode, it can be applied to all MPC plugs and Plug Groups. When this
command is invoked in User Mode, it can only be applied to the plugs and/or
Plug Groups that have been enabled for the account.
Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User
Format: /BOOT [aux] <n>[,Y] [Enter] or /BO [aux] <n> [Enter]
Where:
aux
If you are directing the command to an outlet on an attached AUX/Remote
MPC unit, then the auxargument must be included in the command line
in order to route the command to the appropriate MPC unit. If your local
MPC unit is not connected to AUX/Remote MPC units, then there is no
need to include this argument in the command line.
n
The number or name of the plug(s) or Plug Group(s) that you intend to
boot. To apply the command to several plugs, enter a plus sign (+)
between each plug number. To apply the command to a range of plugs,
enter the numbers for the first and last plugs in the range, separated by a
colon character (:). To apply the command to all plugs allowed by your
account, enter an asterisk character (*).
,Y
(Optional) Suppresses the command confirmation prompt.
Examples:
Assume that your account allows access to Plug A2 and Plug A3. To initiate a boot
cycle at Plugs A2 and A3, without displaying the optional command confirmation
prompt, invoke either of the following command lines:
/BOOT A2+A3,Y [Enter] or /BO A2+A3,Y [Enter]
To direct the /BOOT command to plug B4 on an AUX/Remote MPC unit connected to
the AUX2 port on your local MPC unit, invoke either of the following command lines:
/BOOT aux2 B4 [Enter] or /BO aux2 B4 [Enter]
17-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command Reference Guide
/ON
Switch Plug(s) ON
Switches selected plugs(s) or Plug Group(s) On, as described in Section 9.2.2. When
the /ON command is used to switch more than one plug, Boot/Sequence Delay Period
will be applied as described in Section 5.7.
Note: When this command is invoked in Administrator Mode or SuperUser
Mode, it can be applied to all MPC plugs and Plug Groups. When this
command is invoked in User Mode, it can only be applied to the plugs and/or
Plug Groups that have been enabled for the account.
Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User
Format: /ON [aux] <n>[,Y] [Enter]
Where:
aux
If you are directing the command to an outlet on an attached AUX/Remote
MPC unit, then the auxargument must be included in the command line
in order to route the command to the appropriate MPC unit. If your local
MPC unit is not connected to AUX/Remote MPC units, then there is no
need to include this argument in the command line.
n
The number or name of the plug(s) or Plug Group(s) that you intend to
Switch On. To apply the command to several plugs, enter a plus sign (+)
between each plug number. To apply the command to a range of plugs,
enter the numbers for the first and last plugs in the range, separated by a
colon character (:). To apply the command to all plugs allowed by your
account, enter an asterisk character (*).
,Y
(Optional) Suppresses the command confirmation prompt.
Examples:
Assume that your account allows access to Plug A2 and Plug A3. To switch Plugs A2
and A3 On, without displaying the optional command confirmation prompt, invoke
following command line:
/ON A2+A3,Y [Enter]
To direct the /ON command to plug B4 on an AUX/Remote MPC unit connected to the
AUX2 port on your local MPC unit, invoke the following command line:
/ON aux2 B4 [Enter]
17-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command Reference Guide
/OFF
Switch Plug(s) OFF
Switches selected plugs(s) or Plug Group(s) Off, as described in Section 9.2.2. When
the /OFF command is used to switch more than one plug, Boot/Sequence Delay Period
will be applied as described in Section 5.7. The /OFF command can also be entered
as /OF.
Note: When this command is invoked in Administrator Mode or SuperUser
Mode, it can be applied to all MPC plugs and Plug Groups. When invoked in
User Mode, the command can only be applied to the plugs and/or Plug Groups
that are enabled for the account.
Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User
Format: /OFF [aux] <n>[,Y] [Enter] or /OF <n>[,Y] [Enter]
Where:
aux
If you are directing the command to an outlet on an attached AUX/Remote
MPC unit, then the auxargument must be included in the command line
in order to route the command to the appropriate MPC unit. If your local
MPC unit is not connected to AUX/Remote MPC units, then there is no
need to include this argument in the command line.
n
The number or name of the plug(s) or Plug Group(s) that you intend to
Switch Off. To apply the command to several plugs, enter a plus sign (+)
between each plug number. To apply the command to a range of plugs,
enter the numbers for the first and last plugs in the range, separated by a
colon character (:). To apply the command to all plugs allowed by your
account, enter an asterisk character (*).
,Y
(Optional) Suppresses the command confirmation prompt.
Examples:
Assume that your account allows access to Plug A2 and Plug A3. To switch Plugs
A2 and A3 on your local MPC unit Off, without displaying the optional command
confirmation prompt, invoke either of the following command lines:
/OFF A2+A3,Y [Enter] or /OF A2+A3,Y [Enter]
To direct the /OFF command to plug B4 on an AUX/Remote MPC unit connected to the
AUX2 port on your local MPC unit, invoke either of the following command lines:
/OFF aux2 B4 [Enter] or /OF aux2 B4 [Enter]
17-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command Reference Guide
/DPL
Set All Plugs to Default States
Sets all switched outlets to their user-defined default state. For information on setting
outlet defaults, please refer to Section 5.7.
Notes:
• When this command is invoked in Administrator Mode or SuperUser Mode,
it will be applied to all MPC outlets. When invoked in User Mode, the
command will only be applied to the plugs that are allowed by the account.
• If one or more optional AUX/Remote MPC units are connected to the AUX
ports on your local unit, then the /DPL command will be applied to both the
local MPC unit as well as any AUX/Remote MPC units.
Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User
Format: /DPL[,Y] [Enter]
Where ,Y is an optional command argument, which can be included to suppress the
command confirmation prompt.
/C
Connect to Serial Port
When the RJ-45 AUX Ports and/or Remote Port have been configured as Serial Ports
as described in Section 5.8.2, the /C command can be used to create a connection
between the Network port and a serial mode AUX or Remote Port. In addition, the /C
command can also be invoked to create a connection between the Network Port and
the Console Port.
Notes:
• User level accounts can only connect to the ports that are specifically
permitted by the account.
• The /C command cannot be used to create a connection between two serial
ports.
• Administrator and SuperUser level accounts are allowed to connect to any
MPC Serial Port.
• To terminate a serial port connection, either type ^X([Ctrl] plus [X]) or invoke
the currently defined disconnect sequence.
Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User
Format: /C <x> [Enter]
Where xis the name of the serial port that you wish to connect to. The available
ports are "1" (the Console Port), "Remote", "AUX1", "AUX2" and "AUX3".
17-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command Reference Guide
/D
Third Party Disconnect
Invoke the /D command at your resident port to disconnect two other ports.
Notes:
• The /D command cannot disconnect your resident port
• Users are limited to the ports that are specifically allowed by their accounts.
Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User
Format: /D[/Y] <x> [x] [Enter]
Where:
/Y
x
(Optional) suppresses the "Sure?" prompt.
Is the number or name of the port(s) to be disconnected. To disconnect
all allowed ports, enter an asterisk. To disconnect a Telnet session, enter
the "Nn" format Network Port Number.
Response: "Are you Sure (y/n)?", if Y, unit will respond with "Disconnected".
Example: To disconnect Port 2 from Port 3 without the "Sure?" prompt, access the
Command Mode from a third port with Administrator level command capability and type:
/D/Y 2 [Enter] or /D/Y 3 [Enter]
/U
Send Parameters to File
Sends all MPC configuration parameters to an ASCII text file as described in Section 13.
This allows you to back up the configuration of your MPC unit.
Availability: Administrator
Format: /U [Enter]
/K
Send SSH Key
Instructs the MPC to provide you with a public SSH key for validation purposes. This
public key can then be provided to your SSH client, in order to prevent the SSH client
from warning you that the user is not recognized when you attempt to create an SSH
connection. For more information, please refer to Section 10.
Availability: Administrator
Format: /K k [Enter]
Where k is a required argument, which indicates the key type. The k argument
provides the following options: 1 (SSH1), 2 (SSH2 RSA), 3 (SSH2 DSA.)
17-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command Reference Guide
/UL
Unlock Port (Invalid Access Lockout)
Manually cancels the MPC’s Invalid Access Lockout feature. Normally, when a series of
failed login attempts are detected, the Invalid Access Lockout feature can shut down the
network port for a user specified time period in order to prevent further access attempts.
When the /UL command is invoked, the MPC will immediately unlock all network ports
that are currently in the locked state.
Availability: Administrator
Format: /UL [Enter]
Response: The MPC will unlock all MPC RS232 Ports.
17.3.3. Configuration Commands
/F
Set System Parameters
Displays a menu which is used to define the Site ID message, create user accounts, set
the system clock, and configure and enable the Invalid Access Lockout feature. Note
that all functions provided by the /F command are also available via the Web Browser
Interface. For more information, please refer to Section 5.3.
Availability: Administrator
Format: /F [Enter]
/P
Set Serial Port Parameters
Displays a menu that is used to select options and parameters for the MPC's Serial
Console Port, Remote Port and AUX Ports. Note that all functions provided by the /P
command are also available via the Web Browser Interface. Section 5.8 describes
the procedure for defining serial port parameters for both the Console Port and RJ-45
Remote and AUX ports.
Availability: Administrator
Format: /P <n> [Enter]
Where nis used to indicate the Console Port or AUX/Remote ports. The available
command arguments are "1" (Console Port) or AUX(AUX and Remote Ports.)
/PL
Set Plug Parameters
Displays a menu that is used to select options and parameters for the MPC's switched
outlets (plugs). Note that all functions provided by the /PL command are also available
via the Web Browser Interface. Section 5.7 describes the procedure for defining plug
parameters.
Availability: Administrator
Format: /PL [Enter]
17-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command Reference Guide
/G
Plug Group Parameters
Displays a menu that is used to View, Add, Modify or Delete Plug Groups. For more
information on Plug Groups, please refer to Section 5.6.
Availability: Administrator
Format: /G [Enter]
/N
Network Port Parameters
Displays a menu which is used to select parameters for the Network Port. Also allows
access to the IP Security function, which can restrict network access by unauthorized IP
addresses. Note that all of the functions provided by the /N command are also available
via the Web Browser Interface. For more information, please refer to Section 5.9.
Availability: Administrator
Format: /N [Enter]
/RB
Reboot Options
Displays a menu that is used to configure Scheduled Reboots and Ping-No-Answer
Reboots. Scheduled Reboots allow the MPC to be rebooted on a regular basis,
according to a user defined schedule. Ping-No-Answer Reboots allow the MPC to
automatically reboot user-designated outlets when a user-specified IP address does not
respond to a Ping command. For more information on Reboot options, please refer to
Section 6.
Note: If desired, the Ping-No-Answer Reboot function can also be configured
to send email notification whenever a Ping-No-Answer Reboot is generated. For
more information, please refer to Section 7.6.
Availability: Administrator
Format: /RB [Enter]
/AC
Alarm Configuration Parameters
Displays a menu that is used to configure and enable the Over Current Alarms, Over
Temperature Alarms, Circuit Breaker Open Alarm, Lost Communication with AUX Units
Alarm, Lost Voltage Alarm, Ping-No-Answer Alarm, and the Invalid Access Lockout
Alarm. When properly configured, the Over Current Alarms and Over Temperature
Alarms offer the option of "Load Shedding", which allows the unit to automatically switch
Off user-specified non-essential outlets when temperature or current readings exceed
user-defined values. For more information on Alarm Configuration, please refer to
Section 7.
Availability: Administrator
Format: /AC [Enter]
17-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command Reference Guide
/I
Reboot System (Default)
Reinitializes the MPC unit and offers the option to keep user-defined parameters or reset
to default parameters. As described in Section 5.10.1, the /I command can also be used
to restore the unit to previously saved parameters. When the /I command is invoked,
the unit will offer the following reboot options:
• Unit to Reboot
• Reboot Only (Do NOT default parameters)
• Reboot & Default (Keep IP Parameters & SSH Keys; Default all other parameters)
• Reboot & Default (Default ALL parameters)
• Reboot & Restore Last Known Working Configuration
• Restore Last Known Working Configuration
Note: When optional AUX/Remote MPC units have been connected to the AUX
ports on your local MPC unit, the "Unit to Reboot" option allows you to specify
which unit will be rebooted. When this option is selected, the MPC will display
an additional submenu, which allows you to select the local unit, any of the AUX
MPC units, or all connected MPC units.
Availability: Administrator, SuperUser
Format: /I [Enter]
/UF
Upgrade Firmware
When new versions of the MPC firmware become available, this command is used to
update existing firmware as described in Section 15.
Note: When a firmware upgrade is performed, the MPC will require 15 minutes
to upgrade your local MPC unit, plus 30 minutes for each optional AUX/Remote
MPC unit that is connected to your local MPC unit.
Availability: Administrator
Format: /UF [Enter]
/TEST Test Network Parameters
Displays a menu which is used to test configuration of the Syslog and SNMP Trap
functions and can also be used to invoke a Ping Command. For more information,
please refer to Section 11.2 and Section 12.2.
Notes:
• In order for the ping command to function with domain names, Domain Name
Server parameters must be defined as described in Section 5.9.5.
• The Test Menu's Ping command is not effected by the status of the Network
Parameters Menu's Ping Access function.
Availability: Administrator
Format: /TEST [Enter]
17-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A.
Specifications
Physical/Environmental:
Models MPC-8H-1, MPC-8H-2, MPC-18H-1 and MPC-18H-2:
Width: 19” (48.3 cm) (Including Rack Brackets)
Depth: 8.7” (22.1 cm)
Height: 1.75” (4.5 cm) One Rack U
Models MPC-16H-1 & MPC-16H-2:
Width: 19” (48.3 cm) (Including Rack Brackets)
Depth: 8.7” (22.1 cm)
Height: 3.5” (8.9 cm) Two Rack U
Models MPC-20V-1 & MPC-20V-2:
Width: 4.5” (11.4 cm)
Depth: 3.0” (7.6 cm)
Length: 31” (78.7 cm) Zero Rack U
All Other MPC-V Series Models:
Width: 4" (10.2 cm)
Depth: 3.2" (8.1 cm)
Length: 31" (78.7 cm)
Operating Temperature: 32˚F to 122˚F (0˚C to 50˚C)
Humidity: 10 - 90% RH
Apx-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B.
Interface Descriptions
DB9
DCD
RXD
TXD
DTR
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Carrier Detect
Data In
Data Out
RS232
Port
Ready Out
X
X
RTS
CTS
Request to Send
Clear to Send
Figure B.1: RS232 Console Port Interface
B.1. Serial Console Port (RS232)
DCD and DTR hardware lines function as follows:
1. When connected:
a) If either port is set for Modem Mode, the DTR output at either port reflects the
DCD input at the other end.
b) If neither port is set for Modem Mode, DTR output is held high (active).
2. When not connected:
a) If the port is set for Modem Mode, upon disconnect DTR output is pulsed for
0.5 seconds and then held high.
b) If the port is not set for Modem Mode, DTR output is controlled by the DTR
Output option (Serial Port Parameters Menu, Option 23). Upon disconnect,
Option 23 allows DTR output to be held low, held high, or pulsed for 0.5
seconds and then held high.
Apx-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
B.2. RJ-45 AUX Port Interface
The MPC AUX Port is described in Figure B.2 below.
Note: The MPC AUX ports do not support DTR or DCD lines.
RJ-45
Pin No.
RTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Request to Send
X
TXD
Data Out
Ground
GND
Pin 1
Pin 8
RXD
CTS
Data In
X
Clear to Send
Figure B.2: MPC Series AUX Port Interface
Apx-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C.
Connecting Devices to AUX & Remote Ports
As discussed in Section 2, the MPC unit includes three RJ-45 AUX Ports and one
RJ-45 Remote Port. Typically, the AUX ports are used for connection to up to three
additional MPC units (allowing control of up to 80 plugs), and the Remote Port is used
for connection to the optional MPC-DISPLAY unit (allowing you to easily see readings on
MPC units that may be buried deep within an equipment rack.)
Note however, that in addition to their primary functions, the AUX and Remote ports
can also be used for connection to routers and other DCE devices as described in this
section. For a description of the AUX port interface, please refer to Appendix B.2. For
a description of the procedure that is used to configure the AUX and Remote ports for
connection to DCE devices, please refer to Section 5.8.2.
C.1. Connecting an Auxiliary MPC Unit to the MPC AUX Port
Use a DX9F-DTE-RJ Snap Adapter and an RJ-45 Straight Cable to connect an optional
Auxiliary MPC unit to the AUX Port on your MPC master unit as shown in Figure C.1 and
Figure C.2 below. For instructions on unit configuration, please refer to Section 5.
RJ-45
DB-9F
Pin No.
Pin No. Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
CTS
DCD
Pin 1
1
2
RXD
GND
5
X
Pin 8
Pin 1
3
4
7
TXD
DTR
RTS
Female
Figure C.1: DX9F-DTE-RJ Snap Adapter Interface
DB-9M DTE
RJ-45 DCE
AUX Port
Optional
Auxilliary
MPC Unit
Console Port
MPC Series
Master
Straight
RJ-45 Cable
Unit
DX9F-DTE-RJ
Snap Adapter
Figure C.2: Connecting an Optional MPC Auxilliary unit to the MPC Master Unit
Apx-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
C.2. Connecting an MPC-DISPLAY Unit to an MPC Master Unit
Use an RJ-45 Straight Cable to connect the optional MPC-DISPLAY unit to your MPC
series master unit. Connect one end of the cable to the RJ-45 serial port on the back of
the MPC-DISPLAY unit, and the other end of the cable to the "Remote" port on the face
of the MPC series master unit.
When connecting an MPC-DISPLAY unit to your MPC master unit, please refer to
Figure C.3 below:
RJ-45
Remote Port
RJ-45
Serial Port
MPC Series
Master Unit
Optional
MPC-DISPLAY
Unit
Straight
RJ-45 Cable
Figure C.3: Connecting an Optional MPC-DISPLAY Unit to an MPC Series Master Unit
Apx-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
C.3. Connecting Other RJ-45 DCE Devices to the AUX & Remote Ports
An RJ-ROLL Rollover cable can be used to connect the following RJ-45 DCE devices to
the MPC's RJ-45 serial ports:
• Cisco Routers with RJ-45 DCE Console Port
• Sun Routers with RJ-45 DCE Console Port
• Other Devices with RJ-45 DCE Console Port
When connecting an RJ-45 DCE device to the MPC, please refer to Figure C.4 below:
AUX or Remote
RJ-45 DCE
RJ-45 DCE
Serial Port
Cisco Router,
Sun Router
or other
Serial Port
MPC Series
Unit
Rollover
RJ-45 Cable
Device
with RJ-45
DCE Interface
Figure C.4: Connecting RJ-45 DCE Devices to the AUX & Remote Ports
Apx-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D.
Customer Service
Customer Service hours are from 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM, PST, Monday through Friday.
When calling, please be prepared to give the name and make of the unit, its serial
number and a description of its symptoms. If the unit should need to be returned for
factory repair it must be accompanied by a Return Authorization number from Customer
Service.
WTI Customer Service
5 Sterling
Irvine, California 92618
Local Phone: (949) 586-9950
Toll Free Service Line: 1-888-280-7227
Service Fax: (949) 457-8138
Email: [email protected]
Apx-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E.
Rack Mounting
The MPC offers a variety of different mounting options to allow the unit to be easily
mounted in almost any equipment rack available. In addition to the standard "L"
brackets included with all units, MPC-20V series units can also be mounted using
mounting buttons, "Hook" Brackets for Dell™ style racks or Zero-U Pocket Brackets for
©
APC style racks or any rack that features a "pocket" or channel for Zero Unit mounting.
E.1. "L" Bracket Mounting
The standard "L" brackets, included with the unit, can be used to mount all MPC-8H,
MPC-18H, MPC-16H or MPC-20V series units in most standard equipment racks.
The "L" brackets allow horizontal format MPC-H units to be mounted facing forward or
facing backward or mounted in the front of the rack or rear of the rack. When the "L"
brackets are used with the vertical format MPC-20V, units can also be mounted facing
either side of the rack.
1. Attaching the Brackets to the MPC: First determine which direction the MPC will
face after mounting, and then secure the "L" Brackets to the MPC accordingly, using
the screws provided with the mounting brackets.
a) MPC-8H & MPC-18H Series (Horizontal) Units: Each end of the unit has
four screw holes that are used for mounting the "L" brackets to the MPC. The
"L" brackets can either be mounted facing the front of the unit or the rear of the
unit, using the same four holes. Use four screws (supplied with the bracket) to
secure each bracket to the MPC.
b) MPC-16H Series (Horizontal) Units: Each end of the unit has eight screw
holes; four screw holes for front mounting, and four screw holes for rear
mounting. Use four screws (supplied with the bracket) to secure an "L" bracket
to each side of the unit. If the front of the MPC unit will face outwards, use the
front four holes; if the back of the MPC unit will face outward, use the rear four
holes.
c) MPC-20V Series (Vertical) Units: The "L" brackets can either be attached to
the back or side of the unit, and the unit can also be installed to face the front,
rear, or either side of the equipment rack. Each end of the MPC features seven
screw holes for attaching the brackets, this allows you to mount the brackets
on either side of the unit, and in one of two possible positions on the back.
When mounting the brackets on the back of the unit, use screw holes 1 and 2
or 2 and 3 as shown in Figure E.1. Use two screws (supplied with the bracket)
to secure one bracket to the top of the MPC and the second bracket to the
bottom of the MPC.
Apx-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
4
2
5
1
3
Figure E.1: Mounting Holes; MPC-20V Back Panel
Equipment Rack
MPC-20V Unit
Retaining Screws
“L” Bracket
Figure E.2: Attaching the "L" Brackets to the Equipment Rack (MPC-20V Shown)
2. Attaching the "L" Brackets to the Equipment Rack: Determine which direction
the MPC unit will face in the rack, then line the "U" slots in the "L" Bracket up with
two holes in the equipment rack mounting strip. Make certain that the unit is
level, and then use two screws to secure each "L" bracket to the rack as shown in
Figure E.2.
Apx-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
E.2. Mounting Buttons
The Mounting Buttons allow MPC-20V series (vertical) units to be mounted in any
equipment rack that includes mounting button holes, as shown in Figure E.4.
Depending on the location of the mounting button holes in your equipment rack, this
can allow the MPC-20V to be mounted on the posts at the rear of the equipment rack, or
in some cases, even mounted on the outside of the rack corner posts.
1. Attaching the Mounting Buttons to the MPC-20V: Attach four Mounting Buttons
to the back panel of the MPC-20V unit as described below:
a) Insert a retaining screw into each Mounting Button with the top of the screw
aligned with the large end of the Mounting Button, as shown in Figure E.3.
b) Locate the screw holes for the Mounting Buttons on the MPC-20V back panel.
There are two screw holes at the top of the back panel and two holes at the
bottom. Note that the screw holes for the Mounting Buttons are not the same
holes shown in Figure E.1; the Mounting Button screw holes are located at the
top of the unit, directly above the screw holes shown in Figure E.1, and at the
bottom, about three inches below the holes shown in Figure E.1.
c) Firmly attach two Mounting Buttons to the screw holes at the top of the MPC
and two Mounting Buttons to the screw holes at the bottom of the unit.
2. Attach the MPC to the Equipment Rack: Align the Mounting Buttons with the top
end of each mounting button hole (see Figure E.4.) Press the mounting buttons
into the mounting button holes, and then slide the unit downwards, so each
Mounting Button seats firmly in the lower end of each corresponding mounting
button hole.
Retaining Screw
Mounting Button
Screw Hole on
MPC-20V Back Panel
Figure E.3: Attaching Mounting Buttons to MPC-20V (Vertical) Units
Approx. 3/4 Inch
Approx. 3/8 Inch
Figure E.4: Mounting Button Holes
Apx-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
E.3. Hook Bracket Mounting (MPC-20V Series Only)
The Hook Brackets allow MPC-20V series (vertical) units to be easily mounted in Dell™
style equipment racks. The Hook Brackets can be used to mount the MPC-20V in any
rack that includes Dell style mounting rails as shown in Figure E.5.
The Hook Brackets, which are supplied in a right and left hand pair, allow MPC-20V units
to be mounted to any one of the four corner posts in a Dell style equipment rack.
1. Attaching the Brackets to the MPC-20V: First determine which direction the
MPC will face after mounting, and then secure the Hook Brackets to the MPC-20V
accordingly, using the screws provided.
a) The Hook Brackets can be attached to the back or side of the unit, and the unit
can also be installed to face the front, rear, or either side of the equipment rack.
b) Each end of the MPC features seven screw holes for attaching the brackets,
this allows you to mount the brackets on either side of the unit, and in one of
two possible positions on the back. When mounting the brackets on the back
of the unit, use screw holes 1 and 2 or 2 and 3 as shown in Figure E.1.
c) Use two screws (supplied with the bracket) to secure one bracket to the top of
the MPC-20V and the second bracket to the bottom of the MPC-20V.
2. Attaching the Hook Brackets to the Equipment Rack: Insert each Hook Bracket's
tab into one of the square holes in the corner post, then slide the bracket down
until the hook locks in place with the rack as shown in Figure E.5. After each Hook
Bracket is firmly seated, use a retaining screw to secure each Hook Bracket to the
equipment rack.
Hook Bracket
Hook Bracket Tab
(Hooked into Rack)
MPC-20V Unit
Equipment
Rack
Figure E.5: Attaching the Hook Brackets to the Equipment Rack
Apx-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
E.4. Zero-U Pocket Bracket Mounting (MPC-20V Series Only)
©
The Zero-U Pocket Brackets allow you to mount MPC-20V series units in APC style
racks, that include a pocket or channel for zero unit mounting as shown in Figures E.6
and E.7.
The Zero-U Pocket Brackets allow MPC-20V series units to be mounted directly into the
channel or pocket at the rear of the rack, and can either be nested inside the pocket
in order to use as little space as possible, or mounted on top of the pocket, in order to
provide a convenient cavity for cable routing. When the Zero-U Pocket Bracket is used,
the MPC-20V will always be mounted facing the interior of the rack.
1. Attaching the Zero-U Pocket Brackets to the MPC:
a) Determine whether the MPC-20V will be nested within the rack pocket, or will
be mounted outside the pocket in order to provide a cavity for cable routing.
b) Insert the screws supplied with the bracket into the three holes in the center
of the Zero-U Pocket Bracket and then thread them into holes 4, 2 and 5 (see
Figure E.1) on the back of the MPC-20V unit as shown in Figures E.6 and E.7.
2. Attaching the Zero-U Pocket Brackets to the Equipment Rack: Align the MPC
with the rack pocket and then use appropriate retaining screws to secure the
Zero-U Pocket Brackets to the rack pocket as shown in Figures E.6 and E.7.
Rack Pocket
Mounting
Screws
Mounting
Screws
MPC-20V
Unit
Zero-U Pocket
Bracket
Figure E.6: Zero-U Pocket Brackets (Cross Section; Nested in Pocket)
Rack Pocket
Mounting
Screws
Cavity Left
for Routing
Zero-U Pocket
Bracket
Cables
MPC-20V
Unit
Figure E.7: Zero-U Pocket Brackets (Cross Section; Outside Pocket to Allow Cable Cavity)
Apx-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
E.5. Universal Mounting Bracket (MPC-20V Series Only)
The Universal Mounting Brackets are used to mount vertical format MPC units to
equipment rack posts or mounting pads. The Universal Mounting Brackets are often
used in cases where the power supply cable enters the rack from above, and allow the
unit to be easily mounted upside down.
To mount the unit using the Universal Mounting Brackets, proceed as follows:
1. Attach the Brackets to the Unit:
a) Locate the two pairs of mounting holes at the top and bottom of the MPC back
panel. There should be a pair of holes at the top of the back panel and a pair
of holes at the bottom.
b) Refer to Figure E-8 on the following page, and then use the retainer screws to
attach one Universal Mounting Bracket to the top of the back panel, and one
Universal Mounting Bracket to the bottom of the back panel. Prior to attaching
the mounting brackets, make certain that the beveled edge of the screw holes
faces outward, so the head of the screw will nest within the bevel.
2. Attach the MPC unit to the Rack:
a) Use a retaining screw to secure the top mounting bracket to the equipment
rack post or mounting pad as shown in Figure E-8.
b) Make certain that the MPC hangs level and straight, and then use a retaining
screw to attach the bottom mounting bracket to the lower portion of the rack
post or mounting pad, securing the unit to the rack.
Apx-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Universal Mounting
Bracket
Screw Holes
Retaining
Screws
MPC Back Panel
Figure E.8: Attaching the Universal Mounting Bracket to the MPC Unit
Universal Mounting
Bracket
Screw
Hole
Retaining
Screw
Rack
Post
MPC Front Panel
Figure E.9: Attaching the Universal Mounting Brackets to the Rack
Apx-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix F.
Output Cable Keeper
The Output Cable Keeper extends approximately two inches above the face of the
MPC-20V series unit, and provides a convenient means to tie output cables in place, to
prevent cables from being accidentally disconnected.
To install the Output Cable Keeper on your MPC-20V series unit, please proceed as
follows:
1. Refer to the electrical safety warnings in Section 4 and at the beginning of this
user's guide, and then disconnect the input power supply cables from the MPC-20V
unit. Next, remove the output cables from the MPC-20V, noting the precise plug/
location where each output cable was plugged in.
2. Align the Output Cable Keeper with the face of the MPC-20V unit as shown in
Figure F.1 below. Note that there are two horizontally aligned screw holes at the
top of the MPC-20V unit, and two vertically aligned screw holes at the bottom of
the MPC-20V unit. Use the supplied mounting screws to securely attach the Cable
Keeper to the face of the MPC-20V unit.
3. Reconnect the output cables to the same locations where they were previously
plugged in, and then use a tie wrap to secure each output cable to the Cable
Keeper.
Mounting
Screws
Outlet Cable Keeper
AUX
3
AUX
1
AUX
2
REMOTE
DISPLA
Y
T
AUL
DEF
AUDIBLE
ALARM
Ethernet
10/100
ON
Y
Screw
Holes
DISPLA
SELECTION
CONSOLE
TEMP
TS
VOL
TS
KWA
AMPS
.8
.8
8
.8
.8
INPUT
B
8
INPUT
A
ntroller
ower Co
Managed
P
-20V
MPC
Mounting
Screws
Screw
Holes
Figure F.1: Installing the Output Cable Keeper (MPC-20V Series Units Only)
Apx-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Trademark and Copyright Information
WTI and Western Telematic are trademarks of Western Telematic Inc.. All other product
names mentioned in this publication are trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective companies.
Information and descriptions contained herein are the property of Western Telematic
Inc.. Such information and descriptions may not be copied, disseminated, or distributed
without the express written consent of Western Telematic Inc..
© Copyright Western Telematic Inc., 2008.
August, 2008
Part Number: 13762, Revision: H
Trademarks and Copyrights Used in this Manual
Hyperterminal is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation. Portions
copyright Hilgraeve, Inc.
ProComm is a trademark of Datastorm Technologies, Inc™.
Crosstalk is a trademark of Digital Communications Associates, Inc.
Teraterm is a copyright of Ayera Technologies, Inc.
Dell is a trademark of the Dell corporation
APC is a copyright of the American Power Conversion Corporation.
BlackBerry is a registered trademark of Research In Motion Limited.
JavaScript is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Telnet is a trademark of Telnet Communications, Inc.
Thawte is a trademark of Thawte, Inc.
VeriSign is a registered trademark of VeriSign, Incorporated
All other trademarks mentioned in this manual are acknowledged to be the property of
the trademark owners.
Apx-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
A
Audit Log
Authentication
SNMPv3
Accept Break
Network Port
Serial Port
5-44 Authentication Port
Access Level
LDAP Group
Accounting Port
RADIUS
RADIUS
TACACS
Authentication Protocol
SNMPv3
Authentication Type
Add
LDAP Group
Ping-No-Answer Reboot
Plug Groups
5-62 Automated Mode
6-2 Auto Recovery
5-34 AUX Port
Scheduled Reboot
User Accounts
Via SNMP
AUX Units
Connecting Devices
Interface
Address
AUX Ports
Circuit Breaker Open Alarm
Invalid Access Lockout Alarm
Lost Communication Alarm
Lost Voltage Alarm
Over Current Alarms
Over Temperature Alarms
Ping-No-Answer Alarm
Power Cycle Alarm
Administrator
Horizontal Units
Vertical Units
7-19 AUX Port Configuration
7-21 AUX Port Connection
7-4 AUX Units
B
Basic Configuration
Baud Rate
Serial Port
Bind Type
Bits and Parity
Serial Port
BlackBerry
Boot/Sequence Delay
BOOT Command
Text Interface
Boot Priority
Button Functions
Network Port
Serial Port
Supervisor Mode
Administrator Mode
Network Port
Agency Approvals
Alarm Clear Threshold
Over Current Alarms
Over Temperature Alarm
Alarm Configuration
Over Current Alarms
Over Temperature Alarms
Alarm Indicator Lights
Alarm Log
Alarm Set Threshold
Over Current Alarms
Over Temperature Alarm
Allow List
C
Cable Keepers
Output
Callback Security
Callback Attempts
Callback Delay
Callback Enable
Callback Number
Certificate Signing Request
Channel Mounting
Circuit Breakers
Asterisk Character
Plug Control Screen
Plug Group Status Screen
Plug Status Screen
Audible Alarm
Horizontal Units
Enable/Disable
Horizontal Units
Vertical Units
Index-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Circuit Breaker Open Alarm
Address
7-18 Current History Screen
7-18 Current Metering
Email Message
Notify Upon Clear
Resend Delay
Subject
Trigger Enable
Text Interface
7-17 Current Metering Log
7-18 Current Metering Status Screen
7-17 Customer Service
Clock and Calendar
Command Access Level
Command Confirmation
Command Echo
Network Port
Serial Port
Command Mode
Access
D
Date
Day
Scheduled Reboot
Debug
RADIUS
Defaulting Plugs
Text Interface
Default All Plugs
Default Button
Horizontal Units
Vertical Units
Delete
Logging Out
Command Prompt
Command Reference Guide
Command Set
Text Interface
Common Name
Communication
Configuration
Menus
Restore Previous
Restoring
LDAP Groups
Ping-No-Answer Reboot
Plug Groups
Scheduled Reboot
User Accounts
Via SNMP
Dell Brackets
Deny List
Saving
Via SNMP
Confirmation Prompt
Connecting Ports
Consecutive Failures
Ping-No-Answer Reboot
Console Port
Administrator
Configuration
Connection
Horizontal Units
Interface
DHCP
Dialback Security
Dictionary Support
RADIUS
Digital Display
Horizontal Units
Vertical Units
Disconnecting Ports
Display Selection Button
Horizontal Units
Vertical Units
Domain Name
Email Parameters
Domain Name Server
DSA Client
SuperUser
Supervisor Mode
Vertical Units
Copyrights
Copy to All Triggers
Circuit Breaker Open Alarm
Invalid Access Lockout Alarm
Lost Communication Alarm
Lost Voltage Alarm
Over Current Alarms
Over Temperature Alarms
Ping-No-Answer Alarm
Country
Create CSR
CRT Server Key
Upload
Current/Power Metering
LDAP Group
DTR Output
E
Email Address
SSL Certificate
Email Message
Circuit Breaker Open Alarm
Invalid Access Lockout Alarm
Lost Communication Alarm
Lost Voltage Alarm
Over Current Alarms
Over Temperature Alarms
Ping-No-Answer Alarm
Power Cycle Alarm
Index-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Email Parameters
Authentication Type
Domain
5-70 Initiating a Reboot Cycle
Text Interface
Web Browser Interface
From Address
From Name
5-70 Input Voltage
5-70 Interval After Failed Ping
Password
Port Number
Send Test Email
SMTP Server
To Address
Lockout Attempts
Lockout Duration
Lockout Enable
5-70 Invalid Access Lockout Alarm
User Name
Address
Encryption
Email Message
Notify Upon Clear
Resend Delay
Subject
Erasing Logs
Ethernet Port
Exit Command Mode
Text Interface
External Modem
4-4 IP Address
Trigger Enable
Network Port
Ping-No-Answer Reboot
IP Security
Adding IP Addresses
Examples
Operators and Wildcards
F
Fallback
Fallback Local
RADIUS
TACACS
Fallback Timer
RADIUS
K
TACACS
5-66 Kerberos
Firmware Upgrade
From Address
Email Parameters
From Name
Email Parameters
Front Panel Buttons
Domain Realms
Key Distribution Centers
Port
Realm
Set Up
L
G
LDAP
Gateway Address
Network Port
Group Membership Attribute
Group Membership Value Type
Access Level
Adding LDAP Groups
Bind Type
Current Monitoring
Deleting Groups
Enable
H
Hang Up String
Modem Mode
Hardware Description
Hardware Installation
Help Screen
Fallback
Group Membership Attribute
Group Membership Value Type
Group Name
Kerberos Set Up
LDAP Group Setup
LDAP Port
Modifying LDAP Groups
Parameters
Plug Access
Text Interface
Hook Brackets
HTTPS Access
HTTPS Port
HTTP Access
HTTP Port
Plug Group Access
Primary Host
I
Inactivity Timeout
Network Port
Search Bind DN
Search Bind Password
Secondary Host
Service Access
TLS/SSL Encryption
Serial Port
Indicator Lights
Initialization String
Modem Mode
Index-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
LDAP (continued)
User Search Base DN
User Search Filter
Viewing LDAP Groups
LEDs
Modem Access
5-61 Modem Mode
Hang Up String
Initialization String
Periodic Reset Value
Reset String
Line Power Source
Link Ports
Modify
Horizontal Units
Load Shedding
Auto Recovery
Branch Load Shedding
Enable
Line Load Shedding
Plug Access
Plug Group Access
Plug State
LDAP Groups
Ping-No-Answer Reboot
Plug Groups
Scheduled Reboot
User Accounts
Via SNMP
14-2 MPC-DISPLAY
Locality
Lockout Attempts
Lockout Duration
Lockout Enable
Logging Out
Text Interface
Login
Logoff Character
Network Port
Serial Port
Log Configuration
Log Function
Reading and Erasing
Syslog
Log Functions
Text Interface
Lost Communication Alarm
Address
Email Message
Notify Upon Clear
Resend Delay
Subject
Trigger Enable
Lost Voltage Alarm
Address
Email Message
Notify UPon Clear
Resend Delay
Subject
Trigger Enable
L Brackets
Horizontal Units
5-12 MPC-DISPLAY Unit
5-12 MPC-DISPLAY unit
N
Network Configuration
Accept Break
Administrator Mode
Command Echo
DHCP
Domain Name Server
Email Parameters
Gateway Address
HTTPS Access
HTTPS Port
HTTP Access
HTTP Port
Inactivity Timeout
IP Address
IP Security
Kerberos Set Up
LDAP Parameters
Logoff Character
Ping Access
RADIUS
Sequence Disconnect
SNMP Parameters
SSH Access
SSH Port
Static Route
Subnet Mask
Syslog Address
TACACS
Telnet Access
Telnet Port
M
Manual Controls
Manual Operation
Maximum Load
Maximum per Source
Menus
5-52 Network Parameters
MIB Parameters
Model Numbers
Modem
Index-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Network Port
5-51 Password
P
Administrator
Horizontal Units
SuperUser
Email Parameters
SNMPv3
Supervisor Mode
Vertical Units
5-51 PDAs
2-6 Periodic Reset Value
Network Port Parameters
Network Status Screen
Text Interface
Normal Mode
DTR Output
Notify Upon Clear
Circuit Breaker Open Alarm
Invalid Access Lockout Alarm
Lost Communication Alarm
Lost Voltage Alarm
Over Current Alarms
Over Temperature Alarms
Ping-No-Answer Alarm
NTP
Modem Mode
Address
Email Message
Notify Upon Clear
Resend Delay
Subject
Trigger Enable
7-19 Ping-No-Answer Reboot
Adding Reboots
Consecutive Failures
Deleting
Enable
Interval After Failed Ping
IP Address
Modifying
Ping Delay After Reboot
Ping Interval
Ping Test
Plug Access
Enable
NTP Timeout
Primary NTP Address
Secondary NTP Address
NTP Enable
NTP Timeout
Plug Group Access
Reboot
Reboot Action
Viewing
Ping Access
Ping Delay After Reboot
Ping Interval
Ping-No-Answer Reboot
Ping Test
Plugs
Horizontal Units
Vertical Units
Plug Access
O
OFF Command
ON Command
Operation
Organizational Name
Organizational Unit
Outlet Configuration
Output Cable Keeper
Over Current Alarms
Address
Alarm Clear Threshold
Alarm Set Threshold
Branch
Email Message
Line
Notify Upon Clear
Resend Delay
AUX Units
LDAP Group
Ping-No-Answer Reboot
Scheduled Reboot
Plug Action
Scheduled Reboot
Plug Control
Web Browser Interface
Plug Control Screen
Web Browser Interface
Plug Groups
Adding
Deleting
Editing
Modifying
Subject
Trigger Enable
Over Temperature Alarm
Alarm Clear Threshold
Alarm Set Threshold
Over Temperature Alarms
Address
Email Message
Notify Upon Clear
Resend Delay
Subject
Trigger Enable
Plug Access
Plug Group Name
Viewing
Index-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Plug Group Access
LDAP Group
5-27 Privacy
SNMPv3
Load Shedding
Ping-No-Answer Reboot
Scheduled Reboot
Plug Group Control
Initiating a Reboot Cycle
Web Browser Interface
Plug Group Status Screen
Text Interface
Plug Name
Plug Order
Plug Parameters
Boot/Sequence Delay
Boot Priority
Q
R
Quick Start Procedure
Rack Mounting
RADIUS
Accounting Port
Authentication Port
Debug
Dictionary Support
Enable
Fallback Local
Fallback Timer
Plug Name
Primary Address
Power Up Default
Plug Status Screen
Text Interface
Pocket Brackets
Port
Kerberos
Port Access
User Accounts
Port Connection
Port Mode
Primary Secret Word
Secondary Address
Secondary Secret Word
Set Up
Reading Logs
Read Only
SNMP Parameters
Real Power
Real Time Clock
Date
NTP Enable
NTP Timeout
Primary NTP Address
Secondary NTP Address
Time
Serial Port
Port Name
Serial Port
Port Number
Email Parameters
Power Configuration
Power Cycle Alarm
Address
Email Message
Subject
Trigger Enable
Power Efficiency
Power Factor
Power History Screen
Power Inlets
Horizontal Units
Vertical Units
Power Metering Status Screen
Power Range Status Screen
Power Ratings
Power Source
Power Supply Cables
Power Up Default
Primary Address
RADIUS
Time Zone
Reboot Action
Reboot Operating System
Reboot Options
Ping-No-Answer Reboot
Scheduled Reboot
Text Interface
Reboot Priority
Reboot System
Recurrance
Scheduled Reboot
Remote Display
Remote MPC Units
Remote Port
Configuration
Connecting Devices
Remote Port Connection
Resend Delay
Circuit Breaker Open Alarm
Invalid Access Lockout Alarm
Lost Communication Alarm
Lost Voltage Alarm
Over Current Alarms
Over Temperature Alarms
Ping-No-Answer Alarm
TACACS
Primary Host
Primary NTP Address
Primary Secret Word
RADIUS
Index-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Reset String
Serial Port (continued)
Port Mode
Port Name
Sequence Disconnect
Stop Bits
Modem Mode
Restore Configuration
Restoring Parameters
RS232 Port
Interface
Apx-2 Serial Port Access
RSA Client
10-1 Serial Port Configuration
Serial Port Connection
S
Server Private Key
Safety Information
Saving Parameters
Text Interface
Scheduled Reboot
Adding
Service Access
LDAP Group
Set Parameters to Defaults
Set Plugs to Defaults
Text Interface
Signed Certificate
Site I.D.
Text Interface
SMTP Server
SNMP
Adding Users
Configuration
Configuration Via
Controlling Plugs
Controlling Plug Groups
Deleting Users
Modifying Users
Operation via
SNMP Traps
Day
Deleting
Modifying
Plug Access
Plug Action
Plug Group Access
Recurrance
Scheduled Reboot Name
Time
Turn On Day
Turn On Time
Viewing
Search Bind DN
Search Pind Password
Secondary Address
RADIUS
Testing
Viewing Users
View Unit Status
SNMPv3
TACACS
Secondary Host
Secondary NTP Address
Secondary Secret Word
RADIUS
Secret Word
TACACS
Self Signed Certificate
Send Test Email
Sequence Disconnect
Network Port
Serial Port
Serial Port
Authentication
Authentication/Privacy
Authentication Protocol
Encryption
Password
Username
SNMP Agent
SNMP Parameters
Access
Authentication
Authentication Protocol
Enable
Privacy
Read Only
SNMPv3
Accept Break
Access
Administrator Mode
Baud Rate
Bits and Parity
Command Echo
Configuration
Disconnection
Handshake Mode
Horizontal Units
Inactivity Timeout
Interface
SNMPv3 Password
SNMPv3 User Name
SNMP Community
SNMP Contact
SNMP Location
Version
SNMP Trap
SNMP Managers
Trap Community
Specifications
Logoff Character
Modem Mode
Normal Mode
Index-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
SSH
Access
Encryption
Keys
SSH Access
5-2 Syslog
Configuration
Syslog Address
Syslog Messages
Testing Configuration
SSH Port
5-52 System Parameters
SSL Certificate
Common Name
Country
Create CSR
Email Address
Automated Mode
Callback Security
Command Confirmation
Command Prompt
Invalid Access Lockout
Log Configuration
Real Time Clock
Locality
Organizational Name
Organizational Unit
State or Province
Upload Signed Certificate
State or Province
Static Route
Site I.D.
Temperature Calibration
Temperature Format
User Directory
Voltage Calibration
Status Screens
Stop Bits
Serial Port
T
TACACS
Subject
Authentication Port
Configuration
Enable
Fallback Local
Fallback Timer
Primary Address
Secondary Address
Secret Word
Circuit Breaker Open Alarm
Invalid Access Lockout Alarm
Lost Communication Alarm
Lost Voltage Alarm
Over Current Alarms
Over Temperature Alarms
Ping-No-Answer Alarm
Power Cycle Alarm
Subnet Mask
Network Port
SuperUser
Network Port
Supervisor Mode
Supervisor Mode
Console Port
Network Port
Support
Tech Support
Telnet
Access
Max. per Source
Telnet Access
Telnet Port
Temperature Calibration
Temperature Format
Test Menu
Text Interface
Applying Commands to Several Plugs
Command Set
Initiating a Reboot Cycle
Plug Status Screen
Set Plugs to Defaults
Switching Outlets Off
Switching Outlets On
Third Party Disconnect
Time
Scheduled Reboot
Time Zone
TLS/SSL Encryption
Toggle All Plugs
Sure Prompt
Switched Outlets
Horizontal Units
Vertical Units
Switching Outlets Off
Text Interface
Web Browser Interface
Switching Outlets On
Text Interface
Web Browser Interface
Switching Plugs Off
Text Interface
Web Browser Interface
Switching Plugs On
Text Interface
To Address
Email Parameters
Trademarks
Web Browser Interface
Index-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Trigger Enable
V
Circuit Breaker Open Alarm
Invalid Access Lockout Alarm
Lost Communication Alarm
Lost Voltage Alarm
Over Current Alarms
Over Temperature Alarms
Ping-No-Answer Alarm
Power Cycle Alarm
Turn On Day
7-17 Version
7-25 SNMP
7-19 View
LDAP Groups
Ping-No-Answer Reboot
Plug Groups
Scheduled Reboot
User Accounts
Via SNMP
Scheduled Reboot
Turn On Time
6-7 ViewOnly
Voltage Calibration
Scheduled Reboot
6-7 Voltage Setting
U
Unit Description
Unit to Configure
Load Shedding
Power Configuration
Universal Mounting Bracket
Unlock Port
W
Web Access
7-5 Web Browser Interface
Initiating a Reboot Cycle
Plug Control Screen
Plug Group Control Screen
Switching Outlets Off
Switching Outlets On
Text Interface
Upgrade Firmware
Upgrading Firmware
Upload
CRT Server Key
Signed Certificate
User
Z
Zero-U Pocket Brackets
Username
Email Parameters
SNMPV3
User Accounts
Access Level
Access Levels
Adding
Command Access Levels
Current Monitoring
Deleting
Editing
Modifying
Password
Plug Access
Plug Group Access
Port Access
Service Access
Username
Viewing
User Directory
User Search Base DN
User Search Filter
Index-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|